P124 en T E44 PDF

MiCOM P124
Self & Dual Powered Overcurrent Relays
P124/EN T/E44
Technical Guide
Technical Guide P124/EN T/E44
MiCOM P124 Page 1/2
SELF & DUAL POWERED OVERCURRENT RELAYS

MiCOM P124
CONTENT
Safety instructions
Introduction Chapter 1
Handling, installation and case dimensions Chapter 2
User Guide P124 Self-powered Relay Chapter 3-1
Menu Content MiCOM P124 Self-powered Chapter 3-2
User Guide P124 Dual-powered Relay Chapter 4-1
Menu Content MiCOM P124 Dual-powered Chapter 4-2
Technical data & curves characteristics Chapter 5
Applications Guide Chapter 6
Commissioning and Maintenance Guide Chapter 7
Communication Database Chapter 8
Connection Diagrams APPENDIX 1
Commissioning test and record sheets APPENDIX 2

P124/EN T/E44 Technical Guide
Page 2/2 MiCOM P124

Pxxx/EN SS/G11
SAFETY SECTION
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
Safety Section Page 1/8
STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL

LABEL INFORMATION FOR SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
EQUIPMENT
1. INTRODUCTION 3
2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 3
3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 4

3.1 Symbols 4
3.2 Labels 4
4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 4
5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 7
6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 8

6.1 Protective fuse rating 8
6.2 Protective Class 8
6.3 Installation Category 8
6.4 Environment 8
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
Page 2/8 Safety Section
BLANK PAGE
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
1. INTRODUCTION
This guide and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe
handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Guide also includes
descriptions of equipment label markings.
Documentation for equipment ordered from Schneider Electric is despatched separately from
manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is
provided to ensure that printed information which may be present on the equipment is fully
understood by the recipient.
The technical data in this safety guide is typical only, see the technical data section of the
relevant product publication(s) for data specific to a particular equipment.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the
contents of this Safety Guide and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is
installed, commissioned or serviced.
Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some
equipment.
2. HEALTH AND SAFETY

The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure
that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with
the contents of that Safety Section, or this Safety Guide.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts
of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may
endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
• Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and
of the system to which it is being connected;
• Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorised to energize and de-energize equipment and
to isolate, ground, and label it;
• Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety
engineering practices;
• Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and
operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include
detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take
any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical
sales office and request the necessary information.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the
equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the
equipment is installed or commissioned.
3.1 Symbols
Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth)

terminal.
Note: This symbol may also be used for a
Protective Conductor (Earth) Terminal if that
terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-
assembly e.g. power supply.
*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE

DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM
GROUND.
3.2 Labels
See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M/G11) for equipment labelling information.
4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this
equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.
The equipment documentation should be consulted before installing,
commissioning, or servicing the equipment.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may
present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
The clamping screws of all terminal block connectors, for field wiring, using M4
screws shall be tightened to a nominal torque of 1.3 Nm.
Equipment intended for rack or panel mounting is for use on a flat surface of a
Type 1 enclosure, as defined by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also
electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD)
precautions are not taken.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by
all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.
Voltage and current connections shall be made using insulated crimp terminations
to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety.
Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided in numerical relays to indicate
the health of the device. Schneider Electric strongly recommends that these
contacts are hardwired into the substation's automation system, for alarm
purposes.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool
for the wire size should be used.
The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection
diagram.
Protection Class I Equipment
- Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective
conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the
supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.
- The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since
the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be
lost.
- When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to
terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the
protective (earth) conductor is checked after the addition or removal of
such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the
protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or
similar.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm²
(3.3 mm² for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section
of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring
regulations.
The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short
as possible.
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that
are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs
and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are
connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be
connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked:
- Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation),
- CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections,
- Protective fuse rating,
- Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where
applicable),
- Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.
Accidental touching of exposed terminals
If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of
electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with
IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided.
Equipment use
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts,
which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
UL and CSA/CUL Listed or Recognized equipment

To maintain UL and CSA/CUL Listing/Recognized status for North America the
equipment should be installed using UL or CSA Listed or Recognized parts for
the following items: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit
breakers, insulation crimp terminals and replacement internal battery, as
specified in the equipment documentation.
For external protective fuses a UL or CSA Listed fuse shall be used. The Listed
type shall be a Class J time delay fuse, with a maximum current rating of 15 A
and a minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c., for example type AJT15.
Where UL or CSA Listing of the equipment is not required, a high rupture
capacity (HRC) fuse type with a maximum current rating of 16 Amps and a
minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c. may be used, for example Red Spot type NIT or
TIA.
Equipment operating conditions
The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and
environmental limits.
Current transformer circuits
Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced
may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety,
the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to
it.
For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block
for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the
module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the
equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies.
For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for
current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal
of the module.
External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs)
Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted
to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched.
Battery replacement
Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended
type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the
equipment, buildings and persons.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the
end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to
discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion of modules and pcb cards
Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the
equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage.
Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards
Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used,
this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized.
This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may
be accessible on the extender card.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
External test blocks and test plugs

Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such
as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be
accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the
insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
*Note: When a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test
Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making
them safe.
Fiber optic communication
Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or
signal level of the device.
Cleaning
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water,
when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally
protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed.
5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

De-commissioning
The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the
supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely
isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the
capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to
de-commissioning.
Disposal
It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided.
The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment
containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking
precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of
operation, may apply to the disposal of the equipment.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable.
6.1 Protective fuse rating
The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A,
high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. Unless otherwise
stated in equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable. The protective fuse
should be located as close to the unit as possible.
CAUTION - CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may
produce lethal hazardous voltages.
6.2 Protective Class
IEC 60255-27: 2005 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment

documentation). This equipment requires a protective
EN 60255-27: 2006
conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety.
6.3 Installation Category
IEC 60255-27: 2005 Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III):

EN 60255-27: 2006 Distribution level, fixed installation.
Equipment in this category is qualification tested at
5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500 Ω, 0.5 J, between all
supply circuits and earth and also between
independent circuits.
6.4 Environment
The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an
outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will
enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of
protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected).
Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by reference
Altitude - Operation up to 2000m to safety standards.
IEC 60255-27:2005
EN 60255-27: 2006
Technical Guide P124/EN T01/B44
MiCOM P124
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Introduction CHAPTER 1
MiCOM P124 Page 1/6
CONTENT
1. INTRODUCTION 3
2. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 3
3. INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS 4
4. MAIN FUNCTIONS 5
P124/EN T01/B44 Technical Guide
CHAPTER 1 Introduction
Page 2/6 MiCOM P124
PAGE BLANCHE
MiCOM P124 Page 3/6
1. INTRODUCTION
The overcurrent relays of the MiCOM P124 series are Schneider Electric™s self- and
dual-powered relays. The MiCOM P124 series are designed to control, protect and
supervise industrial plants as well as public distribution systems and substations and
do not require an external power supply. They may also be used as backup to
distance protection relays in electrical transmission networks.
2. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This guide provides a description of the overcurrent relays:
− MiCOM P124 self-powered relay,
− MiCOM P124 dual-powered relay.
It allows the user to become familiar with the relays' applications, installation, setting
and commissioning.
This manual has the following format :
Chapter 1. Introduction
Contents of the manual and general introduction to the MiCOM P124 of relays
covered by the Guide.
Chapter 2. Handling, installation and case dimensions
Precautions to be taken when handling electronic equipment.
Chapter 3. User Guide of MiCOM P124 self-powered relays
A detailed description of the features of the MiCOM P124 self-powered relay.
Chapter 4. User Guide of MiCOM P124 dual-powered relays
A detailed description of the features of the MiCOM P124 dual-powered relay.
Chapter 5. Technical specifications and curves characteristics
Comprehensive details on nominal values, setting ranges, specifications and curves
characteristics
Chapter 6. Application Guide
Detailed recommendations for choosing the CTs.
Chapter 7. Commissioning and Maintenance Guide
Guide to commissioning, problem solving and maintenance of MiCOM P124 relays.
APPENDICES :
• Connection diagrams
• Commissioning test records
• Hardware and Software versions historical
Page 4/6 MiCOM P124
3. INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS

The range of MiCOM protection relays follows on from the success of the MIDOS, K,
MODN and OPN ranges by incorporating the last changes in digital technology. The
relays from the MiCOM P124 are fully compatible and use the same modular box
concept. The MiCOM P124 of relays provides more protection for the most
demanding applications.
Each relay has a large number of functions for controlling and collecting data. This
can form part of a fully integrated system covering protection, control,
instrumentation, data acquisition and the recording of faults, events and
disturbances. The relays are equipped on the front panel with a liquid crystal display
(LCD) with 2 x 16 back-lit alphanumerical characters, a tactile 7 button keypad (to
gain access to all the parameters, alarms and measurements) and 8 LEDs simply
displaying the state of the MiCOM P124 relays. In addition, the use of the RS485
communication port makes it possible to read, reinitialise and change the settings of
the relays, if required, from a local or remote PC computer equipped with
appropriate software.
An RS232 port is available on the front panel of the MiCOM P124 relays for
downloading a software version (for updating, changing language, etc…) and
connecting the PC equipped with the support software MiCOM S1.
Its flexibility of use, reduced maintenance requirements and ease of integration allow
the MiCOM P124 to provide an evolving solution for the problems of the protection
of electric networks.
The MiCOM P124 relays provide earth fault and overcurrent protection for electrical
distribution systems, industrial systems and any application requiring overcurrent
protection where no auxiliary supply is available or where the auxiliary supply is not
reliable. The earth fault element is sensitive enough for use with electrical systems
where the earth fault current is low.
MiCOM P124 Page 5/6
4. MAIN FUNCTIONS
The following table shows the functions available in the various models of the
MiCOM P124 of relays.
SELF-POWERED DUAL-POWERED
Type
(Order code Vaux = S) (Order code Vaux = A, F, or M)
Protection functions
Non-directional three-phase X X
overcurrent (50/51)
Non-directional earth fault overcurrent X X
(50N/51N)
Instantaneous thresholds X X
Thermal overload (49) X X
Negative sequence overcurrent (46) X
Undercurrent (37) X (note 1)
Circuit breaker failure (50 BF) X
Cold load pickup X (note 1)
Broken conductor detection X
Blocking logic X (note 1)
Relay selective scheme logic X (note 1)
Output relays latching (86) X (note 1)
Fail-safe operation X
Autorecloser option (79) X (note 1)
Ancillary functions
Dual power supply (Vaux + CT) X
Output for striker X X
Trip changeover output relay for CB X X
coil
Healthy LED 1 led (note 2) 1 led (note 2)
Other LEDs No 3 + 4 programmable
Magnetic flag for trip information 1 1
4 magnetic flags option No option 4 programmable
Setting groups 1 2
Measurements (true RMS values) X X
Current maximum and average values X X
Fault records X (note 4) X
Event records X (note 1)
Disturbance records X (note 1)
Circuit breaker supervision X
Communication RS485 rear port Not applicable X
Communication RS232 front port X (note 3) X (note 3)
Page 6/6 MiCOM P124
NOTES : (1) Functions not available in case of loss of auxiliary power

supply
(2) The Healthy LED indicates that the relay is being powered by
either the auxiliary voltage or the CTs above the minimum
required current.
(3) For the self-powered MiCOM P124 relay, and for the dual-
powered MiCOM P124 relay during loss of auxiliary
voltage, the power necessary to set the relay can be
provided via this RS232 port, thanks to the battery box
MiCOM E1.
(4) Simplified fault record (date and time not available).
Technical Guide P124/EN T02/C44
MiCOM P124
CHAPTER 2
Handling, Installation and Case
Dimensions
Handling, installation and CHAPTER 2
case dimensions Page 1/8
MiCOM P124
CONTENT
1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 3
1.1 Receipt of relays 3
1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 3
2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 4
3. RELAY MOUNTING 5
4. UNPACKING 5
5. STORAGE 5
6. CASE DIMENSIONS 6
P124/EN T02/C44 Technical Guide
CHAPTER 2 Handling, installation and
case dimensions
Page 2/8 MiCOM P124
BLANK PAGE
MiCOM P124
1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
1.1 Receipt of relays
Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment
prior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to
ensure no damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained
during transit a claim should be made to the transport contractor and
Schneider Electric should be promptly notified.
Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation
should be returned to their protective polythene bags.
1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
The relays use components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges.
The electronic circuits are well protected by the metal case and the internal module
should not be withdrawn unnecessarily. When handling the module outside its case,
care should be taken to avoid contact with components and electrical connections. If
removed from the case for storage, the module should be placed in an electrically
conducting antistatic bag.
There are no setting adjustments within the module and it is advised that it is not
unnecessarily disassembled. Although the printed circuit boards are plugged
together, the connectors are a manufacturing aid and not intended for frequent
dismantling; in fact considerable effort may be required to separate them. Touching
the printed circuit board should be avoided, since complementary metal oxide
semiconductors (CMOS) are used, which can be damaged by static electricity
discharged from the body.
case dimensions
Page 4/8 MiCOM P124
2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several
thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when
handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be
immediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed
in the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modules
unnecessarily.
Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor
devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following
precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the
equipment has been designed and manufactured.
1. Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic
potential as the equipment by touching the case.
2. Handle the module by its frontplate, frame or edges of the printed circuit
board. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or
connectors.
3. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at
the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is
at the same potential as yourself.
5. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.
If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment
in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist
strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500kΩ − 10ΜΩ.
If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to
prevent a build-up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for making
measurements should be earthed to the case whenever possible.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be
found in BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. It is strongly recommended that detailed
investigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a
special handling area such as described in the above-mentioned BS and IEC
documents.
MiCOM P124
3. RELAY MOUNTING
Relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly.
If an MMLG test block is to be included it should be positioned at the right-hand side
of the assembly (viewed from the front). Modules should remain protected by their
metal case during assembly into a panel or rack.
For individually mounted relays an outline diagram is supplied in section 6 of this
chapter showing the panel cut-outs and hole centres.
4. UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the
parts is damaged or the settings altered. Relays must only be handled by skilled
persons. The installation should be clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and
excessive vibration. The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays that have
been removed from their cases should not be left in situations where they are
exposed to dust or damp. This particularly applies to installations which are being
carried out at the same time as construction work.
5. STORAGE
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt they should be stored in a
place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags
have been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the de-
humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag has been exposed to ambient
conditions and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour, prior to
replacing it in the carton.
Dust which collects on a carton may, on subsequent unpacking, find its way into the
relay; in damp conditions the carton and packing may become impregnated with
moisture and the de-humifier will lose its efficiency.
Storage temperature : –25°C to +70°C.
case dimensions
Page 6/8 MiCOM P124
6. CASE DIMENSIONS
MiCOM P124 relays are available in a 4U metal case for panel or flush mounting.
Weight : about 2.9 Kg
External size : Height Case 152 mm
Front panel 177 mm
Width Case 148,1 mm
Front panel 155 mm
Depth Case 140,8 mm
Front panel + case 166 mm
129.6 10.2
4 holes Ø 3.4
103.6 23.2
148.1
168 158 ±0.5
Flush mounting
+ 0.8
(Top) 150 0
4 holes Ø 4.4
Front panel (Holes sizes)
155 25.1 139.8
MiCOM P124
Trip
IA = 214A
Trip
Alarm
Warning 177 155.2

Healthy
Flush mounting
10
(Front) (Right)
MiCOM P124
MiCOM E1 Battery case sizes :

Height Case 30 mm
Width Case 68 mm
Length Case 110 mm
case dimensions
Page 8/8 MiCOM P124
BLANK PAGE
MiCOM P124
CHAPTER 3-1
User Guide
P124 Self-powered Relay
User Guide CHAPTER 3-1
MiCOM P124 Page 1/24
CONTENT
1. DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS 3

1.1 General information 3
1.2 Trip of the circuit breaker 3
2. USER INTERFACE 5
2.1 Front panel display and keypad 5
2.1.1 The display 5
2.1.2 Keypad 5
2.2 Front panel LED and magnetic flag 6
2.3 The two areas under the top and bottom flaps 6
2.4 The battery box 6
2.5 Description of the MiCOM P124 self-powered front panel 7
2.5.1 LEDs 7
2.5.2 Magnetic flag 7
3. MENUS 8
3.1 Default display 8
3.2 Access to the menu 8
3.3 Password 8
3.3.1 Password protection 8
3.3.2 Entering the password 8
3.3.3 Changing the password 9
3.4 ALARM display 9
3.4.1 Electrical system ALARMS 9
3.4.2 Relay Hardware or Software ALARMS 10
3.5 Menu contents 11
3.5.1 O.P. Parameters menu 12
3.5.2 CONFIGURATION Menu 13
3.5.3 MEASUREMENTS Menu 14
3.5.4 PROTECTION Menu 15
3.5.4.1 [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu 15
3.5.4.2 [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu 17
3.5.4.3 [49] Therm OL sub-menu 19
CHAPTER 3-1 User Guide
Page 2/24 MiCOM P124
3.5.5 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu 20

3.5.5.1 Trip Commands sub-menu 20
3.5.6 RECORD Menu 21
3.5.6.1 Fault Record sub-menu 21
3.5.6.2 Time Peak Value 22
4. WIRING 23
4.1 Current inputs (measurement) 23
4.2 Output relays 23
4.3 Striker output 24
4.4 RS 232 Front Communication port 24
1. DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS

1.1 General information
The MiCOM P124 relays, in their self-powered and dual-powered versions, make
best use of numerical techniques to provide protection and control functions.
They have 4 analogue inputs (3 phase currents and 1 earth current). The current
inputs have to be specified on order (1A or 5A).
The front panel allows the user access to the information in the relay, either via the
LEDs and/or magnetic flags, or via the LCD and keypad.
The various alarms are saved in memory and are available to the user on the backlit
LCD. Reading and clearing of these alarms are possible without password.
Wiewing the settings and measurements is not password protected but modification
or deletion can only be done after entering the saved password.
MiCOM P124 dual-powered version:
The MiCOM relay dual-powered version can be powered either by an external power
supply source or by the line currents from the CTs (the minimum load current must be
over 0.2 In on at least one phase).
MiCOM P124 self-powered version:
This model provides fully comprehensive protection functions without and external
power supply.
The power is taken from line currents provided by the CTs (the minimum load current
must be over 0.2 In on at least one phase).
THIS CHAPTER 3 OF THE P124 TECHNICAL GUIDE DESCRIBES THE USER
INTERFACE AND THE CONNECTIONS OF THE SELF-POWERED VERSION OF
THE MiCOM P124 RELAY.
1.2 Trip of the circuit breaker
Whatever the version (dual or self-powered), the MiCOM P124 relays can trip the
circuit breaker via a C/O contact or striker output.
Trip via a striker output:
The relay performs a capacitance discharge output capable of putting out sufficient
power (20mJ at 12V) to a striker (K1.3 type or equivalent) releasing the actuating
mechanism of the CB.
39 +
Striker output
41 –
P124
FIGURE 1: STRIKER SUPPLIED FROM P124

This tripping output is completely independent from any auxiliary supply.

Trip via a changeover contact:
The relay performs a changeover contact relay output with a high breaking capacity
to trip the circuit breaker coil.
The operation of the changeover contact is completely independent from any
auxiliary supply. On the other hand, an auxiliary supply will be necessary for the
supply of the CB coil.
Auxiliary supply
44
RL1 42
40
P124
Auxiliary supply
FIGURE 2: TRIP OF THE CB COIL VIA A CHANGEOVER CONTACT

2. USER INTERFACE
The MiCOM P124 relay front panel serves as an interface between the user and the
protection relay. It enables the user to enter relay settings, display the measured
values, alarms and display clearly the various actions carried out by MiCOM P124
relay.
The front panel of the relay consists of three separate sections:
− The LCD display and the keypad,
− The LED's
− The two zones under the upper and lower flaps.
The battery box (accessory):
Associated with the MiCOM P124 relays, the battery box MiCOM E1 can be used to
allow the user to access the menu when there is no line current (circuit breaker open).
2.1 Front panel display and keypad
2.1.1 The display
The front panel of the MiCOM P124 relays caries a liquid crystal display (LCD) on
which data such as settings, measured values and alarms can be viewed. The data is
accessed through a menu system.
The liquid crystal display has two lines each with sixteen characters. A back-light is
activated when any key is pressed and will remain lit for five minutes after the last key
press. This allows the display to be read in most lighting conditions.
NOTA : IN ORDER TO SAVE ENERGY, THE LCD IS BACKLIT ONLY
WHEN THERE IS AT LEAST ONE PHASE CURRENT ABOVE 0.5 In.
2.1.2 Keypad
The keypad has seven keys divided into two groups :
Two keys situated immediately under the screen (keys ! and ").
Five main keys situated at the middle of the front face are for programming.
The two keys ! and " are dedicated for reading and acknowledging the alarms. So
as to display successive alarms, press on key ". The alarms are presented in reverse
order for their detection (the most recent first, the oldest last). So as to acknowledge
the alarms, the user can either acknowledge each alarm using ! or go to the end of
the ALARM menu and carry out a general acknowledgement.
NOTA : NO PASSWORD IS REQUIRED TO ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS.
The five keys situated in the middle of the MiCOM front panel are dedicated to
setting the relay.
The # $ % & keys make it possible to move in the direction indicated to the various
levels of the menus.
The ' key validates a choice or value (modification of settings).
2.2 Front panel LED and magnetic flag

One LED and one magnetic flag are available for the self-powered version of the
P124 relay.
The default corresponding labels on the front panel are in the English language but
the user is provided with a set of French stickers.
2.3 The two areas under the top and bottom flaps
Under the upper flap, a label identifies the relay according to its model (ordering
code) and series number. This information defines the product uniquely and
specifically.
In making all requests for information from Schneider Electric After Sales
Department, please quote these two numbers.
Information indicated in the lower portion of this label covers the nominal earth
current value and the rated current (1A or 5A).
Under the lower flap, an RS232 port is available to download a new version of the
protection software, as well as the settings created in a dedicated PC software
MiCOM S1. The same software allows to view all the relays internal data
(measurements, events…).
When there is no line current from the CTs (circuit breaker open), the user can view
or modify the settings by powering the MiCOM P124 relay with the battery box
MiCOM E1 connected to the RS232 port.
The withdrawal of the MiCOM active part (chassis) from the case is effected by
opening the two flaps, then with a 3mm screwdriver, turn the extractor situated under
the upper flap, and pull using the two slots situated behind these flaps.
2.4 The battery box
Battery box
To MiCOM P124
RS 232
Input for
external supply
12Vcc – 24Vcc
FIGURE 3: BATTERY BOX MiCOM E1

The battery box performs the two following functions:
1. Temporary powering of the relay in order to allow the user to view or modify
data. The battery used is a 6LR61 type (9V) which can power the relay up to 3
hours.
When the battery is flat it is possible to power the battery box with an external
dc supply. The dc voltage value must be comprised between 12Vdc and 24Vdc.
2. RS232 interface between the MiCOM P124 relay and the PC equipped with the
setting software MiCOM S1.
2.5 Description of the MiCOM P124 self-powered front panel
2 x 16 character
backlit display
2 tactile buttons
to view and Magnetic flag for
acknowledge trip indication
alarms and
indications
Retractable flaps
allowing to
Healthy LED remove the
active part of the
relay
5-key keypad for

settings and
viewing Battery box
MiCOM E1
RS 232
FIGURE 4: MiCOM P124 SELF-POWERED FRONT PANEL

2.5.1 LEDs
One LED is available on the left hand side of the front panel:
LED 4 Colour: GREEN Label: HEALTHY
This LED is lit when the relay correctly powered by a sufficient line current, provided
by one or several CTs.
The LED is also lit when the relay is powered by the battery box.
Note: the front panel of the self-powered relay has holes meant for the dual-powered
relay. On the self-powered relay, only LED 4 is used.
2.5.2 Magnetic flag
The magnetic flag indicates that a tripping command has been issued to the CB coil
or striker by switching to yellow.
The flag can be reset (black side) by depressing the ! key either the relay is being
powered by the battery box when the circuit breaker is open, or when it is powered by
a sufficient line current.
3. MENUS
The menu of the MiCOM P124 relays is organised into main and sub menus.
3.1 Default display
By default, the value of the current IA is continuously displayed.
As soon as an alarm is generated by the MiCOM relay, that information is
considered as priority and replaces the default value.
3.2 Access to the menu
Complete menu access is performed by manipulation of the keys # $ % &.
The general arrangement of the menus is shown in figure 3.
Reading of parameters and measurements is possible without entering the password.
Modification of the parameters requires entering the password.
Should an error be made in entering a parameter, press ! to cancel.
Except for reading and cancelling, the keys ! and " are inactive.
NOTA : The letter P is displayed at the botton-right of each first (main
menu) and second menu level when the password is entered.
This password remains active for 5 minutes of keypad inactivity.
3.3 Password
3.3.1 Password protection
Password protection is applicable to the relay settings, especially to the selection of
the various thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of inputs
and outputs relays.
The password consists of four alphabetical capital characters. When leaving the
factory, the password is AAAA. The user can define his own combination of
characters. Should the password be lost or forgotten, the modification of the stored
parameters of the relay is prohibited. It is then necessary to contact the manufacturer
or his agent by specifying the serial number of the relay so as to receive a stand-by
password specific to the relay concerned.
3.3.2 Entering the password
The input of the password is requested as soon as a modification of a parameter is
made for any one of the menus or sub-menus. The user enters for each of the 4
characters/letters and validates the entire password with '.
After 5 seconds, the display returns to the point of the preceding menu.
If no action is taken on the keypad for 5 minutes, the password is deactivated. A new
request shall be associated with any subsequent parameter modification.
NOTE : WHILE THE PASSWORD IS ACTIVE, IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO
DOWNLOAD A SETTING FILE FROM THE PC SETTING
SOFTWARE MiCOM S1.
3.3.3 Changing the password

To change the active password, go to the OP. PARAMETERS menu and then to the
point of the Password sub menu. Enter the old password and validate. Then press '
and enter the new password character per character and validate the new password
using '.
The message NEW PASSWORD OK is displayed to indicate that the password has
changed.
3.4 ALARM display
The management of alarms is directly displayed on the LCD. The display of alarm
messages has priority over the default current value. As soon as an alarm is detected
by the relay (threshold crossing for example), the message is displayed on the
MiCOM LCD display.
The alarm messages are classed as follows :
• Electrical power network alarm message
• Hardware or software fault message from the relay.
3.4.1 Electrical system ALARMS
Any crossing of a threshold (instantaneous or time delay) generates an "electrical
network alarm". For each threshold the involved threshold is indicated. If several
alarms are triggered, they are all stored in their order of appearance the most recent
alarm first, the oldest alarm last. Each message is numbered and the total of
messages is shown.
The user read all the alarm messages using " without entering the password.
The user acknowledges the alarms using !. The user can acknowledge each
message one by one or all by going to the end of the list and acknowledge all the
messages using !.
The different Electrical system alarms are described below :
I0> 1ST stage earth fault pick-up
I0>> 2nd stage earth fault pick-up
I0>>> 3rd stage earth fault pick-up
I> 1st stage overcurrent pick-up
I>> 2nd stage overcurrent pick-up
I>>> 3rd stage overcurrent pick-up
tI0> 1st stage earth fault time-out
tI0>> 2nd stage earth fault time-out
tI0>>> 3rd stage earth fault time-out
tI> 1st stage overcurrent time-out
tI>> 2nd stage overcurrent time-out
tI>>> 3rd stage overcurrent time-out
THERMAL ALARM thermal alarm threshold pick-up
THERMAL TRIP thermal trip threshold pick-up
3.4.2 Relay Hardware or Software ALARMS

Any software or hardware Fault of the MiCOM relay generates a "hard/software
alarm". If several alarms are acquired they are all stored in their order of
appearance. Display of the alarms is in reverse order (the most recent first and the
oldest last). Each message is numbered and the total of messages is indicated below.
The user can read all the alarm messages with the aid of ", without entering the
password.
The acknowledgement of the relay alarm messages is IMPOSSIBLE. Only the
disappearance of the cause reset the alarm.
Possible Hardware or Software alarm messages :
« EEPROM ERROR DATA » : Data in EEPROM memory in fault
« CT ERROR » : Analogue channel in fault
« EEPROM ERROR CALIBR » : Calibration zone in fault
WARNING: IN ORDER TO SAVE ENERGY, THE WATCHDOG RELAY RL0 IS USED ONLY
WHEN THERE IS A 0.4 IN CURRENT ON AT LEAST ONE PHASE. RL0 IS DE-
ENERGISED BELOW THAT CURRENT LEVEL OR IN CASE OF HARDWARE OR
SOFTWARE PROBLEM.
3.5 Menu contents
DEFAULT DISPLAY
OP PARAMETERS
IA = 1245 A
CONFIGURATION
MEASUREMENTS
PROTECTION
AUTOMAT.CTRL
RECORDS
FIGURE 3 : ORGANISATION OF MICOM P124 SELF-POWERED MAIN MENU

The menu of the MiCOM P124 Self-powered (without auxiliary power supply) relays is
divided into 6 sections :
OP PARAMETERS
CONFIGURATION
MEASUREMENTS
PROTECTION
AUTOMAT. CTRL
RECORDS
To access these menus from the default display use $.
To return to the default display from these menus or sub-menus press #.
NOTE: A menu content table is given in the chapter 3-2.
3.5.1 O.P. Parameters menu
OP Parameters Heading of the OP PARAMETERS menu

To gain access to the menu content, press $.
Password = Entry of the password to be able to modify the MiCOM relay

**** settings and parameters.
To enter the password, press '.
Password = Entry of the password is made letter by letter using # $ to

AAAA go up or down the alphabet.
After each letter, press % to enter the following letter. At the
end, press ' to validate the password. If the password is
correct, the message « PASSWORD OK » is displayed on the
screen.
The password is initailly set in the factory to AAAA
WARNING : AS SOON AS THE PASSWORD HAS BEEN ENTERED, NO SETTING CHANGE

USING THE FRONT PORT COMMUNICATION CAN BE ACCEPTED AND
THIS DURING 5 MINUTES.
Description = Displays the MiCOM P124applicable relay model

P124 S S = Without auxiliary power supply (self-powered)
D = Dual-powered (with auxiliary power supply)
Reference = Displays the name of the equipment associated with the

ALST relay.
NOTE : The reference is initially set in the factory to ALST.
Software Version Displays the version of the software

1.B
Frequency = Nominal value of the network frequency. Select either 50 or

50 Hz 60 Hz. To modify this value, press ' and press # $ to
select the desired value. Validate your choice using '.
Relay Status = 1 Displays the state of the trip logic output. (RL1)
0 - state 0 : output relay inactive
- state 1 : output relay active
NOTA : The Watch-dog output (RL0) is not display in the
output status menu.
3.5.2 CONFIGURATION Menu

The CONFIGURATION menu is used to set the earth and phase CT ratios so that
primary values can be displayed.
CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to

the CT RATIO menu, press $, %.
CT Ratio Heading of the CT RATIO sub-menu.

To gain access to the sub-menu content, press $.
Line CT primary = Display of the primary ratio of the phase CT. The value
1000 consists of 4 digits: Minimum 1, Maximum 9999.
Press ' to modify this value and use # $ % & to display
the new primary phase CT ratio. Enable your choice using
' at the end of selection
E/Gnd CT primary = Display of the primary ratio of the earth CT. The consist of 4
1000 digits : Minimum 1, Maximum 9999.
Press ' to modify this value and use # $ % & to display
the new primary earth CT ratio. Enable your choice using '
at the end of selection.
3.5.3 MEASUREMENTS Menu
MEASUREMENTS Heading of the MEASUREMENTS menu. To gain access to

the MEASUREMENTS menu, press $, %, 2 times.
Frequency = Display the network frequency calculated from phase

50.01 Hz currents
IA= Display the A phase current (True RMS value) taking into
257.05 A account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO
sub-menu).
IB= Display the B phase current (True RMS value) taking into
sub-menu)
IC= Display the C phase current (True RMS value) taking into
sub-menu).
IN= Display the earth current (True RMS value) taking into
20.00 A account the earth CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO
sub-menu).
Display the % thermal state based on true RMS values.

Thermal 2 = To clear the % values, press !.
RST = [C] 0%
Max. & Average. I Allows the user to clear the maximum (peak) and average
RST = [C] (rolling) memorised values of the current.
To clear these values, press !.
Max. IA Rms = Display the peak value for phase A. The value is the true
350 A RMS maximum value.
Max. IB Rms = Display the peak value for phase B. The value is the true
0.00 A RMS maximum value.
Max. IC Rms = Display the peak value for phase C. The value is the true
0.00 A RMS maximum value.
Average. IA Rms = Display the rolling value for phase A. The value is the true
150 A RMS average value.
Average. IB Rms = Display the rolling value for phase B. The value is the true
Average. IC Rms = Display the rolling value for phase C. The value is the true
3.5.4 PROTECTION Menu

The PROTECTION menu enables a user to program various protection functions and
settings (thresholds, time delay) associated with each of the phase or earth protection
functions.
The various sub-menus are :
⇒ [50/51] Phase OC
⇒ [50N/51N] E/Gnd
⇒ [49] Therm OL
3.5.4.1 [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu
PROTECTION Heading of the PROTECTION menu.
[50/51] Phase OC Heading of the [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu

To gain access to the sub-menu points, press $.
I> ? Selection of the first phase threshold (I>). Select Yes or No.
Yes If the user enters I>(Yes), the following menu is displayed.
If the user enters I> (No), go to I>> menu.
I> = Displays the threshold current value I>. To modify this

0.1 In value, press '.The threshold I> is adjustable from 0.1 to
4 In. Press ' to enable your adjustment.
Delay Type Selection of the I> time delay type threshold. Select (DMT
DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for the
electromechanical inverse time curve).
3.5.4.1.1 I> DMT threshold menu
Delay Type Display of the I> DMT time delay.

DMT
tl > Selection of the I> time delay. Select the time delay from 0
100 ms to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.
3.5.4.1.2 I> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curve menu
Delay Type Display the I> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves).
IDMT
Idmt = Selection of the I> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI,
IEC SI IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI using
# and enable your choice using the key '
Tms = Select the curve TMS value. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using
0.025 # and enable your choice using '
3.5.4.1.3 I> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu
Delay Type Display of the I> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI

RI curve)
K= Selection of the RI curve K value. Select from 0.100 to 10

0.1 using # and enable your choice using '.
3.5.4.1.4 I>> threshold menu
I >> ? Selection of the I>> second phase threshold. Select Yes or

Yes No. If the user enters I>>(Yes), the following menu is
displayed. If the user enters I>> (No) go to I>>> menu.
I >> Selection of the I>> second threshold current value. To

2.0 In modify this value, press '. The threshold I>>> is
adjustable from 0.5 to 40 In. Press ' to enable your
adjustment.
tI >> Selection of the second threshold I>> time delay. Select the
300 ms time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice
using '.
3.5.4.1.5 I>>> threshold menu
I >>> ? Selection of the I>>> third phase threshold. Select Yes or

Yes No. If the user enters I>>>(Yes), the following menu is
displayed. If the user enters I>>> (No), the LCD display
returns to the heading of the menu [50/51] Phase OC.
I >>> Selection of the I>>> third threshold current value. To

10.0 In modify this value, press '. The threshold I>>> is
adjustment.
tI >>> Selection of the third threshold I>>> time delay. Select the
110 ms time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice
using '.
3.5.4.2 [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu
[50N/51N] E Gnd Heading of the [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu

le> ? Selection of the first earth threshold (Ie>). Select Yes or No.
Yes If the user enters Ie>(Yes), the following menu is displayed.
User enters > (No), go to Ie>> menu.
le> Displays the current threshold value Ie>. To modify this

0.01 len value, press '. The threshold Ie> is adjustable from :
0.002 to 1 Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range)
Press ' to enable your adjustment.
Delay Type Selection of the Ie> threshold time delay type. Select (DMT
DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for the
electromechanical inverse time curve) using # and enable
your choice using '.
3.5.4.2.1 Ie> DMT threshold menu
Delay Type Display of the Ie> DMT time delay.

DMT
t le> Selection of the Ie> time delay. Select the time delay from 0
100 ms to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.
3.5.4.2.2 Ie> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu
Delay Type Display of the Ie> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI
DMT curves).
Idmt Selection of the Ie> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC
IEC SI VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI
using # and enable your choice using the key '.
Tms Selection of the selected curve Tms value. Select from 0.025
0.025 to 1.5 using # and enable your choice using '.
3.5.4.2.3 Ie> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu
Delay Type Display of the Ie> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI

RI curve)
K Selection of the RI curve K value. Select from 0.100 to 10

0.1 using # and enable your choice using '.
3.5.4.2.4 Ie>> threshold menu

Selection of the Ie>> second earth threshold. Select Yes or
le >> ? No. If the user enters Ie>>(Yes), the following menu is
Yes displayed. If the user enters>> (No) go to Ie>>> menu.
Ie >> Selection of the Ie>> second threshold current value. To

0.1 Ien modify this value, press '. The threshold Ie>> is
adjustable from :
0.002 to 1Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range)
0.5 to 40 Ien (0.1 to 40 Ion Range)
Press ' to validate your adjustment.
t Ie >> Selection of the second threshold Ie>> time delay. Select

300 ms the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and validate your
choice using '.
3.5.4.2.5 Seuil I0>>> à temps constant CST
le >>> ? Selection of the Ie>>> third earth threshold. Select Yes or

Yes No. If the user validates Ie>>>(Yes), the following menu is
displayed. If the user enters Ie>>> (No), the LCD display
returns to the heading of the menu [50N/51N] E/Gnd.
Ie >>> Selection of the Ie>>> third threshold current value. To

1.0 Ien modify this value, press 'T he threshold Ie>>> is
adjustable from :
t Ie >>> Selection of the third threshold Ie>>> time delay. Select

300 ms the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and validate your
choice using '.
3.5.4.3 [49] Therm OL sub-menu
[49] Therm OL [Heading of the [49] Therm OL (Thermal Overload) sub-

menu.
Therm OL Selection of the thermal overload function. Select Yes or No.

Yes If the user enters Yes, the following menu is displayed. If the
user enters No, no menu content is displayed.
Displays the thermal current threshold value Iθ>. To modify

Iθ> = this value, press '. The threshold Iθ> is adjustable from 0.2
0.3 In to 3.2 In step of 0.01.
Press ' to validate your choice.
Displays the Te thermal time constant associated with the

Te = thermal overload formula. To modify this value, press '.
1 mn The time constant Te is adjustable from 1 min to 200 min,
step of 1 min.
Displays the k factor associated with the thermal overload

k= function. To modify this value, press '. k factor is adjustable
1.05 from 1 to 1.5, step of 0.01.
θ Trip Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal overload

100% trip threshold. To modify this value, press '. θ Trip is
adjustable from 50 % to 200 % step of 1%.
θ Alarm ? Selection of the thermal overload alarm function. Select Yes

Yes or No. If the user validates Yes, the following menu is
displayed. If the user validate No, refer to the THERMAL
OVERLOAD sub-menu.
Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal overload

θ Alarm ? alarm threshold. To modify this value, press '. θ Trip is
Yes adjustable from 50 % to 200 % step of 1%.
3.5.5 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu

The AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu makes it possible to programme the various automation
functions included in the MiCOM P124.
⇒ Trip Commands
3.5.5.1 Trip Commands sub-menu

This sub-menu is used to set the time-delayed thresholds which activate the striker
and/or the special tripping relay and send a tripping command to the circuit breaker
or contactor.
AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu.
Trip Commands Heading of the Trip ORDER sub-menu.
Trip tI > = Allocation of the first phase time delay overcurrent threshold
Yes (tI>) to the trip output relay and/or the striker (select Yes or
No). If the user validates Yes, the trip output relay (RL1) shall
be activated at the end of the time delay tI>. If the user
validates No, the trip output relay (RL1) shall never be
activated, even at the end of the time delay tI>.
Trip tI >> Allocation of the second phase time delay overcurrent

Yes threshold (tI>>) to the trip output.
Select Yes or No.
Trip tI >>> Allocation to the third phase time delay overcurrent threshold
Yes (tI>>>) to the trip output.
Select Yes or No.
Trip tIe > Allocation of the first earth time delay overcurrent threshold
Yes (tIe>) to the trip output.
Select Yes or No.
Trip tIe >> Allocation of the second earth time delay overcurrent
Yes threshold (tIe>>) to the trip output.
Select Yes or No.
Trip tIe >>> Allocation of the third earth time delay overcurrent threshold
Yes (tIe>>>) to the trip output.
Select Yes or No.
Trip Thermal θ Allocation of the thermal overload Trip information (θ Trip) to

Yes the trip output.
Select Yes or No.
3.5.6 RECORD Menu

The RECORD menu makes it possible to read the MiCOM P124 records.
⇒ Fault Record
⇒ Time Peak Value
3.5.6.1 Fault Record sub-menu

The Fault RECORD sub-menu makes possible to read the various parameters and
measurement for each of the five fault store in MiCOM P124 memory.
RECORD Heading of the RECORD menu.
Fault record Heading of the Fault Record sub-menu
Record Number Selection of the Fault record number (by selecting either 1, 2,
4 3, 4 or 5) to be displayed.
To modify this fault record number, press ' then using #
enter the required number.
Validate your choice using '.
Faulted Phase Display the faulty phase for the chosen fault record. (NONE,
Phase A phase A, B, C, EARTH, AB, AC, BC, or ABC).
Threshold Display the origin of the fault that as generated the trip
I>> order.
Magnitude Display the magnitude of the faulty current. This value is the
1200 A 50/60 Hz amplitude.
3.5.6.2 Time Peak Value

The DISTURBANCE sub-menu makes possible to set the various parameters and
thresholds associated to this recording function.
RECORD Heading of the RECORD menu.
Time Peak Value Heading of the Time Peak Value sub-menu.
Time Window = Display of the time window during which the mean and
5 mn maximum current values are stored.
To change this value, press the ' key.
This window can be set with the following values: 5mn,
10mn, 15mn, 30mn or 60mn.
Press the ' key to confirm the setting.
4. WIRING
The external connection diagrams of MiCOM P124 are provided in APPENDIX 1 to
this document.
4.1 Current inputs (measurement)
The MiCOM P124 relays have 4 analogue inputs (3 phase current inputs and 1 earth
current input). The rated current value of these measurement inputs is either 1A or 5A
(must be specified on order).
The rated current is indicated on the front panel of the relay, behind the top flap.
WARNING: THE CONNECTION OF THE EARTH CURRENT INPUT MAY DIFFER
DEPENDING ON WHETHER IT IS CONNECTED TO A CORE BALANCED CT
OR TO A SUMMATION OF THE 3 PHASE CTS.
Connection to 3 phase CTs and 1 core balanced CT:
Generally, when the relay is used with three phase CTs and one core balanced CT,
there is not need to power the relay through the earth channel.
In this case, the core balanced CT can be connected to terminals 47 and 48.
For some phase to earth faults, when some specific cores are used, it can be possible
that the fault does not generate a current high enough* to power the relay from only
one phase circuit. It will then be necessary to connect the core TC to terminals 55
and 56 in order to power the relay through the earth circuit as well.
*reminder: the MiCOM P124 relay is self-powered from a 0.2 In current on at least
one phase.
Connection to 3 phase CTs:
In this case the earth current is derived from the summation of the 3 phase currents.
It is not necessary to power the relay via the earth circuit. The summation of the 3 CTs
must be connected to terminals 47 and 48.
In this case it is necessary to power the relay through the earth circuit. The core
balanced CT must be connected to terminals 55 and 56.
4.2 Output relays
Two output relays are available on the self-powered model:
• One trip relay (RL1) with a C/O contact (1 common, 1 normally open, 1 normally
closed)
• One watchdog relay (RL0) with a C/O contact (1 common, 1 normally open, 1
normally closed)
WARNING : IN ORDER TO SAVE ENERGY, THE WATCHDOG RELAY IS USED ONLY
WHEN THERE IS A 0.4 IN CURRENT ON AT LEAST ONE PHASE. IT IS DE-
ENERGISED BELOW THAT CURRENT LEVEL OR WHEN A SOFTWARE OR
HARDWARE FAULT IS PRESENT.
4.3 Striker output

The P124 relays are fitted with a striker output used to trip the circuit breaker via a
striker device in the absence of an external auxiliary supply.
The 2 terminals to be connected to the striker are polarised:
− + terminal 39
− – terminal 41
according to the external connection diagrams provided in Appendix 1 of the
Technical Guide.
4.4 RS 232 Front Communication port
MiCOM P124 relays provide the user an RS 232 communication port. This link is
dedicated to the Setting software MiCOM S1.
The cable between the P124 and the PC is a standard RS 232 shield-cable.
MiCOM P124 end

RS232 PC port
RS 232 Cable 9 pin male connector
2 2
3 3
5 5
7 7
In cases where the battery box MiCOM E1 is used to power the P124 relay, it is
placed between the PC and the P124 relay.
MiCOM P124
CHAPTER 3-2
Menu Content
MiCOM P124 Self-powered
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
AUTOMAT.
OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS PROTECTION RECORD
CTRL
Menu content
MiCOM P124
Technical Guide
Password Frequency Trip Time Peak

CT Ratio [50/51] Phase OC [50N/51N] E/Gnd [49] Therm OL Fault Record
**** 50.01 Hz Commands Value
IA I>? Ie > ? Therm OL ? Trip tI > Record Number Time

Description Line CT primary 257.05 A Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 Window = 5 mn
P124-S 1000
IB I> Ie > Iθ> Trip tI >> Faulted Phase
258.80 A 0.1 In 0.01 Ien 0.3 In Yes PHASE A B
Reference E/Gnd CT primary
ALST 1000
IC Delay Type Delay Type Te Trip tI >>> Threshold
257.50 A DMT DMT 1 mn Yes l>>
Software version
1.B IN tl > t le > K Trip tIe > Magnitude
20.00 A 100 ms 100 ms 1.05 Yes 1200 A
Frequency Delay Type Delay Type θ Trip Trip tIe >>

Thermal θ
50 Hz IDMT IDMT 100 % Yes
RST = [C] 0%
Max & Average I Idmt Idmt θ Alarm ? Trip tIe >>>

Relay Status 1 Yes Yes
RST = [C] IEC SI IEC SI
0
Tms Tms θ Alarm Trip Thermal θ
Max IA Rms 0.025 0.025 100 % Yes
0.02 A
Delay Type Delay Type

Max IB Rms
RI RI
0.02 A
K= K
Max IC Rms
0.1 0.1 MiCOM P124 S
0.02 A
Average IA Rms I>> ? Yes Ie>> ? Yes

0.00 A I>> 2.0 In Ie>> 0.1 Ien Menu content
tl>> 300 ms t Ie >> 300 ms
Average IB Rms
From V1A Software
0.00 A
I>>> ? Yes Ie>>>? Yes
I>>> 10.0 In Ie>>> 1.0 Ien
Average IC Rms tl>>> 110 ms t Ie>>> 300 ms
0.00 A
CHAPTER 3-2
Page 1/2
P124/EN T32/B44
CHAPTER 3-2 Menu content
Page 2/2 MiCOM P124
BLANK PAGE
MiCOM P124
CHAPTER 4-1
User Guide
P124 Dual-Powered Relay
CONTENT
1. DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS 5

1.1 General information 5
1.2 Trip of the circuit breaker 6
2. USER INTERFACE 7
2.1 The LCD display and the keypad 7
2.1.1 The LCD display 7
2.1.2 Keypad 7
2.2 Front panel LED and magnetic flag 8
2.3 The two areas under the top and bottom flaps 8
2.4 The battery box 9
2.5 Description of the MiCOM P124 dual-powered front panel 10
2.5.1 Leds 10
2.5.2 Magnetic flags 11
2.5.3 Battery backup 11
3. MENUS 12
3.1 Default display 12
3.2 Access to the menu 12
3.3 Password 12
3.3.1 Password protection 12
3.3.2 Entering the password 12
3.3.3 Changing the password 13
3.4 ALARM display 13
3.4.1 Electrical system ALARMS 13
3.4.2 Relay Hardware or Software ALARMS 16
3.5 Contenu du menu 17
3.5.1 OP. PARAMETERS Menu 19
3.5.2.1 DISPLAY sub-menu 21
3.5.2.2 CT RATIO sub-menu 22
3.5.2.3 RL1 Output Relay sub-menu 22
3.5.2.4 Led 5 to 8 configuration sub-menus 23
3.5.2.5 Group Select sub-menu 26
3.5.2.6 Alarms sub-menu 27
3.5.2.7 Configuration Inputs sub-menu 27

3.5.2.8 Date format sub-menu 28
3.5.3 MEASUREMENTS Menu 29
3.5.4 COMMUNICATION Menu 32
3.5.4.1 MODBUS COMMUNICATION Menu 32
3.5.4.2 Courier COMMUNICATION Menu 32
3.5.4.3 IEC 60870-5-103 COMMUNICATION Menu 33
3.5.4.4 DNP3 COMMUNICATION Menu 33
3.5.5.1 [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu 34
3.5.5.1.1 I> DMT threshold menu 35
3.5.5.1.2 I> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curve menu 35
3.5.5.1.2.1 I> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu 35
3.5.5.1.2.2 I> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu 35
3.5.5.1.2.2.1 I> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu 35
3.5.5.1.3 I> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu 36
3.5.5.1.3.1 I> DMT reset time, Electromechanical RI curves menu 36
3.5.5.1.4 >> threshold menu 36
3.5.5.1.5 I>>> threshold menu 36
3.5.5.2 [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu 37

3.5.5.2.1 Ie> DMT threshold menu 37
3.5.5.2.2 Ie> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu 37
3.5.5.2.2.1 Ie> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu 38
3.5.5.2.2.2 Ie> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu 38
3.5.5.2.2.3 Ie> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu 38
3.5.5.2.3 Ie> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu 38
3.5.5.2.3.1 Ie> DMT reset time, RI curves menu 38
3.5.5.2.4 Ie> threshold, LABORELEC curve 38
3.5.5.2.5 Ie>> threshold menu 39
3.5.5.2.6 Ie>>> threshold menu 39
3.5.5.3 [46] NEGATIVE Phase SEQUENCE I2> sub-menu 39

3.5.5.3.1 I2> DMT threshold menu 40
3.5.5.3.2 I2> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu 40
3.5.5.3.2.1 I2> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu 40

3.5.5.3.2.2 I2> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu 40
3.5.5.3.2.3 I2> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu 41
3.5.5.3.3 I2> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu 41
3.5.5.3.3.1 I2> DMT reset time, RI curves 41
3.5.5.4 [49] Therm OL sub-menu 42

3.5.5.5 [37] UNDERCURRENT I< sub-menu 43
3.5.5.6 [79] AUTORECLOSE sub-menu 43
3.5.5.6.1 [79] EXTERNAL CB FAILURE 44
3.5.5.6.2 [79] EXTERNAL BLOCKING 44
3.5.5.6.3 [79] DEAD and RECLAIM TIMES 44

3.5.6.1 Trip Commands sub-menu 46
3.5.6.2 Latch Functions Sub-Menu 48
3.5.6.3 Blocking Logic sub-menu 49
3.5.6.4 Logic Select sub-menu 51
3.5.6.5 Outputs Relays sub-menu 52
3.5.6.6 Latch of the Output relays RL2 to RL6 55
3.5.6.7 Inputs sub-menu 56
3.5.6.8 BROKEN CONDUCTOR sub-menu 57
3.5.6.9 COLD LOAD PICK-UP sub-menu 58
3.5.6.10 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE sub-menu 59
3.5.6.11 CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION sub-menu 60
3.5.7 RECORDS Menu 62
3.5.7.1 CB MONITORING sub-menu 62
3.5.7.2 Fault Record sub-menu 63
3.5.7.3 DISTURBANCE RECORD sub-menu 64
3.5.7.4 Time PEAK VALUE sub-menu 65
4. WIRING 66
4.1 Current inputs (measurement) 66
4.2 Output relays 66
4.4 RS232 front communication port 67
4.5 Auxiliary supply 67
4.6 Logic inputs 68
4.7 RS485 rear communication port 68
BLANK PAGE
1. DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS

1.1 General information
The MiCOM P124 relays, in their self-powered and dual-powered versions,
make best use of numerical techniques to provide protection and control functions.
They have 4 analogue inputs (3 phase currents and 1 earth current). The current
inputs have to be specified on order (1A or 5A).
The front panel allows the user access to the information in the relay, either via the
LEDs and/or magnetic flags, or via the LCD and keypad.
The various alarms are saved in memory and are available to the user on the backlit
LCD. Reading and clearing of these alarms are possible without password.
Viewing the settings and measurements is not password protected but modification or
deletion can only be done after entering the saved password.
MiCOM P124 Self-powered :
This model provides fully comprehensive protection functions without and external
power supply.
The power is taken from line currents provided by the CTs (the minimum load current
must be over 0.2 In on at least one phase).
MiCOM P124 Dual-powered :
The MiCOM relay dual-powered version can be powered either by an external power
supply source or by the line currents from the CTs (the minimum load current must be
over 0.2 In on at least one phase).
The auxiliary power supply of the relay is provided by a dc or ac auxiliary source
through a high capacity internal transformer which protects the relays against short
interruptions (<50ms). In case of auxiliary power loss, the relay is powered by the
line CTs (downgraded mode) and performs the same functions as the self-powered
model.
MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relays have available via their rear connectors, a
standard RS485 port. Communication protocols can be chosen at the time of order,
from MODBUS RTU, Courier, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3. Using the communication
channel, all stored information (measurements, alarms, parameters) can be read,
and settings can be modified.
RS485 based communication allows MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relays to be
directly linked to a digital control system (MiCOM S10 for example). All the available
data is then placed at the disposal of the supervisor and can be processed either
locally or remotely.
Consultation and modification of this data can be carried out on site with a normal
PC and the appropriate Schneider Electric software MiCOM S1.
It is possible to assign the output relays to any of the available control or protection
functions. The logic inputs can also be assigned to the control functions.
CHAPTER 4 OF THE TECHNICAL GUIDE DESCRIBES THE USER INTERFACE AND THE
CONNECTIONS OF THE MiCOM P124 RELAY DUAL-POWERED VERSION.
1.2 Trip of the circuit breaker

Both versions of the MiCOM P124 relays can trip the circuit breaker from a C/O
output contact and/or a heavy burden output to power a striker
Whatever the version (dual or self-powered), the MiCOM P124 relays can trip the
circuit breaker via a C/O contact or striker output.
Trip via a striker output:
The relay performs a capacitance discharge output capable of putting out sufficient
power (20mJ at 12V) to a striker (K1.3 type or equivalent) releasing the actuating
mechanism of the CB.
39 +
Striker output
41 –
P124
FIGURE 1: STRIKER SUPPLIED FROM P124

This tripping output is completely independent from any auxiliary supply.
Trip via a changeover contact:
The relay performs a changeover contact relay output with a high breaking capacity
to trip the circuit breaker coil.
The operation of the changeover contact is completely independent from any
auxiliary supply. On the other hand, an auxiliary supply will be necessary for the
supply of the CB coil.
Auxiliary supply
44
RL1 42
40
P124
Auxiliary supply
FIGURE 2: TRIP OF THE CB COIL VIA A CHANGEOVER CONTACT

NOTE: The change over contact can be used with fail-safe operation.
This mode can be programmed in the "Configuration/RL1 output
relay/fail-safe relay".
2. USER INTERFACE
The MiCOM P124 relay front panel serves as an interface between the user and the
protection relay. It enables the user to enter relay settings, display the measured
values, alarms and display clearly the various actions carried out by MiCOM P124
relay.
The front panel of the relay consists of three separate sections:
− The LCD display and the keypad,
− The Led's
− The two zones under the upper and lower flaps.
The battery box (accessory):
Associated with the MiCOM P124 relays, the battery box MiCOM E1 can be used to
allow the user to access the menu when there is no line current (circuit breaker open).
2.1 The LCD display and the keypad
2.1.1 The LCD display
The front panel of the MiCOM P124 relays caries a liquid crystal display (LCD) on
which data such as settings, measured values and alarms can be viewed. The data is
accessed through a menu system.
The liquid crystal display has two lines each with sixteen characters. A back-light is
activated when any key is pressed and will remain lit for five minutes after the last key
press. This allows the display to be read in most lighting conditions.
NOTA : IN CASE OF AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY FAILURE AND IN
ORDER TO SAVE ENERGY, THE LCD IS BACKLIT ONLY WHEN
THERE IS AT LEAST ONE PHASE CURRENT ABOVE 0.5 IN.
2.1.2 Keypad
The keypad has seven keys divided into two groups :
Two keys situated immediately under the screen (keys ! and ").
Five main keys situated at the middle of the front face are for programming.
The two keys ! and " are dedicated for reading and acknowledging the alarms. So
as to display successive alarms, press on key ". The alarms are presented in reverse
order for their detection (the most recent first, the oldest last). So as to acknowledge
the alarms, the user can either acknowledge each alarm using ! or go to the end of
the ALARM menu and carry out a general acknowledgement.
NOTA : NO PASSWORD IS REQUIRED TO ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS.
The five keys situated in the middle of the MiCOM front panel are dedicated to set
the relay.
The keys make it possible to move in the direction indicated to the various
levels of the menus.
The key validates a choice or value (modification of settings).
2.2 Front panel LED and magnetic flag
Height LEDS and up to 5 magnetic flags are available for the dual-powered version
of the P124 relay.
The default corresponding labels on the front panel are in the English language but
the user is provided with a set of French stickers.
2.3 The two areas under the top and bottom flaps
Under the upper flap, a label identifies the relay according to its model (ordering
code) and series number. This information defines the product uniquely and
specifically.
In making all requests for information from Schneider Electric After Sales Department,
please quote these two numbers.
Information indicated in the lower portion of this label covers the auxiliary supply
voltage, the nominal earth current value and the rated current (1A or 5A).
Under the lower flap, a RS232 port is available to download a new version of the
protection software, as well as the settings created in a dedicated PC software
MiCOM S1. The same software allows to view all the relays internal data
(measurements, events…).
In case of auxiliary power supply failure and when there is no line current from the
CTs (circuit breaker open), the user can view or modify the settings by powering the
MiCOM P124 relay with the battery box MiCOM E1 connected to the RS232 port.
The withdrawability of the MiCOM active part (chassis) from the case is effected by
opening the two flaps, then with a 3mm screwdriver, turn the extractor situated under
the upper flap, and pull using the two slots situated behind these flaps.
2.4 The battery box
Battery box
To MiCOM P124
RS 232
Input for
external supply
12Vcc – 24Vcc
FIGURE 3: BATTERY BOX MiCOM E1

The battery box performs the two following functions:
1. Temporary powering of the relay in order to allow the user to view or modify
data when the auxiliary power supply has failed. The battery used is a 6LR61
type (9V) which can power the relay up to 3 hours.
When the battery is flat it is possible to power the battery box with an external
dc supply. The dc voltage value must be comprised between 12Vdc and 24Vdc.
2. RS232 interface between the MiCOM P124 relay and the PC equipped with the
setting software MiCOM S1.
2.5 Description of the MiCOM P124 dual-powered front panel
2 x 16 character
backlit LCD display
2 tactile keys to read

and clear alarms and Magnetic flags :
messages - 1 trip
- 4 programmable
Removable flaps
Trip LED
Alarm LED to extract the
Warning LED active part
Healthy LED
4 programmable LEDs
5-key keypad for

settings and viewing
Pile RS 232
FIGURE 4: MiCOM P124 DUAL-POWERED FRONT PANEL

2.5.1 Leds
Eight Leds are located in the left portion of the front face (numbered from 1 to 8
starting from the top):
Led 1 Colour : RED Label : Trip
Led 1 indicates when a trip order has been issued by the relay to the cut-off element
(circuit breaker, contactor). This Led recopies the trip order issued to the Trip logic
output relay and/or the striker output. Its normal state is unlit. It is illuminated as soon
as a triggering order is issued. It goes out when the associated alarm is
acknowledged.
NOTE: this LED is out of service when the auxiliary power supply has
failed, even if sufficient line currents are present in the CTs.
Led 2 Colour : ORANGE Label : Alarm
Led 2 indicates that an alarm has been registered by MiCOM P124 relay. The alarms
are either threshold crossings (instantaneous), or tripping orders (time delayed). As
soon as an alarm is registered, the Led flashes. When all the stored alarms are read,
the Led is illuminated continuously.
When all the alarms are acknowledged, the Led goes out.
NOTE: - the alarms generated by intantaneous indications are self or
hand-resettable.
- the programmation self-reset (Yes or No) is possible in the
"Configuration/Alarms" menu.
- this Led is out of service when the auxiliary supply has failed,
even if sufficient line currents are present in the CTs.
Led 3 Color : ORANGE Label : Warning

Led 3 is dedicated to the internal alarms of MiCOM P124 relay. When a « minor »
internal alarm (typically communication Fault) is detected, the Led flashes
continuously. When the Fault is classed as « major », the Led is illuminated
continuously. The extinction of this Led is only possible by the disappearance of the
cause that provoked it (repair of the module, disappearance of the Fault).
NOTA : this LED is out of service when the auxiliary power supply has
failed, even if sufficient line currents are present in the CTs. In
that case, equipment failure is indicated by the watchdog contact
(RL0).
Led 4 Colour : GREEN Label : Healthy
This LED indicates that the MiCOM P124 relay is powered by an auxiliary voltage
within the rated operative range (0.8 to 1.2Uaux). In case of auxiliary supply failure,
the LED indicates that the relay is correctly powered by a sufficient line current,
provided by one or several CTs.
The LED is also lit when the relay is powered by the battery box.
Led 5 to 8 Colour : RED Label : Aux.1 to 4.
These Leds can be programmed by the user on the basis of information on available
thresholds (instantaneous and time-delayed) and state of the logic. The user selects
the information he wishes to see associates with each Led from the menu element
(Logic OR). Each Led illuminates when the associated information is valid. The
extinction of each Led is linked to the acknowledgement of the associated alarms.
NOTE: these LEDs are out of service when the auxiliary power supply
has failed, even if sufficient line currents are present in the CTs.
2.5.2 Magnetic flags
There are five flags on the right hand side of the front panel.
On the base model, only one flag is available. It indicates that a tripping command
has been issued to the CB coil or striker by switching to yellow. This flag is functional
even during auxiliary power supply failure.
Optionally (selectable on order), four extra magnetic flags are functional even during
power supply failure. These flags are used as backups of LEDS 5 to 8.
2.5.3 Battery backup
The front panel of each dual-powered MiCOM P124 relay is fitted with a battery to
save the event, fault and disturbance records as well as thermal state in case of
auxiliary power failure
The battery used is a 3.6V lithium battery.
WARNING: ONLY RECORDS MADE WHEN AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY IS PRESENT
ARE SAVED IN MEMORY.
3. MENUS
The menu of the MiCOM P124 relays is organised into main and sub menus.
3.1 Default display
By default, the current value (selected phase or earth) is continuously displayed.
As soon as an alarm is generated by the MiCOM relay, that information is
considered as priority and replaces the default value.
The default display choice is made in the CONFIGURATION/Display menu.
3.2 Access to the menu
Complete menu access is performed by manipulation of the keys # $ % &.
The general arrangement of the menus is shown in figure 3.
Reading of parameters and measurements is possible without entering the password.
Modification of the parameters requires entering the password.
Should an error be made in entering a parameter, press ! to cancel.
Except for reading and cancelling, the keys ! and " are inactive.
NOTA : The letter P is displayed when the password is entered.
If no key is pushed during 5 minutes, the password becomes inactive.
3.3 Password
3.3.1 Password protection
Password protection is applicable to the relay settings, especially to the selection of
the various thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of inputs
and outputs relays.
The password consists of four alphabetical capital characters. When leaving the
factory, the password is AAAA. The user can define his own combination of
characters.
Should the password be lost or forgotten, the modification of the stored parameters
of the relay is prohibited. It is then necessary to contact the manufacturer or his agent
by specifying the serial number of the relay so as to receive a stand-by password
specific to the relay concerned.
3.3.2 Entering the password
The input of the password is requested as soon as a modification of a parameter is
made for any one of the menus or sub-menus. The user enters for each of the 4
characters/letters and validates the entire password with '.
After 5 seconds, the display returns to the point of the preceding menu.
If no action is taken on the keypad for 5 minutes, the password is desactivated. A new
request shall be associated with any subsequent parameter modification.
WARNING : WHILE THE PASSWORD IS ACTIVE, IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO
DOWNLOAD A SETTING FILE FROM THE PC SETTING SOFTWARE.
3.3.3 Changing the password

To change the active password, go to the OP. PARAMETERS menu and then to the
point of the Password sub menu. Enter the old password and validate. Then press '
and enter the new password character per character and validate the new password
using '.
The message NEW PASSWORD OK is displayed to indicate that the password has
changed.
3.4 ALARM display
The management of alarms is directly displayed on the LCD. The display of alarm
messages has priority over the default current value. As soon as an alarm is detected
by the relay (threshold crossing for example), the message is displayed on the
MiCOM LCD display and the Alarm Led (2nd Led) lights up.
The alarm messages are classed as follows :
⇒ Electrical power network alarm message
⇒ Hardware or software fault message from the relay.
3.4.1 Electrical system ALARMS
Any crossing of a threshold (instantaneous or time delay) generates an "electrical
network alarm". For each threshold the involved threshold is indicated.
If several alarms are triggered, they are all stored in their order of appearance the
most recent alarm first, the oldest alarm last. Each message is numbered and the
total of messages is shown.
The user read all the alarm messages using " without entering the password.
The user acknowledges the alarms using !. The user can acknowledge each
message one by one or all by going to the end of the list and acknowledge all the
messages using !.
NOTE : note that the self-reset of the alarms generated by instantaneous
(crossing of threshold) is possible by configuration in the
"Configuration/Alarms/Inst. Self-reset. ?" menu.
The management of the Alarm Led is directly linked to the status of the stored alarms.
If one or several messages are NOT READ and NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the alarm
Led flashes.
If all the messages have been READ but NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the alarm Led
remains lights up continuously.
If all the messages have been READ and ACKNOWLEDGED, (if the alarm cause has
been cleared) the alarm Led goes out.
The different electrical systems alarms are described below :

Ie> 1ST stage earth fault pick-up
Ie>> 2nd stage earth fault pick-up
Ie>>> 3rd stage earth fault pick-up
I> 1st stage overcurrent pick-up
I>> 2nd stage overcurrent pick-up
I>>> 3rd stage overcurrent pick-up
tIe> 1st stage earth fault time-out
tIe>> 2nd stage earth fault time-out
tIe>>> 3rd stage earth fault time-out
tI> 1st stage overcurrent time-out
tI>> 2nd stage overcurrent time-out
tI>>> 3rd stage overcurrent time-out
THERMAL ALARM thermal alarm threshold pick-up
THERMAL TRIP thermal trip threshold pick-up
I< undercurrent element pick-up
BRKN COND. broken conductor indication. I2/I1 element pick-up
for longer than tBC. TBC is settable in the
AUTOMAT. CTRL/Broken cond. menu.
t AUX 1 t AUX1 time-out
t AUX 2 t AUX2 time-out
CB FAILURE cirduit breaker failure indication (the CB does not trip
on tBF time-out) tBF is settable in the AUTOMAT.
CTRL/CB Fail menu.
I 2> negative sequence current threshold pick-up
tI 2> negative sequence current threshold time-out
SF6 LOW Faulty circuit breaker indication by assignable logic
input (settable in AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu).
T operating CB Operating (or tripping) time of the circuit breaker
longer than the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB
Supervision menu.
CB OPEN NB Number of circuit breaker operation higher that the
value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision
menu.
Sum An Broken current measured higher than the value set in
the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu.
TRIP CIRCUIT Circuit breaker trip circuit failure for longer than the
supervision timer t SUP settable in the AUTOMAT.
CTRL/CB Supervision menu.
CB CLOSE FAILURE Circuit breaker closing time longer than the value set
in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu.
RECLOSER SUCCESS Successful reclose indication. Indicates that when the
fault has been cleared upon circuit breaker
reclosure, and has not re-appeared before expiry of
the reclaim time.
RECLOSER LOCKED Recloser blocking indication. Generated by:
- auxiliary power supply failure during dead time
(definitive trip).
- external breaker failure indication (ex. SF6 low).
Indication provided via a logic input assigned to the
CB FAILURE function in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs
menu.
- external blocking indication, external blocking can
be set by the user in the PROTECTION/ [79]
AUTORECLOSE/EXT BLOCK menu. This blocking
information is provided via a logic input assigned to
the Block [79] function in the AUTOMAT.
CTRL/Inputs menu.
- definitive trip.
- remote trip command during the reclaim time.
- pick-up of I2> or thermal trip during dead time.
- breaker failure (circuit breaker failure to trip on
expiry of tBF).
- breaker operating time (or tripping time) longer
than the set time.
CONFLICT RECLOS. Configuration conflict of the recloser function. This
indication is generated by:
- O/O Interlock not assigned to a logic input or
assigned but not wired to the input.
- no output relay assigned to the CB CLOSE function
(AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output Relays menu ).
- trip contact latched.
- no recloser cycle assigned to the protection
functions (PROTECTION/ [79] Autoreclose menu ).
LATCH OUTPUT RELAY Information displayed when at least an output relay
(RL2 to RL6) is latched.
3.4.2 Relay Hardware or Software ALARMS

Any software or hardware Fault of the MiCOM relay generates a "hard/software
alarm". If several alarms are acquired they are all stored in their order of
appearance. Display of the alarms is in reverse order (the most recent first and the
oldest last). Each message is numbered and the total of messages is indicated below.
The user can read all the alarm messages with the aid of ", without entering the
password.
The acknowledgement of the relay alarm messages is IMPOSSIBLE. Only the
disappearance of the cause reset the alarm.
The management of the WARNING Led is directly linked to the status of the alarms
stored in the memory.
If the fault is major (the relay cannot perform protection functions), the WARNING
Led is lit fixed.
If the Fault is minor (no influence on the protection and automation function
e.g.communication failure), the WARNING Led is flashing.
Possible Hardware or Software alarm messages :
Major fault :
The protection and automation functions are stopped. The RL0 watchdog relay is de-
energised (35-36 contact closed).
« AUX SUPPLY LOST » : Information displayed in case of loose of auxiliary
power supply and RL1 configured in fail-safe
operation.
The MiCOM P124 relay being self-powered by CTs.
« EEPROM ERROR DATA » : Data in EEPROM memory in fault
« CT ERROR » : Analogue channel in fault
« EEPROM ERROR CALIBR » : Calibration zone in fault
Minor fault :
The MiCOM P124 is fully operational. The RL0 watchdog relay is energised (35-36
contact open, 36-37 contact closed).
« BATTERY FAIL » : Battery in fault ; battery flat or not correctly in place.
« COMM. ERROR » : Communications failure
« RAM ERROR » : Battery backed memory
« CLOCK ERROR » : Clock error
NOTE : the "Battery fail" and "RAM error" messages can be configured
displayed yes or no in the "Configuration/Alarms" menu.
3.5 Contenu du menu
DEFAULT DISPLAY OP PARAMETERS

IA = 1245 A
CONFIGURATION
MEASUREMENTS
COMMUNICATION
PROTECTION G1
PROTECTION G2
AUTOMAT. CTRL
RECORDS
FIGURE 3 : ORGANISATION OF MiCOM P124

DUAL-POWERED MAIN MENU
The menu of the MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relays is divided into 8 sections :
⇒ OP PARAMETERS
⇒ CONFIGURATION
⇒ MEASUREMENTS
⇒ COMMUNICATION
⇒ PROTECTION G1
⇒ PROTECTION G2
⇒ AUTOMAT. CTRL
⇒ RECORDS
To access these menus from the default display use $
To return to the default display from these menus or sub-menus press #.
NOTE : a Menu content table is given in the chapter 4-2.
3.5.1 OP. PARAMETERS Menu
OP PARAMETERS Heading of the OP PARAMETERS menu.
Entry of the password to be able to modify the MiCOM

Password
relay settings and parameters.
****
To enter the password, press '
Entry of the password is made letter by letter

Password
using # $ to go up or down the alphabet.
AAAA
After each letter, press % to enter the following letter. At
the end, press ' to validate the password. If the
password is correct, the message « PASSWORD OK » is
displayed on the screen.
WARNING : AS SOON AS THE PASSWORD HAS BEEN ENTERED, NO SETTING
CHANGE USING THE COMMUNICATION (RS485 OR RS232) CAN BE
ACCEPTED AND THIS DURING
5 MINUTES
Displays the MiCOM P124 applicable relay model

Description
S = Self-powered (Without auxiliary power supply)
P124 D
D = Dual-powered power supply (with auxiliary
supply)
Displays the name of the equipment associated with

Reference =
the relay. The entry of the reference is made by
ALST
character by character using # $. After each
character (letter, number or sign), press % to enter the
following character. At the end of entering, press ' to
validate the reference.
NOTE : The reference is initially set in the factory to
ALST.
Displays the version of the software.
Software Version
4.A
Nominal value of the network frequency. Select either

Frequency =
50 or 60 Hz. To modify this value, press ' and press
50 Hz
# $ to select the desired value. Validate your choice
using '.
Displays the Active Group

Active Group =
1 = Protection Group G1
1
2 = Protection Group G2
Displays the state of the logic Inputs. The Logic Inputs

Input 54321
are numbered from 1 to 5 starting from the right.
Status 01011
The state of each input is :
- state 0 : input inactive
- state 1 : input active
Displays the state of the logic outputs. The Logic

Relay 654321
Outputs are numbered from 1 to 6 starting from the
Status 001011
right.
The state of each output is :
- state 0 : output relay inactive
- state 1 : output relay active
NOTE : The Watch-dog output (RL0) is not display in
the output status menu.
Displays the date. To modify this date press 'then
Date
using % to enter the required value.
09/11/01
Enable your choice using '.
In this example the date is : 09 November 2001.
Displays the hour. To modify this hour press ' then

Time
using % to enter the required value.
13:15:33
In this example the time is : 13 hours, 15 minutes, 33
secondes

The CONFIGURATION menu makes it possible to configure the labels used to
display currents, the Earth and Phase CT ratios and also configure Leds 5 to 8.
⇒ Display
⇒ CT Ratio
⇒ Led 5
⇒ RL1 Output Relay
⇒ Led 6
⇒ Led 7
⇒ Led 8
⇒ Group Select
⇒ Alarms
⇒ Configuration Inputs
⇒ Date format
To gain access to the CONFIGURATION menu from the default display, press $
then %.
3.5.2.1 DISPLAY sub-menu
CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu.
Heading of the DISPLAY sub-menu.

Display
Display of the default current value (by selecting either

Default Display
Phase A, Phase B , Phase C, or Earth N). To modify this
RMS I A
default value, press ' then using % to enter the
required value.
Edit phase A label by selecting A, L1, or R. This value

Phase A Text
can be modified after entering the password and is
A
displayed with the corresponding measurement.
Edit phase B label by selecting B, L2, or S. This value

Phase B Text
B
Edit phase C label by selecting C, L3, or T. This value

Phase C Text
C
Edit earth label by selecting N, E, or G. This value can

E/Gnd Text
be modified after entering the password and is
N
3.5.2.2 CT RATIO sub-menu
Heading of the CT RATIO sub-menu.

CT Ratio
Display of the primary ratio of the phase CT. The value

Line CT primary
consists of 4 digits: Minimum 1, Maximum 9999.
1000
Press ' to modify this value and use # $ % & to
display the new primary phase CT ratio.
Enable your choice using ' at the end of selection.
Display of the primary ratio of the earth CT. The consist

E/Gnd CT primary
of 4 digits : Minimum 1, Maximum 9999.
1000
Press ' to modify this value and use # $ % & to
display the new primary earth CT ratio.
Enable your choice using ' at the end of selection.
3.5.2.3 RL1 Output Relay sub-menu

This sub-menu enables the user to choose the operation mode of the trip output relay
RL1. Fail-safe operation is possible.
RL1Output Relay Heading of the RL1 Output Relay sub-menu.
Choice of the operation mode of the trip output relay

Fail-safe Relay
RL1.
Yes
Yes = fail-safe operation
NOTE : the fail-safe operation programmation is possible only without

alarm displayed.
3.5.2.4 Led 5 to 8 configuration sub-menus

25 different parameters can be assigned to each led.
These parameters are :
TEXT Information
I> Instantaneous first phase threshold

I>> Instantaneous second phase threshold
I>>> Instantaneous third phase threshold
tI> Time delayed first phase threshold
tI>> Time delayed second phase threshold
tI>>> Time delayed third phase threshold
Ie> Instantaneous first earth threshold
Ie>> Instantaneous second earth threshold
Ie>>> Instantaneous third earth threshold
tIe> Time delayed first earth threshold
tIe>> Time delayed second earth threshold
tIe>>> Time delayed third earth threshold
Therm Trip Trip on Thermal overload
Brkn Cond. Broken conductor detection
CB Fail Detection of a Circuit Breaker failure
tI2> Time delayed negative phase sequence
Input 1 Copy of the state of the Logic Input n°1
Recloser Run Auto-recloser function in progress
Recloser Blocked Auto-recloser function locked
t Aux 1 Copy of the state of the Logic Input delayed by
t Aux 1
t Aux 2 Copy of the state of the Logic Input delayed by
t Aux 2
NOTES : - Each parameter can be assigned to one or more Led's.

- Each Led can be lit by one or more parameters (OR logic).
Example of Led 5 setting :
Heading Led 5 sub-menu.

Led 5
Displays the instantaneous threshold I> associated with

Led
Led 5. To modify this choice, press ' and using #
I> No
scroll through the available selections.
Displays the time delay threshold tI> associated with

Led
LED 5. To modify this choice, press ' and using #
tI > No
Displays the instantaneous threshold I>> associated

Led
with LED 5.
I >> No
Displays the time delay threshold tI>> associated with

Led
LED 5.
tI >> No
Displays the instantaneous threshold I>>> associated

Led
with LED 5.
I >>> No
Displays the time delay threshold tI>>> associated

Led
with LED 5.
tI >>> No
Displays the instantaneous threshold Ie> associated

Led
with LED 5.
Ie > No
Displays the time delay threshold tIe> associated with

Led
LED 5.
tIe > No
Displays the instantaneous threshold Ie>> associated

Led
with LED 5.
Ie >> No
Displays the time delay threshold tIe>> associated

Led
with LED 5.
tIe >> No
Displays the instantaneous threshold Ie>>>

Led
associated with LED 5.
Ie >>> No
Displays the time delay threshold tIe>>> associated

Led
with LED 5.
tIe >>> No
Displays the thermal threshold tIθ trip order associated

Led Therm.
with
Trip Yes
LED 5. To modify this choice, press ' and using #
Displays the broken conductor information associated

Led Brkn. Cond
with LED 5.
No
Displays the circuit breaker failure information

Led CB Fail
Yes
Displays the negative phase sequence threshold tI2>

Led tI2 >
Yes
Displays the state of the logic input 1 associated with

Led Input 1
LED 5.
No

Led Input 2
LED 5.
No

Led Input 3
LED 5.
No

Led Input 4
LED 5.
No

Led Input 5
LED 5.
No
Displays the state of the auto-recloser function (running

Led Recloser
or not) associated with LED 5.
Run No
Displays the state of the auto-recloser function (locked

Led Recloser
or free) associated with LED 5.
Blocked No
Displays the state of the logic input delayed by t Aux 1.

Led t Aux 1
Yes
Displays the state of the logic input delayed by t Aux 2.

Led t Aux 2
Yes
3.5.2.5 Group Select sub-menu
Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain

CONFIGURATION access to the menu, press $, %, $, % 6 times.
Heading of the CONFIGURATION SELECTION sub-

Group Select menu. This allows the user to select the active setting
group (1 or 2)
Displays the operation mode of the digital input

Change Group
associated to the change of group of protection :
Input = EDGE
"EDGE" or "LEVEL". To change the operation mode,
press ' then using #enter the required value.
Display of the active setting group (1 or 2). To change

Setting Group
the active setting group, press ' then using #enter
1
the required value (1 or 2).
3.5.2.6 Alarms sub-menu
Heading of the configuration menu. To gain access to

CONFIGURATION Alarms menu, press $, %, $, % 7 times.
Heading of the Alarms sub-menu. To gain access to

Alarms the sub-menu content, press $.
Displays the reset mode of the alarms concerning the

Inst. Self-reset ?
instantaneous : self-reset Yes or No. If the user chooses
No
No, the reset will be done by push button.
To change the reset mode press ' then using # scroll
throught the available selections.
Displays the possibility Yes or No to display the alarm

Alarm Battery
"RAM ERROR" or "BATTERY FAIL" in case of ram error or
No
battery failure.
3.5.2.7 Configuration Inputs sub-menu
It is possible to configure the operation of the digital input, either on falling edge/low
level, or on rising edge/high level.
Falling edge or low level (idem for rising edge or high level) depends of the
application of the digital inputs.
Example : a digital input configured "blocking logic" will operate on level, on the
other hand a digital input configured "Cold load pick up" will operate on edge.
ONLY a digital input configured "change of setting group" can operate either on edge
or on level.
Function allocated to the Digital Input Operation of the Digital Input

Unlatch of the output relays On level
Position of the CB, 52a or 52b On level
Blocking logic 1 & 2 On level
Logic Selectivity 1 & 2 On level
Aux 1 & Aux 2 On level
CB Fault On level
Reset of the thermal state On edge
Blocking of the Autorecloser On level
Cold load Pick Up On edge
Start of disturbance record On edge
Trip circuit supervision On level
Change of setting group On edge, or on level
CB Fail start On edge
Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain

CONFIGURATION access to Configuration Inputs menu, press $, %, $, %
8 times.
Heading of the Configuration Inputs sub-menu. To

Configuration
gain access to the sub-menu content, press $.
Inputs
Displays the operation of the digital Inputs either on

Inputs 54321
falling edge/low level, or on rising edge/high level.
10110
0 = falling edge/low level
1 = rising edge/high level
To change the operation mode press ' then using #
scroll throught the available selections.
3.5.2.8 Date format sub-menu

This sub-menu enables the user to choose the format of the date for Modbus™
communication.
Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu.

CONFIGURATION
Heading of the Date format sub-menu.

Date format
Displays the format of the date either PRIVATE or IEC

Date format =
protocol.
PRIVATE
3.5.3 MEASUREMENTS Menu
Heading of the MEASUREMENTS menu. To gain access

MEASUREMENTS
to the MEASUREMENTS menu, press $, %, 2 times.
Display the network frequency calculated from phase

Frequency
currents
50.01 Hz
Display the A phase current (True RMS value) taking

IA
into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT
257.05 A
RATIO sub-menu).
Display the B phase current (True RMS value) taking

IB
258.80 A
RATIO sub-menu).
Display the C phase current (True RMS value) taking

IC
257.50 A
RATIO sub-menu).
Display the earth current (True RMS value) taking into

IN
account the earth CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT
20.00 A
RATIO sub-menu).
Display the positive sequence component

I1
103 A
Display the negative sequence component

I2
50 A
Display the ratio I2/I1

RATIO I2/I1
50%
Display the earth current (True RMS value) minus the

In - fn
current value at the fundamental frequency (value of
RST = [C] 0.0 A
the harmonics).
Displays the % thermal state based on true RMS values.

Thermal θ
To clear the % values, press !.
RST = [C] 0%
Allows the user to clear the maximum (peak) and

Max & Average I
average (rolling) memorised values of the current.
RST = [C]
To clear these values, press !.
Display the peak value for phase A. The value is the

Max IA Rms
true RMS maximum value.
350 A
Display the peak value for phase B. The value is the

Max IB Rms
0.00 A
Display the peak value for phase C. The value is the

Max IC Rms
0.00 A
Display the rolling value for phase A. The value is the

Average IA Rms
true RMS average value.
150 A
Display the rolling value for phase B. The value is the

Average IB Rms
148 A
Display the rolling value for phase C. The value is the

Average IC Rms
153 A
Allows the user to clear the reclosing statistics. To clear

Reclose Stats
these values, press !.
RST = [C]
Display the total number of reclosers.

Total Recloses
0
Display the total number of cycle 1 reclosers.

Cycle 1 Recloses
0

Cycle 2 Recloses
0

Cycle 3 Recloses
0

Cycle 4 Recloses
0
Display the total number of definitive trips issued from

Total Trip &
the autorecloser.
Lockout 0
3.5.4 COMMUNICATION Menu

The COMMUNICATION menu depends on the type of communication : MODBUS,
Courier, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3.
3.5.4.1 MODBUS COMMUNICATION Menu
Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. To gain

COMMUNICATION access to the menu, press $, %, 3 times.
Use MODBUS RTU communication via the RS485 on

Communication ?
the rear of the relay. To activate communication, press
Yes
the key ' and use $ to select Yes. Enable your choice
using '.
Display of the speed of MODBUS transmission. Select

Baud Rate
from : 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
19200 Bd
38400 bauds using # and enable your choice using
'.
Display the parity in the MODBUS frame. Select Even,

Parity
Odd or None using # and enable your choice using
None
'.
Display of the number of data bits in the MODBUS

Data Bits
frame. Select 7 or 8 using # and enable your choice
8
using '.
Display of the number of stop bits in the MODBUS

Stop Bits
frame. Select 0 or 1 using # and enable your choice
1
using '.
Display of the network address of the MiCOM relay in

Relay Address
the MODBUS network. Select from 1 to 255 using #
12
and enable your choice using '.
WARNING : A MODBUS NETWORK CAN ONLY COMPRISE 32 RELAY ADDRESSES
ON THE SAME MODBUS SUB-LAN.
3.5.4.2 Courier COMMUNICATION Menu

Use Courier communication via the RS485 on the rear

Communication ?
of the relay. To activate communication, press the key
Yes
' and use # to select Yes. Enable your choice using
'.
Display the network address of the MiCOM relay in the
Relay Address
Courier network. Select from 1 to 255 using # and
12
enable your choice using '.
3.5.4.3 IEC 60870-5-103 COMMUNICATION Menu

Use IEC 60870-5-103 communication via the RS485

Communication ?
on the rear of the relay. To activate communication,
Yes
press the ' key and use # to select Yes. Enable your
choice using '.
Display of the speed of IEC 60870-5-103 transmission.

Data Bits
Select from : 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200 Bd
19200, 38400 bauds using # and enable your choice
using '.

Relay Address
the IEC 60870-5-103 network. Select from 1 to 255
29
using # and enable your choice using the key '.
3.5.4.4 DNP3 COMMUNICATION Menu

Use DNP3 communication via the RS485 on the rear of

Communication ?
the relay. To activate communication, press the key '
Yes
and use # to select Yes. Enable your choice using '.
Display of the speed of DNP3 transmission. Select

Data Bits
from : 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
9600 bd
38400 bauds using # and enable your choice using
'.

Relay Address
the DNP3 network. Select from 1 to 255 using # and
29
enable your choice using the key '.

The PROTECTION menu (design as PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 menus
in MiCOM P124 Dual-powered enables a user to program various protection
functions and settings (thresholds, time delay) associated with each of the phase or
earth protection functions.
⇒ [50/51] Phase OC
⇒ [50N/51N] E/Gnd
⇒ [46] Neg seq OC
⇒ [49] Therm OL
⇒ [37] Under Current
⇒ [79] Autoreclose
To gain access to the PROTECTION G1 menu for press $ then % four times.
To gain access to the PROTECTION G2 menu, press $ then % five times.
3.5.5.1 [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu
PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION menu.
Heading of the [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu.

50/51] Phase OC
Selection of the first phase threshold (I>). Select Yes or

I>?
No.
Yes
If the user enters I>(Yes), the following menu is
displayed.
If the user enters I> (No), go to I>> menu.
Displays the threshold current value I>. To modify this

I>
value, press '.The threshold I> is adjustable from 0.1
0.1 In
to 4 In.
Selection of the I> time delay type threshold. Select

Delay Type
(DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI
DMT
for the electromechanical inverse time curve).
3.5.5.1.1 I> DMT threshold menu

Display of the I> DMT time delay.
Delay Type
DMT
Selection of the I> time delay. Select the time delay

tI>
from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using
100 ms
'.
3.5.5.1.2 I> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curve menu
Display the I> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI
Delay Type
curves).
IDMT
Selection of the I> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI,
Idmt
IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI,
IEC SI
IEEE EI, IEC RC, using # and enable your choice using
the key '.
Select the curve TMS value. Select from 0.025 to 1.5

Tms
using # and enable your choice using '.
0.025
3.5.5.1.2.1 I> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu

Selection of the t Reset value from 40 ms to 100 s
t Reset
60 ms
3.5.5.1.2.2 I> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu

Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between
Type Tempo
DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using
Reset DMT
# and enable your choice using '.
Selection of the t Reset value associated with the DMT

t Reset
reset time choice. Select from 40 ms to 100 s using #
60 ms
3.5.5.1.2.2.1 I> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu
Type Tempo
Reset IDMT
Selection of the Rtms value associated with the IDMT

Rtms
reset time choice. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using #
0.025
3.5.5.1.3 I> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu

Display of the I> inverse time delay (electromechanical
Delay Type
RI curve)
RI
Selection of the RI curve K value. Select from 0.100 to

K
10 using # and enable your choice using '.
0.1
3.5.5.1.3.1 I> DMT reset time, Electromechanical RI curves menu

t Reset
60 ms
3.5.5.1.4 >> threshold menu

Selection of the I>> second phase threshold. Select
I >> ?
Yes or No. If the user enters I>>(Yes), the following
Yes
menu is displayed. If the user enters I>> (No) go to
I>>> menu.
Selection of the I>> second threshold current value. To

I >>
modify this value, press '. The threshold I>>> is
2.0 In
adjustment.
Selection of the second threshold I>> time delay.

tI >>
Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and
300 ms
enable your choice using '.
3.5.5.1.5 I>>> threshold menu
Selection of the I>>> third phase threshold. Select Yes
I >>> ?
or No. If the user enters I>>>(Yes), the following
Yes
menu is displayed. If the user enters I>>> (No), the
LCD display returns to the heading of the menu
[50/51] Phase OC.
Selection of the I>>> third threshold current value. To
I >>>
modify this value, press '. The threshold I>>> is
10.0 In
adjustment
Selection of the third threshold I>>> time delay. Select

tI >>>
the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable
110 ms
3.5.5.2 [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu
Heading of the PROTECTION menu.

PROTECTION G1
Heading of the [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu

[50N/51N] E/Gnd
Selection of the first earth threshold (Ie>). Select Yes or

Ie> ?
No.
Yes
If the If the user enters Ie>(Yes), the following menu is
displayed.
If the user user enters > (No), go to Ie>> menu
Displays the current threshold value Ie>. To modify this

le >
value, press '. The threshold Ie> is adjustable from :
0.01 I0n
Selection of the Ie> threshold time delay type. Select

Delay Type
(DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI
DMT
for the electromechanical inverse time curve and
LABOR.* for Laborelec curves) using # and enable
*Note: available for 0.01 to 8 Ien range only.
3.5.5.2.1 Ie> DMT threshold menu

Display of the Ie> DMT time delay.
Delay Type
DMT
Selection of the Ie> time delay. Select the time delay

tIe >
from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using
100 ms
'.
3.5.5.2.2 Ie> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu
Display of the Ie> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI
Delay Type
curves).
DMT
Selection of the Ie> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI,
Idmt
IEC SI
IEEE EI, or IEC RC, using # and enable your choice
using the key '.
Selection of the selected curve Tms value. Select from

Tms
0.025 to 1.5 using # and enable your choice using
0.025
'.
3.5.5.2.2.1 Ie> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu

t Reset
60 ms
3.5.5.2.2.2 Ie> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu

Type Tempo
Reset DMT

t Reset
60 ms
3.5.5.2.2.3 Ie> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu
Type Tempo
Reset IDMT

Rtms
0.025
3.5.5.2.3 Ie> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu
Display of the Ie> inverse time delay
Delay type
(electromechanical RI curve).
RI

K
10 using # and enable your choice using '.
0.1
3.5.5.2.3.1 Ie> DMT reset time, RI curves menu

t Reset
60 ms
3.5.5.2.4 Ie> threshold, LABORELEC curve

Display of the Ie> inverse time delay type LABORELEC
Delay Type
LABOR.
Selection of the associated curve. Select curve 1, curve

Idmt
2 or curve 3.
1
Selection of the t Reset value associated to the

t Reset
LABORELEC curve. Select from 40 ms to 100 s using
40 ms
' and enable your choice using '.
3.5.5.2.5 Ie>> threshold menu

Selection of the Ie>> second earth threshold. Select
Ie>> ?
Yes or No.
Yes
If the user enters Ie>>(Yes), the following menu is
displayed.
If the user enters>> (No) go to Ie>>> menu
Selection of the Ie>> second threshold current value.

Ie>>
To modify this value, press '. The threshold Ie>> is
0.1 I0n
adjustable from :
Selection of the second threshold Ie>> time delay.

tIe>>
300 ms
validate your choice using '.
3.5.5.2.6 Ie>>> threshold menu
Selection of the Ie>>> third earth threshold. Select
Ie>>> ?
Yes or No.
Yes
If the user validates Ie>>>(Yes), the following menu is
displayed.
If the user enters Ie>>> (No), the LCD display returns
to the heading of the menu [50N/51N] E/Gnd.
Selection of the Ie>>> third threshold current

Ie>>>
value.The threshold Ie>> is adjustable from :
1.0 I0n
Selection of the third threshold Ie>>> time delay.

tIe>>>
300 ms
3.5.5.3 [46] NEGATIVE Phase SEQUENCE I2> sub-menu

PROTECTION G1
Heading of the [46] NEGATIVE Phase SEQUENCE

[46] Neg Seq OC I2>sub-menu.
Selection of the negative phase sequence overcurrent

I2 > ?
function. Select Yes or No.
Yes
If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is
displayed.
If the user does not validate (No), no menu is activated.
Displays the negative phase sequence threshold value

I2 >
I2>. To modify this value, press '. The threshold I2>
0.1 In
is adjustable from 0.01 to 40 In step of 0.01 In.
Selection of the I2> threshold time delay type. Select

Delay Type
(DMT for independent time, IDMT for inverse time
DMT
curves, RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve)
using # and validate your choice using '.
3.5.5.3.1 I2> DMT threshold menu

Display of the I2> DMT time delay.
Delay Type
DMT
Selection of the I2> time delay. Select the time delay

t I2 >
from 0 to 150 s using # and validate your choice
100 ms
using '.
3.5.5.3.2 I2> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu
Display of the I2> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI
Delay Type
curves).
IDMT
Selection of the I2> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI,
Curve
IEC SI
IEEE EI using # and validate your choice using the key
'.
Selection of the selected curve Tms value. Select from

Tms
0.025 to 1.5 using # and validate your choice using
0.025
'.
3.5.5.3.2.1 I2> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu
t Reset
60 ms
3.5.5.3.2.2 I2> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu

Type Tempo
Reset DMT
# and validate your choice using '.

t Reset
60 ms
and validate your choice using '.
3.5.5.3.2.3 I2> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu

Type Tempo
Reset IDMT
# and validate your choice using '.

Rtms
0.025
3.5.5.3.3 I2> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu
Display of the I2> inverse time delay
Delay Type
(electromechanical
RI
RI curve).

K
10 using # and validate your choice using '.
0.1
3.5.5.3.3.1 I2> DMT reset time, RI curves

t Reset
60 ms
3.5.5.4 [49] Therm OL sub-menu

PROTECTION G1
Heading of the [49] Therm OL (Thermal Overload)

[49] Therm OL sub-menu
Selection of the thermal overload function. Select Yes

Therm OL ?
or No.
Yes
If the user enters Yes, the following menu is displayed.
If the user enters No, no menu content is displayed.
Displays the thermal current threshold value Iθ>. To

Iθ >
0.3 In modify this value, press '. The threshold Iθ> is
adjustable from 0.2 to 3.2 In step of 0.01.
Press ' to validate your choice.
Displays the Te thermal time constant associated with

Te
the thermal overload formula. To modify this value,
1 mn
press '.
The time constant Te is adjustable from 1 min to 200
min, step of 1 min.
Displays the k factor associated with the thermal

k
overload function. To modify this value, press '.
1.05
k factor is adjustable from 1 to 1.5, step of 0.01.
Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal

θ Trip
overload trip threshold. To modify this value, press .
100%
θ Trip is adjustable from 50 % to 200 % step of 1%.
Selection of the thermal overload alarm function. Select

θ Alarm ?
Yes or No.
Yes
If the user validates Yes, the following menu is
displayed.
If the user validate No, refer to the THERMAL
OVERLOAD sub-menu.
Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal

θ Alarm
overload alarm threshold. To modify this value, press
100%
'.
θ Trip is adjustable from 50 % to 200 % step of 1%.
3.5.5.5 [37] UNDERCURRENT I< sub-menu

PROTECTION G1
Heading of the [37] Under-Current sub-menu.

[37] Under
Current
Selection of the undercurrent function. Select Yes or

I<?
No.
Yes
displayed.
If the user does not validate (No), no menu points is
activated.
Displays the undercurrent threshold value I<. To

I<
modify this value, press '.
20 %
The threshold I< is adjustable from 2 % to 100 % In,
step of 1 %.
Selection of the tI< time delay. Select the time delay
tI <
from 0 to 180 s.
100 ms
3.5.5.6 [79] AUTORECLOSE sub-menu

PROTECTION G1
Heading of the [79] AUTORECLOSER sub-menu

[79] Autoreclose
Selection of the autoreclose function. Select Yes or No.

Autoreclose ?
Yes
displayed.
If the user does not validate (No), no menu is activated.
Selection of the external circuit breaker failure function

Ext CB Fail ?
associated with the autorecloser function. Select Yes or
Yes
No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is
displayed.
If the user does not validate (No), the Ext Block sub
menu is activated.
3.5.5.6.1 [79] EXTERNAL CB FAILURE

Allows the use of a dedicated input (CB FLT) to inform
Ext CB Fail
the autorecloser function of the state (failure or
Yes
operational) of the CB.
Selection of the external CB failure time delay tCFE.

Ext CB Fail Time
Select the time delay from 10 ms to 600 s using #.
10 ms
3.5.5.6.2 [79] EXTERNAL BLOCKING

Allows the use of a dedicated input (Block_79) to block
Ext Block ?
the autorecloser function.
No
3.5.5.6.3 [79] DEAD and RECLAIM TIMES

Selection of the First Cycle Dead Time (tD1) value
Dead Time
associated with the autoreclose function.
tD1 150 ms
Select from 10 ms to 300 s step of 10 ms using # and
Selection of the Second Cycle Dead Time (tD2) value

Dead Time
tD2 1.5 s
Selection of the Third Cycle Dead Time (tD3) value

Dead Time
tD3 10 s
Selection of the Fourth Cycle Dead Time (tD4) value

Dead Time
tD4 10 s
Select from 10 ms to 600 step of 10 ms using # and
Selection of the Reclaim Time (tR) value associated with

Reclaim Time
the autoreclose function.
tR 10 s
Selection of the Inhibit Time (tI) value associated with

Inhib Time
the autoreclose function (following a manual CB
tI 520 ms
closure).
Selection of the number of cycles associated with the
Phase Cycles
phase autoreclose function. Select from 0 to 4 using #
3
Selection of the number of cycles associated with the

E/Gnd Cycles
earth autoreclose function. Select from 0 to 4 using #
2
0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip

CYCLES 4321
1 = trip on tI> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle
tI > 1101
2 = no trip on tI> pick-up

CYCLES 4321
1 = trip on tI>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle
tI >> 1211
2 = no trip on tI>> pick-up

CYCLES 4321
1 = trip on tI>>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle
tI >>> 1110
2 = no trip on tI>>> pick-up

CYCLES 4321
1 = trip on tIe> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle
tIe > 0111
2 = no trip on tIe> pick-up

CYCLES 4321
1 = trip on tIe>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle
tIe >> 1121
2 = no trip on tIe>> pick-up

CYCLES 4321
1 = trip on tIe>>> pick-up, followed by reclosing
tIe >>> 1111
cycle

CYCLES 4321
1 = trip on tAux1 pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle
tAux1 1112
2 = no trip on t Aux1 pick-up

CYCLES 4321
1 = trip on t Aux2 pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle
tAux2 0111
2 = no trip on tAux2 pick-up

The AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu makes it possible to programme the various automation
functions included in the MiCOM P124.
⇒ Trip Commands
⇒ Latch Functions (associated to trip relay RL1)
⇒ Blocking logic 1
⇒ Blocking Logic 2
⇒ Logic Select. 1
⇒ Logic Select. 2
⇒ Outputs Relays (RL2 to RL6)
⇒ Latch output relay (RL2 to RL6)
⇒ Inputs
⇒ Broken Conductor
⇒ Cold load PU
⇒ CB Fail
⇒ CB Supervision
To access the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu, press # then the key $ six times.
3.5.6.1 Trip Commands sub-menu

This sub-menu makes it possible to assign to the trip output (RL1) part or all the
selected thresholds.
Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu.

AUTOMAT.CTRL
Heading of the Trip ORDER sub-menu.

Trip Commands
Allocation of the first phase time delay overcurrent

Trip tI>
threshold (tI>) to the trip output (select Yes or No).
Yes
If the user validates Yes, the trip output relay (RL1) shall
be activated at the end of the time delay tI>.
If the user validates No, the trip output relay (RL1) shall
never be activated, even at the end of the time delay
tI>.
Allocation of the second phase time delay overcurrent
Trip tI>>
threshold (tI>>) to the trip output.
Yes
Select Yes or No.
Allocation to the third phase time delay overcurrent

Trip tI>>>
threshold (tI>>>) to the trip output.
Yes
Select Yes or No.
Allocation of the first earth time delay overcurrent

Trip tIe>
threshold (tIe>) to the trip output.
Yes
Select Yes or No.
Allocation of the second earth time delay overcurrent

Trip tIe>>
threshold (tIe>>) to the trip output.
Yes
Select Yes or No.
Allocation of the third earth time delay overcurrent

Trip tIe>>>
threshold (tIe>>>) to the trip output.
Yes
Select Yes or No.
Allocation of the under-current threshold to the trip

Trip tI <
output
No
Select Yes or No.
Allocation of the delayed negative phase sequence

Trip tI2 >
overcurrent threshold (tI2>) to the trip output.
Yes
Select Yes or No.
Allocation of the thermal overload Trip information

Trip Thermal θ
(θ Trip) to the trip output.
Yes
Select Yes or No.
Allocation of the broken conductor detection to the trip

Trip Brkn.Cond
output.
No
Select Yes or No.
Allocation of the delayed auxiliary input Aux 1 to the

Trip t Aux 1
trip output.
Yes
Select Yes or No.

Trip t Aux 2
trip output.
Yes
Select Yes or No.
3.5.6.2 Latch Functions Sub-Menu

This sub-menu makes it possible to latch the trip output relay (RL1) associated with
one or several thresholds after the cause has disappeared.
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.

AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of the Latch functions associated to the trip

Latch Functions output relay RL1 sub-menu.
Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the

Latch tI>
first phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>) (select
Yes
Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be
latched after tI> disappeared. If the user validates No,
RL1 shall drop out after tI>.
Latch tI>>
second phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>)
Yes
(select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall
be latched after tI>> disappeared. If the user
validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tI>>.
Latch tI>>>
third phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>)
Yes
be latched after tI>>> disappeared. If the user
validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tI>>>.
Latch tIe>
first earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>) (select
Yes
latched after tIe> disappeared. If the user validates
No, RL1 shall drop out after tIe>.
Latch tIe>>
second earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>)
Yes
be latched after tIe>> disappeared. If the user
validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tIe>>.
Latch tIe>>>
third earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>)
Yes
be latched after tIe>>> disappeared. If the user
validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tIe>>>.
Latch tI <
time delay undercurrent threshold (tI<) (select Yes or
Yes
No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after
tI< disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall
drop out after tI<.

Latch tI2 >
time delay negative phase overcurrent threshold (tI2>)
Yes
be latched after tI2> disappeared. If the user validates
No, RL1 shall drop out after tI2>.
Latch Thermal θ
thermal overload trip information (θ trip) (select Yes or
Yes
No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after
θ trip disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall
drop out after θ trip.
Latch Brkn.Cond
broken conductor function (Latch Brkn. Cond) (select
No
latched after Latch Brkn. Cond. Information
disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop
out after Latch Brkn. Cond.
Latch t Aux 1
delayed auxiliary input (Aux 1) (select Yes or No). If the
Yes
user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tAux 1
out after tAux 1.
Latch t Aux 2
delayed auxiliary input (Aux 2) (select Yes or No). If the
Yes
user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tAux 2
out after tAux 2.
3.5.6.3 Blocking Logic sub-menu
The Blocking Logic sub-menu is labelled as Blocking Logic 1 t and Blocking Logic 2 t
for the dual powered MiCOM P124 relays.
The Blocking Logic (1) t allows blocking of each time delayed stage by the input
assigned to the Blocking Logic function (1) BLOCK LG 1 (refer to inputs menu).
The same Blocking Logic (2) t submenu allows blocking of each time delayed stage
by the input assigned to the Blocking Logic function (2) BLOCK LG 2 (refer to inputs
menu).

AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of the Blocking Logic sub-menu.

Blocking Logic
Blocking logic of the first phase time delay overcurrent

Block 1 tI>
threshold (tI>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates
Yes
Yes, the first threshold shall be locked on the transition
(logic state 1) of the Logic "Blk log" logic input. If the
user validates No, the transition of the "Blk log" logic
input shall not alter the first phase threshold tI>.
Blocking logic of the second phase time delay

Block 1 tI>>
overcurrent threshold (tI>>).
Yes
Select Yes or No.
Blocking logic of the third phase time delay overcurrent

Block 1 tI>>>
threshold (tI>>>)
Yes
Select Yes or No.
Blocking logic of the first earth time delay overcurrent

Block 1 tIe>
threshold (tIe>).
Yes
Select Yes or No.
Blocking logic of the second earth time delay

Block 1 tIe>>
overcurrent threshold (tIe>>).
Yes
Select Yes or No.
Blocking logic of the third earth time delay overcurrent

Block 1 tIe>>>
threshold (tIe>>>).
Yes
Select Yes or No.
Blocking logic of the time delay negative phase

Block 1 tI2 >
sequence overcurrent threshold (tI2>) to the trip
Yes
output.
Select Yes or No.
Blocking logic of the thermal state calculation.

Block 1 Thermal θ
Select Yes or No.
Yes
Blocking logic of the broken conductor function

Block 1 Brkn.Cond
Select Yes or No.
No
Blocking logic of the time delay of the auxiliary input

Block 1 t Aux 1
Aux 1.
No
Select Yes or No.
Blocking logic of the time delay of the auxiliary input

Block 1 t Aux 2
Aux 2.
No
Select Yes or No.
3.5.6.4 Logic Select sub-menu

The Logic Select. 1 sub-menu allows the user to delay the 2nd and 3rd time delayed
stages through the logic input assigned to the Log Sel 1 function (INPUTS sub-menu).
The Logic Select. 2 sub-menu allows the user to delay the 2nd and 3rd time delayed
stages through the logic input assigned to the Log Sel 2 function (INPUTS sub-menu).

AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of the Logic Select. 1 sub-menu.

Logic Select. 1
Logic selectivity of the second phase time delay

Sel1 tI>>
overcurrent threshold (tI>>) (select Yes or No). If the
Yes
user validates Yes, operation of the second threshold
shall be delayed for tSel1 on the transition (logic state
1) of the "Log Sel 1" logic input. If the user validates
No, the transition of the "Log Sel 1" logic input shall not
alter the second phase threshold tI>>.
Logic selectivity of the third phase time delay

Sel1 tI>>>
overcurrent threshold (tI>>>)
Yes
Select Yes or No.
Logic selectivity of the second earth time delay

Sel1 tIe>>
overcurrent threshold (tIe>>).
Yes
Select Yes or No.
Logic selectivity of the third earth time delay

Sel1 tIe>>>
overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>).
Yes
Select Yes or No.
Displays the selective scheme logic time delay t Sel1.

t Sel1
To modify this value, press '. The t Sel1 is adjustable
150 ms
from 0 ms to 150 s by step of 10 ms.
3.5.6.5 Outputs Relays sub-menu

This sub-menu makes it possible to allocate to each logic output (excepted Watchdog
RL0 and Tripping RL1 refer to Trip Commands submenu) the various thresholds
(instantaneous and/or time delay).
• MiCOM P124 dual-powered : allows 5 outputs, RL2 to RL6
Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL menu.

AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of the Output Relays sub-menu.

Output Relays
Allocation of trip orders to the output relays RL2 to RL6

Trip 65432
(copies the trip contact onto one or several selected
00101
relays).
To allocate this information to the output relay(s), press
', then allocate to the desired output relay the value
1using #. Repeat the operation on the other output
relays if desired, then validate using '.
Allocation of the first phase instantaneous overcurrent

I> 65432
threshold (I>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6.
00101
Select output relays.
Allocation of the first phase time delay overcurrent

tI > 65432
threshold (tI>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6.
00101
Allocation of the second phase instantaneous

I >> 65432
overcurrent threshold (I>>) to the output relays RL2 to
00101
RL6.
Allocation of the second phase time delay overcurrent

tI >> 65432
threshold (tI>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6.
00101
Allocation of the third phase instantaneous overcurrent

I >>> 65432
threshold (I>>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6.
01101
Allocation of the third phase time delay overcurrent

tI >>> 65432
threshold (tI>>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6.
00101
Select output relays .
Allocation of the first earth instantaneous overcurrent

Ie > 65432
threshold (Ie>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6.
00101
Select output relays .
Allocation of the first earth time delay overcurrent

tIe > 65432
threshold (tIe>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6.
00101
Allocation of the second earth instantaneous

Ie >> 65432
overcurrent threshold (Ie>>) to the output relays RL2 to
00101
RL6.
Allocation of the second earth time delay overcurrent

tIe >> 65432
threshold (tIe>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6.
00101
Allocation of the third earth instantaneous overcurrent

Ie >>> 65432
threshold (Ie>>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6.
00101
Allocation of the third earth time delay overcurrent

tIe >>> 65432
threshold (tIe>>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6.
00101
Allocation of the minimum current time delay threshold

tI < 65432
(tI<) to the output relays RL2 to RL6.
00101
Allocation of the negative phase sequence overcurrent

tI2 > 65432
time delay threshold (tI2>) to the output relays RL2 to
00101
RL6.
Allocation of the thermal alarm threshold to the output

Therm. 65432
relays RL2 to RL6.
Alarm 00101
Allocation of the thermal trip threshold to the output

Therm. 65432
relays RL2 to RL6.
Trip 00101
Allocation of the Circuit Breaker Alarm function to the

CB Alarm 65432
output relays (CB OPEN Nb, SUM An, Tripping and
00101
closing Time) RL2 to RL6.
Allocation of the Circuit Breaker Trip Supervision

52 Fail 65432
Failure function to the output relays RL2 to RL6.
00101
Allocation of the broken conductor function to the

Brkn. 65432
output relays RL2 to RL6.
Cond 01101
Allocation of the circuit breaker failure function to the

CB Fail 65432
01101
CB Fail = CB not open at the end of tBF timer
Allocation of the circuit breaker closing order to the

CB 65432
Close 00101

t Aux 1 65432
00101

t Aux 2 65432
00101
Allocation of the "autorecloser in progress" information

79 Run 65432
to the output relays RL2 to RL6.
00101
Allocation of the autorecloser final trip function to the

79 Trip 65432
00101
Allocation of the Active Group indication to the output

Active 65432
relays RL2 to RL6.
Group 10000
3.5.6.6 Latch of the Output relays RL2 to RL6

This sub-menu makes it possible to latch the auxiliary output relays, relay by relay.
Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL menu. To gain access

AUTOMAT. CTRL to the menu, press $, % 6 times.
Heading of the Latch Output Relays sub-menu.

Latch Output
To gain access to the sub-menu points, press $.
Relays
Latch of the auxiliary output relay RL2.

Output 2
Select Yes or No.
No

Output 3
Select Yes or No.
Yes

Output 4
Select Yes or No.
Yes

Output 5
Select Yes or No.
Yes

Output 6
Select Yes or No.
No

Output 7
Select Yes or No.
Yes

Output 8
Select Yes or No.
No
3.5.6.7 Inputs sub-menu

This sub-menu makes it possible to allocate to each logic input either a label or an
automation function, following the table :
Label abstract Label signification

None No allocation
Unlatch Delocking the latching of the outputs
52 a Position of the circuit breaker (open)
52 b Position of the circuit breaker (close)
CB FLT External failure information from the CB
Aux 1 Allocation to the input the external information Aux 1
Aux 2 Allocation to the input the external information Aux 2
Blk Log (1) Blocking logic 1
Blk Log 2 Blocking logic 2
Strt Dist Starting of the disturbance recording function
Cold L PU Cold load pick up alloction
Log Sel 1 Logic selectivity 1
Log Sel 2 Logic selectivity 2
Change set Change of setting group (default setting group 1)
θ Reset Reset of the thermal state
Block-79 Blocking of the autorecloser function [79]
Trip Circ Trip circuit supervision input
Start tBf Starting of the breaker failure timer

AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of the Inputs sub-menu.

Inputs
Allocation of logic input 1. To allocate labels to logic

Input 1
input 1, press ' then with # $ select the desired
O/O
label from the available list, then validate your choice
using '.

Input 2
BLC LG
using '.

Input 3
AUX1
using '.

Input 4
C.L.S
using '.

Input 5
RAZ TH
using '.
Displays the time delay t Aux 1 associated with the

Aux1 Time
logic input Aux1. To modify this value, press '.
t Aux1 300 ms
The t Aux 1 is adjustable from 0 ms to 200 s by step of
10 ms, then validate your choice using '.
Displays the time delay t Aux 2 associated with the

Aux2 Time
logic input Aux 2. To modify this value, press '.
t Aux2 8s
The t Aux 2 is adjustable from 0 ms to 200 s by step of
10 ms, then validate your choice using '.
3.5.6.8 BROKEN CONDUCTOR sub-menu
AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
Broken Cond. Heading of the BROKEN CONDUCTOR sub-menu.
Brkn. Cond. ? Selection of the broken conductor function. Select Yes

Yes or No.
displayed.
If the user validates (No), the broken conductor
function is inactive.
Brkn.Cond Time Display the broken conductor time delay tBC. To

tBC 32 s modify this value, press '.
The tBC is adjustable from 1 to 14400 s with step of
1 s.
Press ' to validate your adjustment
Ratio I2/I1 Display the broken conductor threshold. This threshold

20% is a ratio between the negative phase sequence and
the positive phase sequence current. To modify this
value, press '.
The I2/I1 ratio is adjustable from 20 to 100% by step
of 1%. Press ' to validate your adjustment
3.5.6.9 COLD LOAD PICK-UP sub-menu

AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of the Cold Load PU sub-menu.

Cold Load PU
Selection of the cold load pick-up function. Select Yes

Cold Load PU ?
or No.
Yes
displayed.
If the user does not validate (No), the cold load pick-up
Associate the I> time delay threshold with the cold
Cold Load PU
load pick up function. To modify this choice, press '
tI> ? Yes
and using # allocate the desired threshold to the cold
load pick-up function.
Associate the I>> time delay threshold with the cold

Cold Load PU
tI>> ? Yes
load pick up function.
Associated the I>>> time delay threshold to the cold

Cold Load PU
tI >>> ? Yes
load pick up function.
Associated the Ie> time delay threshold to the cold

Cold Load PU
tIe > ? Yes
Associated the Ie>> time delay threshold to the cold

Cold Load PU
tIe >> ? Yes
Associated the Ie>>> time delay threshold to the cold

Cold Load PU
tIe >>> ? Yes
Associated the I2> time delay threshold the cold load

COLD LOAD P/UP
pick up function. To modify this choice, press ' and
tI2> ? Yes
using # allocate desired threshold to the cold load
start pick up function.
Associated the Thermal overload time delay threshold

Cold Load PU
to the cold load pick up function. To modify this choice,
t Therm. ? Yes
press ' and using # allocate the desired threshold to
the cold load pick-up function.
Selection of the cold load pick up percentage scaling

Cold Load PU
value associated with the selected thresholds. Select
level 120%
from 20% to 500% with steps of 1 % using # and
Selection of the cold load pick up time delay. Select

Cold Load PU
from 100 ms to 3600 s with steps of 10 ms using #
tCL = 2s
3.5.6.10 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE sub-menu

AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of the CB Fail sub-menu.

CB Fail
Selection of the circuit breaker failure function.

CB Fail ?
If the user validates (Yes), the next menu is displayed.
Yes
If the user does not validate (No), the breaker failure
Display of the I< threshold value which defines the

I<
current monitoring band zone. To modify that value,
20% In
press '.
The threshold is settable between 2% and 100%.
To confirm the setting, press '.
Selection of the circuit breaker failure time delay.
CB Fail Time
Select from 30 ms to 10 s with steps of 10 ms using #
tBF 200 ms
Selection of the blocking function for 1st overcurrent

Bloc I > ?
stage assigned to the output relay upon breaker
No
failure. Choose YES or NO.
Selection of the blocking function for 1st earth fault

Bloc Ie > ?
stage assigned to the output relay upon breaker
No
failure. Choose YES or NO.
3.5.6.11 CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION sub-menu

AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of the CB Supervision sub-menu.

CB Supervision
Selection of the trip circuit supervision function. Select

TC Supervision
Yes or No.
Yes
If the user validates (Yes), the function is active.
If the user does not validate (No), go to CB Open Time
menu.
The trip circuit supervision function is inactive.
Selection of the Trip circuit supervision timer.
t Trip Circuit
Select from 100 ms to 10 s with steps of 10 ms using
t SUP 3s #
Selection of the CB open operating time supervision

CB Open S'vision
Yes
If the user validates (Yes) the following menu is
displayed.
If the user does not validate (No), go to CB Close
menu.
The CB open operating time supervision function is
inactive.
Selection of the CB open operating time (tCBO).
CB OpenTime
Select from 50 ms to 1.0 s with steps of 10 ms using
150 ms
#.
Selection of the CB close operating time supervision

CB Close S'vision
Yes
displayed.
If the user does not validate (No), go to CB.Open
Alarm menu. The CB close operating time supervision
Selection of the CB close operating time (tCBC).
CB Close Time
Select from 50 ms to 1.0 s with steps of 10 ms using
150 ms
#.
Selection of the maximum CB operations function.

CB Open Alarm ?
Select Yes or No.
Yes
displayed.
If the user does not validate (No), refer to ΣAmps(n)
menu.
The CB open maximum number function is inactive.
Selection of the CB open numbers alarm threshold.

CB Open NB
Select from 0 to 50000 by step of 1 using #.
1500
Selection of the Summation Amps (or square Amps)

ΣAmps(n) ?
interrupted by the CB function. Select Yes or No.
Yes
displayed.
If the user does not validate (No), refer to t open pulse
menu.
The Summation Amps function is inactive.
Selection of the summation Amps (or square Amps)
ΣAmps(n)
alarm threshold.
3 E6
Select from 0 to 4000 E6 A (or A2) with steps of 1 E6
using #.
Selection of the type of summation (Amps or square
n
Amps).
2
Select 1 or 2 using #.
Selection of the tripping pulse time.

t Open Pulse
300 ms
#.
Selection of the closing time.

t Close Pulse
500 ms
#.
3.5.7 RECORDS Menu

The RECORDING menu makes it possible to read the records.
⇒ CB Monitoring
⇒ Fault record
⇒ Disturb record
⇒ Time peak value
3.5.7.1 CB MONITORING sub-menu

The CB Monitoring sub-menu makes possible to read and clear the parameters and
measurements associated to this function.
Heading the RECORD menu.

RECORD
Heading the CB Monitoring sub-menu.

CB Monitoring
Display the circuit breaker opening time in ms.

CB Opening Time
83 ms
Display the circuit breaker closing time in ms.

CB Closing Time
100 ms
Display the number of opening commands sent by the

CB Operations
relay. To clear these values, press !.
RST=[C] 1312
Allows the user to clear the memorised summations of

Σ Amps (n)
interrupted currents. All 3 phases currents are clear
RST=[C]
together. To clear these values, press !.
Display the summation of the Amps (or square Amps)

Σ Amps (n) IA
interrupted by the circuit breaker phase A.
5 E6

Σ Amps (n) IB
interrupted by the circuit breaker phase B.
5 E6

Σ Amps (n) IC
interrupted by the circuit breaker phase C.
5 E6
3.5.7.2 Fault Record sub-menu

The Fault RECORD sub-menu makes possible to read the various parameters and
measurement for each of the five fault store in MiCOM P124 memory.
Heading of the RECORD menu.

RECORD
Heading of the Fault Record sub-menu.

Fault Record
Selection of the Fault record number (by selecting

Record Number
either 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5) to be displayed. To modify this
4
fault record number, press ' then using # enter the
required number.
Display the time of the fault record.
Fault Time
The format of the time is HH:MM:ss:msms
12:05:23:42
In this example the fault appeared at 12H am, 05
minutes, 23 seconds and 420 ms.
Display the Date of the fault record.

Fault Date
The format of the Date is DD/MM/YY.
12/10/99
In this example, the fault appeared on 12 October
1999.
Display the active setting group (1 or 2).

Active Set Group
2
Display the faulty phase for the chosen fault record

Faulted Phase
(NONE, phase A, B, C, EARTH, AB, AC, BC, or ABC).
Phase A
Display the origin of the fault that as generated the trip

Threshold
order.
I>>
Display the magnitude of the faulty current. This value

Magnitude
is the 50/60 Hz amplitude.
1200 A
Display the magnitude of the phase A current at the

IA Magnitude
time of the Fault. This value is the 50/60 Hz amplitude.
1200 A
Display the magnitude of the phase B current at the

IB Magnitude
500 A
Display the magnitude of the phase C current at the

IC Magnitude
480 A
Display the magnitude of the earth current at the time

In Magnitude
of the Fault. This value is the 50/60 Hz amplitude.
103 A
3.5.7.3 DISTURBANCE RECORD sub-menu

The DISTURBANCE sub-menu makes possible to set the various parameters and
thresholds associated to this recording function.

RECORD
Heading of the Disturb Record sub-menu.

Disturb Record
Selection of the disturbance record pre-time.

Pre-Time
Select from 100 ms to 3s by step of 100 ms using #.
1.3 s
Selection of the disturbance record post-time. Select

Post-Time
from 100 ms to 3s by step of 100 ms using # and
0.2 s
WARNING : THE TOTAL DISTURBANCE RECORDING TIME IS 3 SECONDS (PRE TIME

+ POST TIME).
Selection of start criteria for the disturbance recording

Disturb Rec Trig
function. Select between ON INST. (start on
ON INST.
instantaneous thresholds) or ON Trip (start on trip
conditions) using # and validate your choice using '.
3.5.7.4 Time PEAK VALUE sub-menu

The Time PEAK VALUE sub-menu makes possible to set parameters associated to this
function. (Peak and Average values displayed in the Measurements menu).

RECORD
Heading of the Time Peak Value sub-menu.

Time Peak Value
Selection of the time of the window during the peak

Time Window
and average values are stored.
5 mn
Select either 5mn, 10mn, 15mn, 30mn, or 60mn using
'.
4. WIRING
The external connection diagrams of the MiCOM P124 relays are provided in
Appendix 1 of the Technical Guide.
4.1 Current inputs (measurement)
The MiCOM P124 relays have 4 analogue inputs (3 phase current inputs and 1 earth
current input). The rated current value of these measurement inputs is either 1A or 5A
(must be specified on order).
The rated current is indicated on the front panel of the relay, behind the top flap.
WARNING: THE CONNECTION OF THE EARTH CURRENT INPUT MAY DIFFER
DEPENDING ON WHETHER IT IS CONNECTED TO A CORE BALANCED
CT OR TO A SUMMATION OF THE 3 PHASE CTs.
Generally, when the relay is used with three phase CTs and one core balanced CT,
there is not need to power the relay through the earth channel.
In this case, the core balanced CT can be connected to terminals 47 and 48.
For some phase to earth faults, when some specific cores are used, it can be possible
that the fault does not generate a current high enough* to power the relay from only
one phase circuit. It will then be necessary to connect the core TC to terminals 55
and 56 in order to power the relay through the earth circuit as well.
*reminder: the MiCOM P124 relay is self-powered from a 0.2 In current on at least
one phase.
Connection to 3 phase CTs:
In this case the earth current is derived from the summation of the 3 phase currents.
It is not necessary to power the relay via the earth circuit. The summation of the 3 CTs
must be connected to terminals 47 and 48.
In this case it is necessary to power the relay through the earth circuit. The core
balanced CT must be connected to terminals 55 and 56.
4.2 Output relays
7 output relays are available on the DUAL-POWERED model.
6 relays are freely programmable (RL1 à RL6), the first relay RL0 being allocated to
signalling an equipment Fault (WATCH DOG) :
• All the output relays are of change-over relays (1 common, 1 normally open
contact, 1 normaly closed contact).
The protection and control functions to which these relays respond can be selected
by means of the AUTOMAT. CTRL. Menu.
NOTE : RL1 is the default trip contact. This relay can be programmed for
fail-safe operation (Configuration/RL1 output relay menu).
• One watchdog relay with a C/O contact (1 common, 1 normally open, 1
normally closed)
WARNING : DURING AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY FAILURE, AND IN ORDER TO

SAVE ENERGY, THE WATCHDOG RELAY IS USED ONLY WHEN THERE
IS A 0.4 IN CURRENT ON AT LEAST ONE PHASE. IT IS DE-ENERGISED
BELOW THAT CURRENT LEVEL OR WHEN A SOFTWARE OR
HARDWARE FAULT IS PRESENT.
Only the relays RL0 and RL1 are functional during an auxiliary power supply failure:
− RL0: from a 0.4 In current on at least one phase,
− RL1: when the relay is not programmed in fail-safe operation. If RL1 is
programmed in fail-safe operation, in that case the command of RL1 is blocked
as well as the protection function.
4.3 Striker output
The P124 relays are fitted with a striker output used to trip the circuit breaker via a
striker device in the absence of an external auxiliary supply.
The 2 terminals to be connected to the striker are polarised:
− + terminal 39
− – terminal 41
according to the external connection diagrams provided in Appendix 1 of the
Technical Guide.
4.4 RS232 front communication port
MiCOM P124 relays provide the user an RS 232 communication port. This link is
dedicated to the MiCOM Setting software MiCOM S1.
Le câble entre le PC et le relais MiCOM doit être équipé de 2 connecteurs Sub D 9
points reliés en point à point.
RS 232 PC port MiCOM P124 end

RS 232 Cable 9 pin male connector
2 2
3 3
5 5
7 7
In case where the battery box MiCOM E1 is used to power the P124 relay, it is placed
between the PC and the P124 relay.
4.5 Auxiliary supply
The auxiliary supply of the MiCOM P124 dual powered relays can be either :
• Dc (range 24-60 Vdc or 48-150 Vdc or 130-250 Vdc)
• Ac (100-250 Vac/ 50-60 Hz).
The voltage range is indicated on the front panel, under the top flag.
The power supply must be connected to terminals 33-34 only.
4.6 Logic inputs

MiCOM P124 Dual-powered model relays have 5 opto-isolated logic inputs. Each
input has its own independent polarity. The voltage range of the inputs is identical to
the dc auxiliary supply range of the MiCOM relay (e.g. Uaux = 48-150 Vdc, logic
input voltage range = 48-150 Vdc).
On the same MiCOM P124 relay, the user can mixed different voltage level for the
logic inputs (e.g. Uaux = 48-150 Vdc, Input 1= 48 Vdc, Input 2-5= 125 Vdc)
The automation operations and signalling functions to which these logic inputs
respond can be selected by means of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu.
WARNING : THESE LOGIC INPUTS CAN ONLY BE USED WHEN THE MICOM RELAY
IS POWERED BY AN EXTERNAL AUXILIARY SUPPLY.
4.7 RS485 rear communication port
All MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relays have an RS485 rear communication port.
The connection of communication is allocated to terminals 29-30-31-32, following
the schemes given in the Appendix 1 of the Technical Guide.
WARNING : THE REARPORT COMMUNICATION CAN ONLY BE USED WHEN THE
MICOM RELAY IS POWERED BY AN EXTERNAL AUXILIARY SUPPLY.
MiCOM P124
CHAPTER 4-2
Menu Content
MiCOM P124 Dual-powered
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION
Menu content
MiCOM P124
Technical Guide
Password
Display CT RATIO RL1 Output Relay LED 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 Group Select Alarms
****
Description Default Display Line CT primary Fail-safe Relay I> Y/N Change Group Inst. Self-reset ?
P124-D RMS I L1 1000 No tl> Y/N input = EDGE No
I>> Y/N
tI>> Y/N
Reference Phase A Text E/Gnd CT primary I>>> Y/N Setting Group Alarm Battery =
ALST L1 1000 tI>>> Y/N 1 No
Ie> Y/N
tIe> Y/N
Software Version Phase B Text Ie>> Y/N
4.A L2 tIe>> Y/N
Ie>>> Y/N
tIe>>> Y/N
Frequency Phase C Text Led Therm Trip Y/N
50 Hz L3 Led Brkn. Cond Y/N
Led CB Fail Y/N
Led tI2> Y/N
Active Group = E/Gnd Text Led Input 1 Y/N
1 N Led Input 2 Y/N
Led Input 3 Y/N
Led Input 4 Y/N
Input St 54321 Led Input 5 Y/N
01011 Led Recloser
MiCOM P124 D Run Y/N
Led Recloser
Relay St 654321 Blocked Y/N
001011 with autoreclose Led tAux 1 Y/N
Led tAux 2 Y/N
Date Menu content

06/08/01
Time From V4.A software

13:15:33
CHAPTER 4-2
Page 1/12
P124/EN T42/B44
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
PROTECTION
Page 2/12
CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS COMMUNICATION

G1/G2
CHAPTER 4-2
Configuration Frequency Max 1L2 Rms Communication ? [50/51] Phase OC [50N/51N] E/Gnd
Date format
P124/EN T42/B44
Inputs 50.01 Hz 0.00 A Yes
I L1 = I>? Ie > ?
Max 1L3 Rms
Inputs : 54321 Date format = 257.05 A Baud Rate Yes Yes
0.00 A
10101 PRIVATE 19200 Bd
I L2 = I> Ie >
Average IL1 Rms
258.80 A 0.1 In 0.01 Ien
0.00 A Parity
None
I L3 = Delay Type Delay Type
Average IL2 Rms
257.50 A IDMT IDMT
0.00 A
Data bits
IN= 8 Idmt Idmt
Average IL3 Rms
20.00 A IEC SI IEC SI
0.00 A
I1 = Stop bits Tms Tms

Reclose Stats
103 A 1 0.025 0.025
RST = [C]
MiCOM P124 D
I2 = Total recloses tReset tReset
Relay Address 60 ms
50 A 0 60 ms
12
with autoreclose
RATIO I2 / I1 = I>> ? Ie >> ?
Cycle1 Recloses
50 % Yes Yes
0
Menu content
IN - fn = Cycle2 Recloses I>> Ie >>
RST = [C] 0.00A 0 2.0 In 0.1 Ien
From V4.A
Thermal θ t I>> t Ie >>
Cycle3 Recloses
software RST = [C] 0% 300 ms 300 ms
0
Max & Average I I>>> ? Ie >>> ?

Cycle4 Recloses
RST = [C] Yes Yes
0
Max 1L1 Rms I>>> Ie >>>

Total Trip &
350 A 10.01 In 1.01 Ien
Lockout 0
t I>>> t Ie >>>
110 ms 300 ms
Menu content
Technical Guide
MiCOM P124
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
PROTECTION
AUTOMAT. CTRL
G1/G2
Menu content
MiCOM P124
[37] Under
[46] Neg Seq OC [49] Therm OL [79] Autoreclose Trip Commands Latch Functions Blocking Logic 1/2
Technical Guide
Current
I2 > ? Therm OL ? I<? Autoreclose ? Trip tI > Latch tI > Block1 tI >
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
I2 > Iθ> I< [Ext CB Fail ? Trip tI >> Latch tI >> Block1 tI >>
0.1 In 0.3 In 20 % In Yes Yes Yes Yes
Delay Type Te tI < Ext CB Fail Time Trip tI >>> Latch tI >>> Block1 tI >>>
IDMT 1 mn 1 ms 10 ms Yes Yes Yes
Curve K Ext Block ? Trip tIe > Latch tIe > Block1 tIe >
IEC SI 1.05 No Yes Yes Yes
Dead Time
Tms θ Trip Trip tIe >> Latch tIe >> Block1 tIe >>
tD1/tD2/tD3/tD4
0.025 100 % Yes Yes Yes
Reclaim Time
tReset θ Alarm ? Trip tIe >>> Latch tIe >>> Block1 tIe >>>
tR 10 ms
40 ms Yes Yes Yes Yes
Inhib Time Trip tI < Block1 tI2 >

Delay Type θ Alarm Latch tI <
tI 520 ms Yes Yes
RI 100 % Yes
Phase Cycles
K 0 Trip tI2 > Latch tI2 > Block1 Thermal θ
0.1 Yes Yes Yes
E/Gnd Cycles
tReset MiCOM P124 D Trip Thermal θ Latch Thermal θ Block1 Brkn. Cond
2
40 ms Yes Yes No
with autoreclose Cycles 4321 Trip Brkn. Cond Latch Brkn. Cond Block1 tAux 1
1110 No Yes No
tI >
tI>>
Menu content tI>>> Trip tAux 1 Latch tAux 1 Block1 tAux 2
tIe > Yes Yes No
tIe >>
From V4.A software tIe >>> Trip tAux 2 Latch tAux 2
t Aux1 Yes Yes
t Aux2
CHAPTER 4-2
Page 3/12
P124/EN T42/B44
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Page 4/12
CHAPTER 4-2
Logic Select. 1/2 Output Relays Latch Output Relays Inputs 1/2/3/4/5 Broken Conductor Cold Load PU CB Fail
P124/EN T42/B44
Sel1 tI >> Output 2 Brkn. Cond ? Cold Load PU ? CB Fail ?

Trip 65432 None
Yes No Yes Yes Yes
00101 Unlatch
I> 52 a
Sel1 tI >>> tl > Output 3 52 b Brkn. Cond Time Cold Load PU I< =
Yes I >> Yes CB FLT tBC 32 s tl> ? Yes 20 % In
tl >> Aux 1
Sel1 tle >> I >>> Output 4 Aux 2 Ratio I2/I1 Cold Load PU CB Fail Time
Yes tl >>> No Blk Log 1 20 % tl>> ? Yes tBF 200 ms
Ie > Blk Log 2
tle > Strt Dist
Sel1 tle >>> Ie >> Output 5 Cold L PU Cold Load PU Bloc I > ?
Yes tle >> Yes Log Sel 1 tl>>>? Yes No
Ie >>> Log Sel 2
t Sel1 tle >>> Output 6 Change set Cold Load PU Bloc Ie> ?
150 ms tl < No Block_79 tle > ? Yes No
tl2 > θ Reset
Therm Alarm Trip Circ Cold Load PU
Therm Trip Start_tBF tle>> ? Yes
CB Alarm
52 Fail
Cold Load PU
Brkn Cond
CB Fail tle >>> ? Yes
CB Close
tAux 1 Cold Load PU
tAux 2 tl2> ? Yes
79 Run
79 Trip MiCOM P124 D Cold Load PU
Active Group tTherm ? Yes
with autoreclose Cold Load PU

Level 120 %
Menu content Cold Load PU

tCL 2s
From V4.A software

Menu content
Technical Guide
MiCOM P124
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
AUTOMAT. CTRL RECORDS

Menu content
MiCOM P124
Technical Guide
CB Supervision CB Monitoring Fault Record Disturb Record Time Peak Value
TC Supervision ? CB Opening Time Record Number Pre-Time Time Window

Yes 83 ms 4 1.3 s 5 mn
t trip circuit CB Closing Time Fault Time Post-Time

t SUP 3s 100 ms 12:05:23:42 0.2 s
CB Open S’vision CB Operations Fault Date Disturb Rec Trig

Yes RST = [C] 0 06/08/01 ON INST.
CB Open Time ∑Amps (n) Active Set Group

150 ms RST = [C] 2
CB Close S’vision ∑Amps (n) IA Faulted Phase

Yes 5 E6 Phase A
CB Close Time ∑Amps (n) IB Threshold

150 ms 5 E6 I>>
CB Open Alarm ? Magnitude

∑Amps (n) IC
Yes 5 E6 1200 A
MiCOM P124 D
CB Open NB IA Magnitude
1500 1200 A
With autoreclose
∑Amps (n) ? IB Magnitude
Yes 500 A
Menu content
∑Amps (n) IC Magnitude
3 E6 480 A
From V4.A software
n IN Magnitude
2 103 A
tOpen Pulse 300ms
tClose Pulse 500 ms

CHAPTER 4-2
Page 5/12
P124/EN T42/B44
BLANK PAGE
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION
Menu content
MiCOM P124
Technical Guide
Password
Display CT RATIO RL1 Output Relay LED 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 Group Select Alarms
****
Description Default Display Line CT primary Fail-safe Relay I> Y/N Change Group Inst. Self-reset ?
P124-D RMS I L1 1000 No tl> Y/N input = EDGE No
I>> Y/N
tI>> Y/N
Reference Phase A Text E/Gnd CT primary I>>> Y/N Setting Group Alarm Battery =
ALST L1 1000 tI>>> Y/N 1 No
Ie> Y/N
tIe> Y/N
Software Version Phase B Text Ie>> Y/N
4.A L2 tIe>> Y/N
Ie>>> Y/N
tIe>>> Y/N
Frequency Phase C Text Led Therm Trip Y/N
50 Hz L3 Led Brkn. Cond Y/N
Led CB Fail Y/N
Led tI2> Y/N
Active Group = E/Gnd Text Led Input 1 Y/N
1 N Led Input 2 Y/N
Led Input 3 Y/N
Led Input 4 Y/N
Input St 54321 Led Input 5 Y/N
01011 Led tAux 1 Y/N
MiCOM P124 D Led tAux 2 Y/N
Relay St 654321
001011 without autoreclose
Date Menu content
06/08/01
Time From V4.A software

13:15:33
CHAPTER 4-2
Page 7/12
P124/EN T42/B44
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
PROTECTION
Page 8/12
CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS COMMUNICATION

G1/G2
CHAPTER 4-2
Configuration Frequency Max 1L2 Rms Communication ? [50/51] Phase OC [50N/51N] E/Gnd
Date format
P124/EN T42/B44
Inputs 50.01 Hz 0.00 A Yes
I L1 I>? Ie > ?
Date format = Max 1L3 Rms
Inputs : 54321 257.05 A Baud Rate Yes Yes
PRIVATE 0.00 A
10101 19200 Bd
I L2 I> Ie >
Average IL1 Rms 0.1 In 0.01 Ien
258.80 A 0.00 A Parity
None
I L3 Delay Type Delay Type
Average IL2 Rms
257.50 A IDMT IDMT
0.00 A
Data bits
IN 8 Idmt Idmt
Average IL3 Rms
20.00 A IEC SI IEC SI
0.00 A
I1 = Stop bits Tms Tms

103 A 1 0.025 0.025
MiCOM P124 D
I2 = tReset tReset
Relay Address 60 ms
50 A 60 ms
12
without
RATIO I2 / I1 = I>> ? Ie >> ?
autoreclose 50 % Yes Yes
IN - fn = I>> Ie >>
Menu content RST = [C] 0.00A 2.0 In 0.1 Ien
Thermal θ t I>> t Ie >>

From V4.A RST = [C] 0% 300 ms 300 ms
software Max & Average I I>>> ? Ie >>> ?

RST = [C] Yes Yes
Max 1L1 Rms I>>> Ie >>>

350 A 10.01 In 1.01 Ien
t I>>> t Ie >>>
110 ms 300 ms
Menu content
Technical Guide
MiCOM P124
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
PROTECTION
AUTOMAT. CTRL
G1/G2
Menu content
MiCOM P124
[37] Under
[46] Neg Seq OC [49] Therm OL Trip Commands Latch Functions Blocking Logic 1/2
Technical Guide
Current
I2 > ? Therm OL ? I<? Trip tI > Latch tI > Block1 tI >

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
I2 > I θ> I< Trip tI >> Latch tI >> Block1 tI >>

0.1 In 0.3 In 20 % In Yes Yes Yes
Delay Type Te tI < Trip tI >>> Latch tI >>> Block1 tI >>>

IDMT 1 mn 1 ms Yes Yes Yes
Curve K Trip tIe > Latch tIe > Block1 tIe >
IEC SI 1.05 Yes Yes Yes
Tms θ Trip Trip tIe >> Latch tIe >> Block1 tIe >>
0.025 100 % Yes Yes Yes
tReset θ Alarm ? Trip tIe >>> Latch tIe >>> Block1 tIe >>>
40 ms Yes Yes Yes Yes
Delay Type θ Alarm Trip tI < Latch tI < Block1 tI2 >
RI 100 % Yes Yes Yes
K Trip tI2 > Latch tI2 > Block1 Thermal θ

0.1 Yes Yes Yes
tReset Trip Thermal θ Latch Thermal θ Block1 Brkn. Cond

40 ms
MiCOM P124 D Yes Yes No
Trip Brkn. Cond Latch Brkn. Cond Block1 tAux 1

without autoreclose No Yes No
Trip tAux 1 Latch tAux 1 Block1 tAux 2

Menu content Yes Yes No
Trip tAux 2 Latch tAux 2

From V4.A software Yes Yes
CHAPTER 4-2
Page 9/12
P124/EN T42/B44
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Page 10/12
CHAPTER 4-2
Logic Select. 1/2 Output Relays Latch Output Relays Inputs 1/2/3/4/5 Broken Conductor Cold Load PU CB Fail
P124/EN T42/B44
Sel1 tI >> Output 2 Brkn. Cond ? Cold Load PU ? CB Fail ?

Trip 65432 None
Yes No Yes Yes Yes
00101 Unlatch
I> 52 a
Sel1 tI >>> tl > Output 3 52 b Brkn. Cond Time Cold Load PU I< =
Yes I >> Yes CB FLT tBC 32 s tl> ? Yes 20 % In
tl >> Aux 1
Sel1 tle >> I >>> Output 4 Aux 2 Ratio I2/I1 Cold Load PU CB Fail Time
Yes tl >>> No Blk Log 1 20 % tl>> ? Yes tBF 200 ms
Ie > Blk Log 2
tle > Strt Dist
Sel1 tle >>> Ie >> Output 5 Cold L PU Cold Load PU Bloc I > ?
Yes tle >> Yes Log Sel 1 tl>>>? Yes No
Ie >>> Log Sel 2
t Sel1 tle >>> Output 6 Change set Cold Load PU Bloc Ie> ?
150 ms tl < No Reserved tle > ? Yes No
tl2 > θ Reset
Therm Alarm Trip Circ Cold Load PU
Therm Trip Start_tBF tle>> ? Yes
CB Alarm
52 Fail
Cold Load PU
Brkn Cond
CB Fail tle >>> ? Yes
CB Close
tAux 1 Cold Load PU
tAux 2 tl2> ? Yes
Active Group
MiCOM P124 D Cold Load PU
tTherm ? Yes
without autoreclose Cold Load PU

Level 120 %
Menu content Cold Load PU

tCL 2s
From V4.A software

Menu content
Technical Guide
MiCOM P124
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
AUTOMAT. CTRL RECORDS

Menu content
MiCOM P124
Technical Guide
CB Supervision CB Monitoring Fault Record Disturb Record Time Peak Value
TC Supervision ? CB Opening Time Record Number Pre-Time Time Window

Yes 83 ms 4 1.3 s 5 mn
t trip circuit CB Closing Time Fault Time Post-Time

t SUP 3s 100 ms 12:05:23:42 0.2 s
CB Open S’vision CB Operations Fault Date Disturb Rec Trig

Yes RST = [C] 0 06/08/01 ON INST.
CB Open Time ∑Amps (n) Active Set Group

150 ms RST = [C] 2
CB Close S’vision ∑Amps (n) IA Faulted Phase

Yes 5 E6 Phase A
CB Close Time ∑Amps (n) IB Threshold

150 ms 5 E6 I>>
CB Open Alarm ? Magnitude

∑Amps (n) IC
Yes 5 E6 1200 A
MiCOM P124 D
CB Open NB IA Magnitude
1500 1200 A
Without autoreclose
∑Amps (n) ? IB Magnitude
Yes 500 A
Menu content
∑Amps (n) IC Magnitude
3 E6 480 A
From V4.A software
n IN Magnitude
2 103 A
tOpen Pulse 300ms
tClose Pulse 500 ms

Page 11/12
CHAPTER 4-2
P124/EN T42/B44
BLANK PAGE
MiCOM P124
CHAPTER 5
Technical Data & Curves
Characteristics
Technical data and CHAPTER 5
curves characteristics
CONTENT
1. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 3
1.1 Minimum Level of current 3
1.2 Phase overcurrent protection 3
1.3 Neutral/Ground/Earth Overcurrent Protection 4
1.4 Thermal overload protection 6
1.5 Undercurrent protection (P124 dual-powered only) 6
1.6 Negative sequence overcurrent protection (P124 dual-powered only) 6
2. AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS (DUAL-POWERED ONLY) 7

2.1 Cold load pickup 7
2.2 Auxiliary timers 7
2.3 Multishot autorecloser 7
2.4 Broken conductor detection 7
2.5 Circuit breaker failure 7
2.6 Trip circuit supervision 7
2.7 Circuit breaker control and monitoring 7
2.8 Logic selectivity 7
3. RECORDING FUNCTIONS : SELF-POWERED RELAY 8
4. RECORDING FUNCTIONS : DUAL-POWERED RELAY 8

4.1 Fault recorder 8
4.2 Event recorder 8
4.3 Disturbance recorder 8
5. COMMUNICATION 9
5.1 Front communication 9
5.2 Rear communication (dual-powered only) 9
6. INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 9

6.1 AC Inputs 9
6.3 Logic Output 9
6.3.1 Special trip output : Relay RL1 9
6.3.2 Other logic outputs (dual-powered version only) RL2 to RL6 10
6.4 Logic Input (dual-powered version only) 10
6.5 Power supply (dual-powered version only) 10
CHAPTER 5 Technical data &
7. ACCURACY 11
8. CT DATA 11
9. HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND 11
10. ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT 11
11. ENVIRONMENT 11
12. CURVES 12
12.1 IDMT Curves 12
12.1.1 Mathematical formula 12
12.1.1.1 IDMT thresholds 12
12.1.1.2 Reset timer 13
12.1.2 IEC CURVES. 16
12.1.3 RI curves. 22
12.1.4 IEEE/ANSI Curves. 23
12.1.5 Rectifier protection curve 29
12.1.6 LABORELEC CURVE 30
12.2 Thermal overload curves 31
12.2.1 Mathematical formula 31
12.2.2 Tripping curve 32
1. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
1.1 Minimum Level of current
Starting current sensitivity to self-power the MiCOM P124 relay on at least one phase:
0.2 In
1.2 Phase overcurrent protection
− Current Fundamental only
− Phase Current Range 0.1 to 40 x rated current, step of 0.01 In
Thresholds 3 independent (I>, I>>, I>>>)
I> 0.1 to 4 In (see note)
I>> 0.5 to 40 In
I>>> 0.5 to 40 In
NOTE : When I> is associated to an IDMT curve the maximum setting
recommanded should be 2 In.
− Hysteresis 95 %
− Instantaneous time
− From zero current < 60 ms
− From a 0.2 In current < 30 ms
− Drop out time 30 ms
− Phase time delays (tI>, tI>>, tI>>>)
DMT 0 ms to 180 s, step of 10 ms
IDMT curves IEC: Short time inverse (Schneider Electric),
Standard Inverse (IEC), Very inverse (IEC),
Extremely inverse (IEC),
Long time inverse (Schneider Electric).
RI : (Electromechanical type).
IEEE/ANSI : Short time inverse (CO2),
Moderately inverse (ANSI),
Inverse (CO8),
Very inverse (ANSI), Extremely inverse (ANSI).
RC : Rectifier curve
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) 0.025 to 1.5, step of 0.025
− Reset time
MiCOM P124 self-powered
− For DMT phase time delay: Fixed: 0 ms
− For IDMT Phase time delay : Fixed: 50 ms
MiCOM P124 dual-powered
− For DMT phase time delay : Fixed : 0 ms
− For IEEE/ANSI phase time delay : Short time inverse (CO2),
Moderately Inverse (ANSI),
Inverse (CO8),
Very inverse (ANSI),
Extremely Inverse (ANSI).
Reset Time Multiplier Setting (RTMS) 0.025 to 3.2, step of 0.025
or DMT 0.04 to 100s, step of 0.01 s
For IEC and RI characteristics: 0.04 to 100s, step of 0.01 s
1.3 Neutral/Ground/Earth Overcurrent Protection
− Earth current Ranges 0.002 to 1 x rated current, step of 0.005 Ien
0.01 to 8 x rated current, step of 0.005 Ien
0.1 to 40 x rated current, step of 0.005 Ien
Thresholds 3 independent (Ie>, Ie>>, Ie>>>)
Range 0.002 to 1 x Ien
Ie> 0.002 to 1 Ien (see note)
Ie>> 0.002 to 1 Ien
Ie>>> 0.002 to 1 Ien
Ie>> 0.01 to 8 Ien
Ie>>> 0.01 to 8 Ien
Ie>> 0.5 to 40 Ien
Ie>>> 0.5 to 40 Ien
NOTE : When Ie> is associated to an IDMT curve the maximum setting
recommanded should be :
For the range 0.002 to 1 Ien : 0.05 Ien
For the range 0.01 to 8 Ien : 0.4 Ien
For the range 0.1 to 40 Ien : 2 Ien
− Hysteresis 95 %
− Instantaneous time
− From zero current < 60 ms
− From a 0,2 In current < 30 ms
− Drop out time 30 ms
− Earth time delays (tIe>, tIe>>, tIe>>>)
IDMT Curves IEC : Short time inverse (Schneider Electric),
Standard Inverse (CEI), Very Inverse (CEI),
Extremely Inverse (CEI),
Inverse (CO8),
Very Inverse (ANSI),
RC : Rectifier curve.
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) 0.025 to 1.5, step of 0.025.
LABORELEC curve 3 types : 1, 2 or 3 used with 0.01 to 8
Ien range only.
− Reset time
MiCOM P124 self-powered
− For IDMT Phase time delay : Fixed: 50 ms
MiCOM P124 dual-powered
− For IEEE/ANSI Earth time delay Short time inverse (CO2),
Inverse (CO8),
Very inverse (ANSI),
or DMT: 0.04 to 100s, step of 0.01s
1.4 Thermal overload protection
Current RMS
Current threshold I θ > 0.2 to 3.2 x rated current, step of 0.01
Thermal state (alarm and trip) 50 to 200 % x 2 , step of 1 %
Constant Time Te 1 to 200 min, step of 1 min
k factor 1 to 1.5, step of 0.01
1.5 Undercurrent protection (P124 dual-powered only)
Current Fundamental only
Phase Current Range I< 2 to 100% x rated current, step of 1%
Time delay t<I 0 to 180 s, step of 0.01 s
Hysteresis 105 %
1.6 Negative sequence overcurrent protection (P124 dual-powered only)
− Phase Current Range I2> 0.1 to 40 x rated current
NOTE : when I2> is associated to an IDMT curve the maximum setting
recommended should be 2 In.
− Hysteresis 95 %
− I2> Time delay
IDMT curves IEC : Short time inverse (Schneider Electric),
Standard Inverse (CEI), Very Inverse (CEI),
Extremely Inverse (CEI),
Inverse (CO8),
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) 0.025 to 1.5, step of 0.025
− Hysteresis 95 %
− Reset time
− For TD phase time delay: Fixed: 0 ms
− For IEEE/ANSI I2> Time delay : Short time inverse (CO2),
Inverse (CO8),
or DMT 0.04 to 100s, step of 0.01s
2. AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS (DUAL-POWERED ONLY)
2.1 Cold load pickup
Range 20 to 500 % x nominal settings, step of 1%
Time delay tCL 0,1s to 3600s, step of 100 ms
2.2 Auxiliary timers
2 independent associated to the logic inputs Aux1 and Aux2
tAux1 & tAux2 Range 0 ms to 200 s, step of 10 ms
2.3 Multishot autorecloser
Main shots 4 independent shots phase and/or earth
Dead times Cycles 1 & 2 0.01 to 300s ; step of 10ms
Cycles 3 & 4 0.01 to 600s ; step of 10ms
Reclaim time 20ms to 600s; step of 10ms
Inhibition time 20ms to 600s; step of 10ms
2.4 Broken conductor detection
Principle used I2/I1
Broken conductor threshold 20 to 100 % ; step of 1%
Time delay tBC 1 to 14400s ; step of 1s
2.5 Circuit breaker failure
CB failure time tBF 30ms to 10s ; step of 10ms
Phase current range I< 2 % to 100 % x rated current, step of 1 %
Accuracy from 0.02 In to 0.1 In : 0.006 In
from 0.1 In to 1 In : 2 % x nominal setting
Hysteresis maximum 0.008 In or 0.95 x nominal setting
2.6 Trip circuit supervision
Trip circuit supervision time t SUP 100ms to 10s, step of 50ms
2.7 Circuit breaker control and monitoring
− Circuit breaker opening time (t Open Pulse) 50ms to 1s ; step of 10ms
− Circuit breaker closing time (t Close Pulse) 50ms to 1s ; step of 10ms
− Circuit breaker opening alarm threshold 0 to 50000 operations
− Amps or square amps alarm threshold 0 to 4.10 9 ; step of 10 6
− Circuit breaker tripping time alarm threshold 100ms to 5s ; step of 100ms
− Circuit breaker closing time alarm threshold 100ms to 5s ; step of 100ms
2.8 Logic selectivity
2 Independant timers : tAux 1 & tAux 2
− Range 0ms to 150s ; step of 10ms
3. RECORDING FUNCTIONS : SELF-POWERED RELAY
Fault recorder
Capacity 5 faults
Triggers Any selected protection alarm and threshold
Data Protection thresholds
AC inputs measurements (RMS)
Fault magnitudes
4. RECORDING FUNCTIONS : DUAL-POWERED RELAY

4.1 Fault recorder
Capacity 5 faults
Time-tag to 1 millisecond
Data Fault date
Protection thresholds
Setting Group
AC inputs measurements (RMS)
Fault magnitudes
4.2 Event recorder
Capacity 75 events
Time-tag to 1 millisecond
Logic input change of state
Setting changes
4.3 Disturbance recorder
Capacity 5 records of 3 s each
Sampling rate 32 samples per frequency cycle
Settings Pre-time 100 ms to 3 s, step of 100 ms
Post-time 100 ms to 3 s, step of 100 ms
Logic input
Remote command
Data 4 AC input channels
Digital input and output states
Frequency value.
5. COMMUNICATION
5.1 Front communication
RS 232 port front port, screened twisted wire pair
Protocols MODBUSTM RTU
Connectors Sub-D 9 pin female connector
5.2 Rear communication (dual-powered only)
RS 485 port rear port, screened twisted wire pair
Connectors screws or snap-on
Protocols MODBUSTM RTU
Courier
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3
Data rate 300 to 38 400 bauds (programmable)
6. INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

6.1 AC Inputs
Phase and earth current inputs 1 and 5 Amps (choice on ordering code)
Frequency Range 45 to 65 Hz
Nominal 50/60 Hz
Current inputs burden In=1A or In=5A
Phase : < 2.5 VA
Earth : < 2.5 VA
Thermal withstand 1s @ 100 x rated current
2s @ 40 x rated current
continuous @ 3 x rated current
6.2 Striker output
For an initial minimum voltage of 12V, the minimum energy delivered is 20mJ.
For a 100Ω resistive load, the residual voltage after 15ms is higher than 6V.
6.3 Logic Output
6.3.1 Special trip output : Relay RL1
Logic output type dry contact Ag Cdo
Current Make 30 Amps and carry for 3 s
Carry 8 Amps continuous
Break dc:
100 W resistive, 50 W inductive (L/R 40 ms)
with a maximum of 5A or 300V.
ac:
1250 VA with a maximum of 5A or
300V (power factor = 0.5)
Logic output operation time < 7 ms
Logic output mechanical durability > 100 000 operations
6.3.2 Other logic outputs (dual-powered version only) RL2 to RL6
Logic output type dry contact Ag Cdo
Current Make 30 Amps and carry for 3 s
Carry 5 Amps continuous
Break 135 Vdc, 0.3 A (L/R = 30 ms)
250 Vdc : 50W resistive ou 25W inductive
(L/R = 40 ms)
220 Vac, 5 Amps (cos ϕ = 0.6)
Logic output operation time < 7 ms
Logic output mechanical durability > 100 000 operations
6.4 Logic Input (dual-powered version only)
Logic input type independent optical isolated
Logic input burden 10 mAmps per input
Logic input recognition time < 2 ms
Supply :
Logic input operation
Cortec Relay auxiliary Auxiliary voltage Minimum Minimum
Code voltage range range for the polarisation current level
logic inputs voltage level (Volt)
A 24 – 60 Vdc 24 – 60 Vdc (*) 15 Vdc 3.35 mA
F 48 – 150 Vdc 48 – 150 Vdc (*) 25 Vdc 3.35 mA
M 130 – 250 Vdc 130 – 250 Vdc (*) 38 Vdc 2.20 mA
100 – 250 Vac 48 – 250 Vac (*) 38 Vdc 1.90 mA
H 125 - 250 Vdc 105 – 145 Vdc 96 Vdc 1.80 mA
100 – 250 Vac
V 48 – 150 Vdc 110 Vdc 77 Vdc 7.4 mA at
110 – 250 Vac (-30%/+20%) 110 Vdc
W 125 – 250 Vdc 220 Vdc 154 Vdc 3.8 mA at
110 – 250 Vac (-30%/+20%) 220 Vdc
(*) The tolerance on the auxiliary voltage variations for the logic inputs is +20% in dc
voltage and –20%, +10% in ac voltage.
6.5 Power supply (dual-powered version only)
Auxiliary voltage Vaux, 3 ranges 24-60 Vdc
48-150 Vdc
130-250 Vdc / 100-250 Vac, 50/60 Hz
Power supply variations dc ± 20 %
ac – 20 %, + 10 %
Ripple 12 %.
Power off withstand 50 ms
Burden dc 3 W standby + 0.25 W per energised relay
ac 6 VA standby + 0.4 VA per energised relay
7. ACCURACY
Protection thresholds ±2 %
Time delay ± 2 % with a minimum of 10 ms
Measurements typical ± 0.2 % at In
Measurements pass band 500 Hz
8. CT DATA
MiCOM P124 relay settings
Phase CT primary 1 to 9999, step of 1
Earth CT primary 1 to 9999, step of 1
Recommendations : 5 VA 5P10 or 5 VA 10P10
Connections: refer to external connection diagrams in Appendix 1
9. HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND

Dielectric withstand IEC 60 255-5 2 kV common mode
1 kV differential mode
Impulse voltage IEC 60 255-5 5 kV common mode

1 kV differential mode
Insulation resistance IEC 60 255-5 > 1000 MΩ.
10. ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT

High frequency disturbance IEC 1000-4-1 2.5 kV common mode, class 3
1 kV differential mode, class 3
Fast transient IEC 1000-4-4 4 kV auxiliary voltage, class 4
ANSI C37.90.1 2 kV others, class 4
Electrostatic discharge IEC 1000-4-2 8 kV, class 4
Radio frequency impulse ANSI C37.90.2 35 V/m
IEC 1000-4-3 10 V/m
11. ENVIRONMENT
Temperature IEC 60255-6 Storage –25°C to +70°C
Operation –25°C to + 55°C
Humidity IEC 60068-2-3 56 days at 93% RH and 40°C
Protection de l'enveloppe IEC 60529 IP52, IK07
Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1 Response and endurance, class 2
Shocks and bumps IEC 60255-21-11 Response and withstand, class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1.
12. CURVES
12.1 IDMT Curves
12.1.1 Mathematical formula
12.1.1.1 IDMT thresholds

The first phases (earth) overcurrent threshold can be selected with a dependent time
characteristic. The time delay is calculated with a mathematical formula.
In all, there are 13 inverse time characteristics available (11 for self-powered relay).
The mathematical formula applicable to the first 11 (first 10 for self-powered relay)
curves is :
⎛ K ⎞
t = T×⎜ + L⎟
⎜ (i / Is ) − 1 ⎟
α
⎝ ⎠
Where:
t = Tripping time
K = Coefficient (see table)
I = Value of measured current
IS = Value of the programmed threshold (Pick-up value)
α = Coefficient (see table)
L = ANSI/IEEE coefficient (zero for IEC curves)
T = Time multiplier between 0.025 and 1.5
Type of curve Standard K factor α factor L factor

Short Time Inverse Schneider 0.05 0.04 0
Electric
Standard inverse IEC 0.14 0.02 0
Very inverse IEC 13.5 1 0
Extremely inverse IEC 80 2 0
Long time inverse Schneider 120 1 0
Electric
Short Time Inverse C02 0.002394 0.02 0.01694
Moderately Inverse ANSI/IEEE 0.0515 0.02 0.114
Long Time Inverse C08 5.95 2 0.18
Very Inverse ANSI/IEEE 19.61 2 0.491
Extremely Inverse ANSI/IEEE 28.2 2 0.1215.
Rectifier curve* 45900 5.6 0
* P124 Dual-powered only
The RI curve (electromechanical) is given by the following formula:
⎛ 1 ⎞
t = K × ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ 0.339 − 0.236 / (I / Is ) ⎠
With K adjustable from 0.10 to 10 in steps of 0.05
This equation is valid for 1.1<= (I/IS)<= 20
Although the curves tend towards infinite when the current approaches Is, the
minimum guaranteed value of the operating current for all the curves with the inverse
time characteristic is 1.1Is (with a tolerance of ± 0,05Is), except rectifier Protection
curve for which the minimum value is 1.6 Is ±0.05 Is.
LABORELEC CURVES (P124 Dual-powered only):
The first and second earth threshold can be selected with dedicated Laborelec curves.
There are 3 curves available with the following formula :
t = aI + b
where : t = tripping time

a and b = coefficient (see table)
I = Primary residual current (between 1 and 40A)
Type of curve a b
LABORELEC 1 – 0.0897 4.0897
LABORELEC 2 – 0.0897 4.5897
LABORELEC 3 – 0.0897 5.0897
In order to be compliant with the Laborelec specifications the relay must be used
with :
− An earth current range 0.01 Ion to 8 Ion
− A rated current wiring 1A
− A core balanced CT with a ratio 20/1.
For a complete operating of the curve, the relay MiCOM P124 must be set to 0.05Ion
(secondary residual current).
12.1.1.2 Reset timer

The first phase overcurrent threshold [I>/tI>] ([Ie>/tIe>] for the earth) has a reset
time. The fixed period for this determines the minimum time during the current need
to remain lower than 95% of the phase (earth) threshold before the time delay
associated with the phase (earth) overcurrent threshold resets.
NOTE : There is an exception to this rule when the protection triggers. In
fact, in this situation, the time delays tI>/tIe> are immediately
reinitialised.
The value of the Reset Timer depends on the type of the timer associated to the pick-
up first phase (Earth) threshold.
Type of timer associated to the first &

Reset Timer
second phase (earth) threshold
DMT 0 ms
LABORELEC *, Rectifier, IDMT IEC or RI Settable from 40 ms to 100s
Settable from 40 ms to 100s
or
IDMT IEEE or CO
Inverse Time
(Choice of 5 IEEE curves)
* earth threshold only
Reset timer settable:
The first phase and earth overcurrent stages in the P124 relays are provided with a
timer hold facility "t Reset", which may be set to a definite time value or to an inverse
time characteristic (IEEE/ANSI curves only). This may be useful in certain applications,
for example when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays which
have inherent reset time delays.
Another possible situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault
clearance times is where intermittent faults occur. An example of this may occur in a
plastic insulated cable . In this application it is possible that the fault energy melts and
reseals the cable insulation, thereby extinguishing the fault. This process repeats to
give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing
intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent.
When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is minimum the relay will be repeatedly
reset and not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the Timer
Hold facility the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault
clearance time.
The reset timer "t Reset" facility for the MiCOM P124 can be found in the following
menu :
− If the first phase (earth) threshold is selected with an IDMT IEC, Rectifier,
Laborelec or RI curve, the reset timer "t Reset" with DMT characteristic is settable
in the menu :
− Protection /[50/51] Phase OC/t Reset for the phase
− Protection /[50N/51N] E/Gnd/t Reset for the earth.
− If the first phase (earth) threshold is selected with an IDMT IEEE or CO curve,
the reset timer "t Reset" with a DMTor IDMT characteristic is settable in the
menu :
− Protection /[50/51] Phase OC/Type Tempo Reset for the phase
− Protection /[50N/51N] E/Gnd/Type Tempo Reset for the earth.
Reset Time "t Reset" with an IDMT characteristic :
The mathematical formula applicable to the five curves is :
⎛ K ⎞
t = T × ⎜⎜ ⎟
⎝ 1 − (I Is ) ⎠
α ⎟
Where :
t = Reset time
K = Coefficient (see table)
I = Value of the measured current
IS = Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value)
α = Coefficient (see table)
T = Reset Time Multiplier (Rtms) between 0.025 and 3.2
Type of curves Standard K factor α factor

Short time inverse C02 0.323 2
Moderately Inverse ANSI/IEEE 4.85 2
Long time Inverse C08 5.95 2
Very inverse ANSI/IEEE 21.6 2
Extremely inverse ANSI/IEEE 29.1 2
12.1.2 IEC CURVES.
IEC & Schneider Electric Curves

(TMS=0,025)
10
1
TIME IN SECONDS
0,1
0,01
0,001
1 10 100
MULTIPLES OF PICK UP SETTING
Short time inverse (Schneider Electric)

Standard Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Long Time Inverse (Schneider Electric)
Short Time Inverse (Schneider Electric)

10
A
B
C
TIME IN SECONDS
0,1
D
0,01 E
0,001
1 10 100
E : TMS=0.025 D : TMS=0.2 C : TMS=0.5 B : TMS=1 A : TMS=1.25

STANDARD INVERSE (IEC)
TIME IN SECONDS

VERY INVERSE (IEC)
TIME IN SECONDS

EXTREMEMELY INVERSE (IEC)
TIME IN SECONDS

LONG TIME INVERSE (Schneider Electric)
10000
1000
100
TIME IN SECONDS
A
B
D
1
E
0,1
1 10 100
E : TMS=0.025 D : TMS=0.2 C : TMS=0.5 B : TMS=1 A : TMS=1.25

12.1.3 RI curves.
TIME IN SECONDS RI CURVES

12.1.4 IEEE/ANSI Curves.
ANSI/IEEE & CO curves

(TMS/RTMS = 0.025)
TIME IN SECONDS
Short Time Inverse (CO2) Moderately Inverse

Long Time Inverse (CO8) Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
SHORT TIME INVERSE (CO2)
TIME IN SECONDS

MODERATELY INVERSE (ANSI/IEEE)
TIME IN SECONDS

LONG TIME INVERSE (CO8)
TIME IN SECONDS

VERY INVERSE (ANSI/IEEE)
time in seconds

EXTREMELY INVERSE (ANSI/IEEE)
TIME IN SECONDS

12.1.5 Rectifier protection curve
TRIPPING CURVE FUNCTION OF THE PREFAULT LOAD

(k=1.1 & T e=10mn)
TIME IN SECONDS
MULTIPLES OF THERMAL THRESHOLD SETTING I q >
A : no prefault load, thermal state = 0%

B : Thermal state = 30%
C : Thermal state = 50%
D : Thermal state = 70%
E : Thermal state = 90%
12.1.6 LABORELEC CURVE
50
1.5
1.0
0.5
40
Primary zero sequence current (A)
30
20
3
10
5
1
5
Time (sec)
12.2 Thermal overload curves
12.2.1 Mathematical formula
The thermal time characteristic is given by:
exp(-t/τ) = (I2 - (k.IFLC)2 ) / (I2 - IP2)
Where:
t = Time to trip, following application of the overload current, I;
τ = Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant;
I = Largest phase current (RMS value);
IFLC = Full load current rating (relay setting 'Thermal Trip');
k = 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 IFLC.
IP = Steady state pre-loading before application of the overload.
The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the
overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from "hot" or "cold".
Mathematical formula applicable to the MiCOM Relays :

The calculation of the Time to Trip is given by :
⎛ K ² − θ² ⎞
Ttrip = Te In⎜⎜ ⎟
⎟
⎝ K ² − θtrip² ⎠
With :
Ttrip = Time to trip (in seconds)
Te = Thermal time constant of the protected element (in seconds)
K = Thermal overload equal to Ieq/k Iθ>
Ieq = Equivalent current corresponding to the RMS value of the largest phase
current.
Iθ> = Full load current rating given by the national standard or by the
supplier.
k = Factor associated to the thermal state formula.
θ2 = Initial thermal state. If the initial thermal state = 30% then θ2 = 0.3
θtrip2 = Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then θ trip2 = 1
The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula :
θι+1 =(Ieq/ k Iθ>)2 [1- exp(-t/Te)] + θι exp(-t/Te)
θ being calculated every 100ms.
Typical alarm setting : 70 % of t he thermal capacity of the protected element.
12.2.2 Tripping curve
MiCOM P124
CHAPTER 6
Applications Guide
Applications Guide CHAPTER 6
CONTENT
1. INTRODUCTION 3
2. RECAP OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMER CHARACTERISTICS 4

2.1 Characterisation of a current transformer 4
2.2 Equivalent diagram of a current transformer 5
2.2.1 How to calculate the rated output burden in VA of a CT from its characteristic
magnitudes (Vk , Rct ) 6
2.2.2 Definition equivalence for common CT 6
2.2.3 How to calculate the knee-point voltage Vk of a CT defined in class P 6
3. REQUIREMENTS FOR CTS TO OPERATE WITH A MiCOM P124 7

3.1 Consumption of MiCOM P124 relays 7
3.1.1 MiCOM P124, rated current 1A 8
3.1.2 MiCOM P124, rated current 5A 9
3.2 Is the MiCOM P124 adapted to a given current transformer? 10
3.2.1 P124 connected to a type AEG IED 24 with a ratio of 1/197 10
3.2.2 P124 CT connected to a type AEG IED 24 with a ratio of 1/150 11
3.3 Recommendations for selecting the CT 11
4. POSSIBLE CONNECTIONS OF THE CTS AT THE P124 INPUT 12

4.1 Connection to 3 phase CTs + core balanced CT 12
4.1.1 Core balanced CT connected to the self-powered earth current input (terminals 55-
56) 12
4.1.2 Core balanced CT connected to the measurement earth current input (terminals 47-
48) 12
4.2 The earth current input is connected to the summation of the 3 phase CTs 12
4.3 Connection to 2 phases CTs + core balanced CT 12
5. DESCRIPTION AND SETTING GUIDE OF THE AUTORECLOSE

FUNCTION (P124 DUAL-POWERED) 13
5.1 Introduction 13
5.2 Description of the function 15
5.2.1 Autorecloser activation 15
5.2.2 Autoreclose menu 15
5.2.3 Logic Functions 16
5.2.3.1 Logic Inputs 16
5.2.3.2 External CB fail 16
CHAPTER 6 Applications Guide
5.2.3.3 External starting orders 16

5.2.3.4 External blocking order 16
5.2.3.5 Autoreclose Logic Outputs 17
5.2.3.6 Autoreclose in progress 17
5.2.3.7 Final trip 17
5.2.4 Autoreclose logic operating sequence 17
5.2.5 Autoreclose Inhibit Following Manual Close 18
5.2.6 Recloser lockout 18
5.2.7 Setting group change lockout 18
5.3 Setting Guidelines 18
5.3.1 Number Of Shots 18
5.3.2 Dead Timer Setting 19
5.3.2.1 Load 19
5.3.2.2 Circuit Breaker 19
5.3.2.3 Fault De-ionising Time 20
5.3.2.4 Protection Reset 20
5.3.3 Reclaim Timer Setting 20
1. INTRODUCTION
The P124 Self and Dual-Powered overcurrent relays in the MICOM range have
been designed to test, protect and monitor both industrial installations and public
power distribution networks and substations, without having to resort to an external
auxiliary power supply. They can also be used as backup for HV protections of power
transmission networks.
These two non-directional overcurrent protection models offer functions of protection
and automation that are common with the MiCOM P122 and P123 models. For
instance, for applications of MiCOM relays concerning these functions, the user
should refer to document P124/EN T05/A44.
The protection relays self-powered by the fault current offer the specific feature of
non-conventional current inputs. Accordingly, special attention will be given to the
choice of the current transformers supplying these relays.
The following chapters describe our recommendations for choosing the current
transformers associated to the MiCOM P124 relays.
The MiCOM P124 protection relays combined with the wiring represent a load for the
current transformers. Consequently, the dimensions of the current transformers must
be correctly calculated in order to comply with:
• the electrical installation diagram,
• the electrical data such as the nominal current, short-circuit current, …,
2. RECAP OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMER CHARACTERISTICS

2.1 Characterisation of a current transformer
A CT for protection relays is characterised on the basis of:
• Its rated output burden expressed in VA, its relevant accuracy class (5P or 10P)
and the accuracy limit current (5In, 10In, 15In, 20In). The accuracy limit
factor (K) being the ratio between the precision limit current and the nominal
current rating.
• Naturally, the transformation ratio of the CT is to be added to this. This ratio is
the ratio of the primary current to the secondary current I1/I2. The secondary
current rating is generally 1 A or 5 A.
• Other characteristics such as the insulating voltage or the thermal behaviour are
also taken into account.
Standard BS 3938 proposes a specification identical to that of IEC 185 for the class P
transformers. The CT is characterised in accordance with a second class known as the
X class (Cx) which, in addition to the calculation ratio, requires a knee-point voltage
Vk and an internal resistance Rct .
The following magnitudes are associated to the magnetization curve of a CT:

• The knee-point voltage Vk, which is determined by the point of the curve
V=f (Im ) beyond which an increase of 10% in the voltage V results in an increase
of 50% in the magnetizing current.
• The voltage related to the precision limit of the CT.
⇒ For a 5PK CT (accuracy class 5P, accuracy limit factor K):
At the saturation voltage Vs1 we will have an accuracy of 5% on the current
K * In.
⇒ For a 10PK TC (accuracy class 10P, accuracy limit factor K):
At the saturation voltage Vs2 we will have an accuracy of 10% on the current K*In
Knee point
voltage
FIGURE 1: DEFINITION OF KNEE-POINT OF MAGNETIZATION CURVE.

With the materials generally used to manufacture current transformers, we have:

Vk corresponds to 1.4 tesla
Vs1 corresponds to 1.6 tesla
Vs2 correspond à 1.9 tesla
2.2 Equivalent diagram of a current transformer

The equivalent diagram of a CT is indicated below:
• CT ratio: n2/n1
• Lm : magnetization self-induction coil of CT
• Im : magnetizing current
• I1 : primary current
• I2 : secondary current = I1 * n2 /n1
→ → →
• Is : secondary current passing through the load Rp. : Is= I2 – Im
• Rct : secondary winding resistance of CT (ohms)
FIGURE 2: EQUIVALENT DIAGRAM OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER

The magnetizing current I m of the transformer depends on the voltage generated at
the secondary windings of the transformer.
It is this current that introduces an error signal into the measurement. If the CT was
perfect, the magnetizing current would be zero.
2.2.1 How to calculate the rated output burden in VA of a CT from its characteristic
magnitudes (Vk , Rct )
The saturation voltage is derived by the following formula: Vs = (Rct + Rp ) Is
The nominal load rating of the CT being Rp = Pn /I n2
We have Vs = (Rct + Pn /In2 ) Is
whence Pn = (Vs /Is - Rct )In2
• For transformer with in a 5P accuracy class: Vs1 / Vk = 1.6/1.4
Thus: Vs1 = 1.6/1.4 * Vk, at Is1 equals K * In
whence Pn = [(1.6/1.4 * Vk )/K* In - Rct ] *In2
• For transformer with a 10P accuracy class: Vs2 / Vk = 1.9/1.4
thus Vs2 = 1.9/1.4 * Vk, at Is2 equals K * In
whence Pn = [(1.9/1.4 * Vk )/K* In - Rct ] *In2
2.2.2 Definition equivalence for common CT

Knowing that the only constants of a CT are its magnetization curve, its resistance Rct
and its transformation ratio , it is possible change from a transformer with a power
Pn1 in VA of the 5PK1 type to a transformer with a power of Pn2 in VA of the 5PK2
type.
Given known values of Vs1 and Rct:
Vs1 = (Rct +Pn1 /In2 )*K1 * In = (Rct + Pn2 /In2 )*K2 *In
Pi = Rct * In2 (ohmic loss of CT)
(Pi +Pn1) * K1 = (Pi + Pn2 ) * K2
whence K2 = [(Rct * In2 + Pn1 )/ (Rct * In2 + Pn2 )] * K1
2.2.3 How to calculate the knee-point voltage Vk of a CT defined in class P

• For a transformer with accuracy class of 5P : Vs1 / Vk = 1.6/1.4
Pn = [(1.6/1.4 * Vk )/K* In - Rct ] *In2
whence Vk = 1.4/1.6 (Pn / In 2 + Rct) K * In
• For a transformer with a precision class 10P : V s2 / V k = 1.9/1.4
Pn = [(1.9/1.4 * Vk )/K* In - Rct ] *In2
whence Vk = 1.4/1.9 (Pn / In 2 + Rct) K * In.

3. REQUIREMENTS FOR CTS TO OPERATE WITH A MiCOM P124

For the conventional case of a resistive load, the voltage at the secondary winding of
the transformer is proportional to the primary current, so the error remains constant.
In the case of a MiCOM P124 type self-powered protection relay, this no longer
applies, since the voltage at the input of the protection circuit is in a non-proportional
ratio to the input current.
The best solution to check whether the MiCOM P124 relay is adapted to a given CT is
to have available the magnetization curve and the internal resistance of the CT in
question.
To guarantee good precision at low currents, the magnetizing current of the CT must
be low. In other words, the input voltage of the relay must be sufficiently low
compared with the knee-point voltage Vk of the CT.
The following paragraphs show the ac burden of the P124 MiCOM relay and,
knowing the magnetisation curve of a CT, one can then determine the precision of
the system as a whole, for the entire current range: PROTECTION P124 + associated
CT.
3.1 Consumption of MiCOM P124 relays
The MiCOM P124 self and dual-powered models (with identical ac burden at their
current inputs) have a minimum self-supply starting current of 0.2 In. This minimum
level of current is needed on at least one phase to enable the MiCOM relay to be
correctly self-powered to ensure the full capability of its protection functions:
CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING ARE THE THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS
• 3 In continuous rating
• 40 In during 100 s
• 100 In during 1 s
3.1.1 MiCOM P124, rated current 1A

The figure below indicates the voltage (average value of signal for 10 ms) on each
phase or on earth current input (across terminals 55 and 56), depending on the
current injected.
60.00
50.00
40.00
Current In (A)
30.00
P124 version In=1A
20.00
10.00
In
0.00
5
0
15
10
Average voltage (V)
FIGURE 3: CURRENT INPUT BURDEN, RATED CURRENT 1A

3.1.2 MiCOM P124, rated current 5A

The figure below indicates the voltage (average value of signal for 10 ms) on each
phase or on earth current input (across terminals 55 and 56), depending on the
current injected.
60.00
50.00
40.00
Current In (A)
30.00
P124 version In=5A
20.00
10.00
In
0.00
2
Average voltage (V)
FIGURE 4: CURRENT INPUT BURDEN, RATED CURRENT 5A

3.2 Is the MiCOM P124 adapted to a given current transformer?

The purpose of this chapter is to show the adequacy of the MiCOM P124 relay to a
given CT.
We propose to take as an example the AEG IED 24 reference multi-secondary
windings CT.
3.2.1 P124 connected to a type AEG IED 24 with a ratio of 1/197
The characteristics indicated by the maker of the CT are as follows:
Rated current In = 1A, Class X (Cx), Vk>38.0 V, Rct <0.443 ohms
Given the burden of a phase input for a given current (see paragraphs 3.1.1 and
3.1.2). The charts of the maker of the CT indicate the magnetizing current in terms of
the voltage and we can then calculate the error caused by the magnetizing current for
the following three currents:
MiCOM P124, rated current In = 1A
Current 0.2 In (starting current) In 40 In

Voltage 4.3 V 2.66 V 11.8 V
Magnetizing 0,006 A 0.006 A 0.01 A
current
Error 3% 0.6 % 0.025 %
The errors calculated reveal a maximum error of 3 % at minimum current, with this
error inversely proportional to the current.
Referring to chapter 2.2.1, we can derive the corresponding rated output burden in
the P class of this transformer expressed in terms of Vk and R ct. as follows:
• The corresponding rated output burden of this CT in class 5 is:
Pn = [(1.6/1.4 * Vk )/10* In - Rct ] *In2
with In = 1 A and an accuracy limit factor of 10
Pn = 3.89 VA 5P10
Pn = [(1.9/1.4 * Vk )/10* In - Rct ] *In2
with In = 1 A and an accuracy limit factor of 10.
Pn = 4.71 VA 10P10
Test were conducted on the MiCOM P124 with this CT and confirmed the satisfactory
operation of the combination CT + P124.
NOTE: in this example, the relay was connected along side the CT; in
this way, the influence of the wiring was negligible.
3.2.2 P124 CT connected to a type AEG IED 24 with a ratio of 1/150

The characteristics indicated by the maker of the CT are:
Rated current In = 1A, Class X (Cx), Vk>28.6 V, Rct <0.393 ohms
Given the burden of a phase input for a given current (see paragraphs 3.1.1 and
3.1.2). Since the charts of the maker of the CT indicate a magnetizing current against
voltage, we can calculate the error caused by the magnetizing current for the
following three currents :
MiCOM P124, rated current In = 1A
Current 0.2 In (starting In 40 In

current)
Voltage 4.3 V 2.66 V 11.8 V
Magnetising current 0.01 A 0.01 A 0.017 A
Error 5% 1% 0.042 %
The errors calculated reveal a maximum error of 5 % at minimum current, with this
error inversely proportional to the current.
Referring to chapter 2.2.1, we can derive a corresponding rated output burden in
class P of this transformer expressed in terms of Vk and R ct as folles :
Pn = [(1.6/1.4 * Vk )/10* In - Rct ] *In2
with In = 1 A and an accuracy limit factor of 10
Pn = 2.87 VA 5P10
Pn = [(1.9/1.4 * Vk )/10* In - Rct ] *In2
with In = 1 A and an accuracy limit factor of 10.
Pn = 3.48 VA 10P10
Tests were conducted on the MiCOM P124 with this CT and confirmed the
satisfactory operation of the combination CT + P124.
NOTE: in this example, the relay was connected alongside the CT, so
the influence of the wiring was negligible.
3.3 Recommendations for selecting the CT
Assuming that the CT does not supply any circuits other than the MiCOM P124, in
practice, we can recommend CTs of the following types:
5VA 5P10 or 5VA 10P10
secondary 1A or 5A.
4. POSSIBLE CONNECTIONS OF THE CTS AT THE P124 INPUT

For the diagrams, consult those indicated in appendix 1 of the technical guide.
4.1 Connection to 3 phase CTs + core balanced CT
4.1.1 Core balanced CT connected to the self-powered earth current input (terminals 55-
56)
Advantage:
This connection is advantageous when the transformation ratio of the core CT is less
than that of the phase CTs (greater sensitivity demand on the earth range). This
enables the fault at the earth current input of the protection to be perceived even if
this fault is not of sufficient level (0.2 In) to supply the protection via the phase
currents, in which case the fault could self-power the protection through the earth
current input.
Disadvantage:
The core CT must be appropriately dimensioned, that is it must have few turns, to
ensure good sensitivity whilst nonetheless being capable of providing the burden in
VA needed for the protection.
4.1.2 Core balanced CT connected to the measurement earth current input (terminals 47-
48)
Advantage:
In this case, there is no need for the core CT to supply the MiCOM P124 through the
earth current input, so the core has no need to be overdimensioned in terms of
power.
Disadvantage:
No self-supply of the MiCOM P124 by the earth current input and hence the need for
a minimum current at the phases (0.2 In).
4.2 The earth current input is connected to the summation of the 3 phase CTs
Advantage:
In this case, the earth current is detected by summing the 3 phase CTs, so there is no
need to use a core CT. The summing operation is conducted at terminals 47-48 of
the earth current input, so there is no need for the CTs to supply the relay via the
earth current input.
Disadvantage:
Less accuracy than core CT connection.
4.3 Connection to 2 phases CTs + core balanced CT
Advantage:
Only 2 CTs are used, resulting in saving one phase CT. The third phase is reformed
by the wiring.
Disadvantage:
The phase and earth CTs must be suitably overdimensioned. The core CT must be
connected to the supply input of the earth current input (terminals 55-56).
We assume that the system is balanced.
5. DESCRIPTION AND SETTING GUIDE OF THE AUTORECLOSE

FUNCTION (P124 DUAL-POWERED ONLY)
5.1 Introduction
An analysis of faults on any overhead line network has shown that 80-90% are
transient in nature.
A transient fault, such as an insulator flash-over, is a self clearing ‘non-damage’
fault. This type of fault can be cleared by the immediate tripping of one or more
circuit breakers to isolate the fault, and does not recur when the line is re-energised.
Lightning is the most common cause of transient faults, other possible causes being
clashing conductors and wind blown debris. The remaining 10 - 20% of faults are
either non-permanent (arcing fault) or permanent.
A non-permanent fault could be caused by a small tree branch falling on the line.
Here the cause of the fault would not be removed by the immediate tripping of the
circuit, but could be burnt away during a time delayed trip.
Permanent faults could be broken conductors, transformer faults, cable faults or
machine faults which must be located and repaired before the supply can be
restored.
In the majority of fault incidents, if the faulty line is immediately tripped out, and time
is allowed for the fault arc to de-ionise, reclosure of the circuit breakers will result in
the line being successfully re-energised. Autoreclose schemes are employed to
automatically reclose a switching device a set time after it has been opened due to
operation of protection where transient and non-permanent faults are prevalent.
On HV/MV distribution networks, auto-reclosing is applied mainly to radial feeders
where system stability problems do not generally arise. The main advantages to be
derived from using autoreclose can be summarised as follows:
• Minimises interruptions in supply to the consumer.
• Reduces operating costs - less man hours in repairing fault damage and the
possibility of running substations unattended. With autoreclose instantaneous
protection can be used which means shorter fault duration’s which gives rise to
less fault damage and fewer permanent faults.
As 80% of overhead line faults are transient, elimination of loss of supply from such
faults, by the introduction of autoreclosing gives obvious benefits. Furthermore,
autoreclosing may allow a particular substation to operate unattended. In the case of
unattended substations, the number of visits by personnel to reclose a circuit breaker
manually after a fault can be substantially reduced, an important consideration for
substations in remote areas.
Autoreclosing gives an important benefit on circuits using time graded protection, in
that it allows the use of instantaneous protection to give a high speed first trip. With
fast tripping, the duration of the power arc resulting from an overhead line fault is
reduced to a minimum, thus lessening the chance of damage to the line, which might
otherwise cause a transient fault to develop into a permanent fault.
Using short time delay protection also prevents blowing of fuses and reduces circuit
breaker maintenance by eliminating pre-arc heating when clearing transient faults.
Figure 5 shows an example of 4 autoreclose cycles to the final trip :

td1, td2, td3, td4 = dead time 1, 2, 3 and 4 timers
tr = Reclaim type
O = CB open
C = CB closed.
FIGURE 5: TYPICAL AUTORECLOSE CYCLES

It should be noted that when short time delay protection is used with autoreclosing,
the scheme is normally arranged to block the instantaneous protection after the first
trip. Therefore, if the fault persists after reclosure, the time graded protection will give
discriminative tripping with fuses or other protection devices, resulting in the isolation
of the faulted section. However, for certain applications, where the majority of the
faults are likely to be transient, it is not uncommon to allow more than one
instantaneous trip before the instantaneous protection is blocked.
Some schemes allow a number of reclosures and time graded trips after the first
instantaneous trip, which may result in the burning out and clearance of non-
permanent faults. Such a scheme may also be used to allow fuses to operate in teed
feeders where the fault current is low.
When considering feeders which are partly overhead line and partly underground
cable, any decision to install autoreclosing would be influenced by any data known
on the frequency of transient faults. When a significant proportion of the faults are
permanent, the advantages of autoreclosing are small, particularly since reclosing on
to a faulty cable is likely to aggravate the damage.
5.2 Description of the function

5.2.1 Autorecloser activation
The autoreclose function of the MiCOM P124 Dual-powered is available only if the
following conditions are verified :
• The auxiliary contact of the CB status 52a must be connected to the relay
See AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu
• The trip output relay RL1 must not be latched to the earth and/or phase protection
function
See AUTOMAT. CTRL/Latch functions menu
CAUTION : IF THE AUXILIARY SUPPLY IS LOST DURING AN AUTORECLOSE CYCLE,
THE AUTORECLOSE FUNCTION IS TOTALLY DISABLED.
5.2.2 Autoreclose menu
The following table shows the relay settings for the autoreclose function, including the
available setting ranges. The same settings are available in the PROTECTION 2
Menu.
MENU TEXT SETTING RANGE STEP SIZE

PROTECTION G1 MIN MAX
Autoreclose ? NO YES
Ext CB Fail ? NO YES
Ext CB Fail Time 10 ms 600 s 10 ms
Ext Block ? NO YES
Dead Time tD1 10 ms 300 000 ms 10 ms
Reclaim Time tR 20 ms 600 000 ms 10 ms
Inhib Time tI 20 ms 600 000 ms 10 ms
Phase Cycles 0 4 1
E/Gnd Cycles 0 4 1
CYCLES 4321
tI> 1201
CYCLES 4321
tI>> 1211
CYCLES 4321
tI>>> 1110
CYCLES 4321
tIe> 0111
CYCLES 4321
tIe>> 1121
CYCLES 4321
tIe>>> 1111
CYCLES 4321
tAux1 1112
CYCLES 4321
tAux2 0101
Example of setting :
CYCLES 4321
tI> 1201
4321 are the cycles 1 to 4 associated to the trip on tI> pick up
1201 are the actions following the tI> time out :
0 = no action on autorecloser : definitive trip
1 = trip on tI> pick up, followed by reclosing cycle
2 = no trip on tI> pick up : and this whatever the setting in AUTOMAT.
CRTL/Trip commands/Trip tI> menu.
In addition to these settings, function links in the PROTECTION G1/Phase OC or
PROTECTION/E/Gnd menus are also required to fully integrate the autoreclose
logic in the MiCOM P124 relay. Refer to the User Guide of the Technical Guide.
5.2.3 Logic Functions
5.2.3.1 Logic Inputs
The autoreclose function has four inputs affecting the logic, which are configured to
any of the opto-isolated inputs on the relay via the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu.
External inputs may be used to influence the autorecloser scheme. The function of
these inputs are described below.
5.2.3.2 External CB fail
The majority of circuit breakers are only capable of providing one trip-close-trip cycle.
Following this, it is necessary to establish if there is sufficient energy to reclose the CB.
The input assigned to CB FLT function is used to ensure that there is sufficient energy
available to close and trip the CB before initiating a CB close command. If on
completion of the dead time, sufficient energy is not available by checking the CB FLT
input for a time given by the tCFE, a lockout occur and the CB remains open.
This function is disabled by not allocating the function in the PROTECTION
G1/Autoreclose menu (function Ext CB Fail to NO).
5.2.3.3 External starting orders
Two separate and programmable inputs (AUTOMAT.CTRL/INPUTS/Aux1(2) menu)
may be used to initiate the autorecloser function from an external device (such as an
existing overcurrent relay). These logic inputs may be used independently and also in
parallel with the MiCOM P124 Overcurrent settings.
These external orders can be disabled independently by not allocating the functions
in the PROTECTION G1/Autoreclose/CYCLES tAux1 menu and PROTECTION
G1/Autoreclose/CYCLES tAux2 menu.
5.2.3.4 External blocking order
The input assigned to the Block-79 function (programmable in the
AUTOMAT.CTRL/INPUTS menu) may block the autoreclose function and cause a
lock-out if the autorecloser function is in progress. This input can be used when
protection operation without autorecloser function is required.
A typical example is on a transformer feeder, where autoreclosing may be initiated
from the feeder protection but need to be blocked from the transformer protection
side.
These external order can be disabled by not allocating the function in the
PROTECTION/Autoreclose/Ext Block menu.
5.2.3.5 Autoreclose Logic Outputs
The following output signals can be assigned to relay contact or to LEDs to provide
information about the status of the auto Reclose cycle. These are described below,
identified by their namings.
5.2.3.6 Autoreclose in progress
The "Autoreclose in progress" signal is present during the complete reclose cycles
from protection initiation to the end of the reclaim time or lockout.
The "Autoreclose in progress" information is allocated to a LED in the
CONFIGURATION/Led/Recloser Run menu.
The "Autoreclose in progress" information is allocated to the output relays in the
AUTOMAT.CTRL/Output Relays/79 Run menu.
5.2.3.7 Final trip
The "Final trip" signal indicates that an autoreclose cycle has been completed. A
autoreclose signal is given after the CB has tripped from the protection and reclosed
whereupon the fault has not been cleared. The "Final trip" signal is reset at the next
CB manual closing order after the inhibit time (tI).
The inhibit time (tI) is settable in the PROTECTION G1/Autoreclose/Inhib Time
menu.
The "Final trip" signal is allocated to the output relays in the
AUTOMAT.Ctrl/Output Relays/79 Trip menu.
The "Final trip" signal is allocated to a LED in the CONFIGURATION/Led/Recloser
Blocked menu.
5.2.4 Autoreclose logic operating sequence
The autoreclose function provides multi-shot three phase autoreclose control. It can
be adjusted to perform a single shot, two shot, three shot or four shot cycle,
selectable via Phase Cycles numbers and E/Gnd Cycles numbers. Dead times for all
shots (reclose attempts) are independently adjustable.
The number of shots is directly related to the type of faults likely to occur on the
system and the voltage level of the system. Generally, on medium voltage networks
where the percentage of transient and non-permanent faults is likely to be high, a
multi-shot autoreclose device will increase the possibility of the distribution line being
successfully re-energised following reclosure of the circuit breaker.
An autoreclose cycle can be internally initiated by operation of a protection element
(phase or earth), provided the circuit breaker is closed until the instant of protection
operation. The dead time (Dead Time tD1, Dead Time tD2, Dead Time tD3, Dead
Time tD4) starts when the CB has tripped (when the 52a input disappears).
At the end of the relevant dead time, a CB close signal is given, provided system
conditions are suitable. The system conditions to be met for closing are that the circuit
breaker closing spring, or other energy source, is fully charged indicated from the
CB FLT input. The CB close signal is cut-off when the circuit breaker closes.
When the CB has closed the reclaim time (Reclaim Time tR) starts.
If the circuit breaker does not trip again, the autoreclose function resets at the end of
the reclaim time.
If the protection operates during the reclaim time the relay either advances to the next
shot in the programmed autoreclose cycle, or, if all programmed reclose attempts
have been made, goes to lockout.
The total number of reclosures and for each cycle is shown in the MEASUREMENT
menu. This value can be reset to zero with command "C" (Clear) in the
MEASUREMENTS/Reclose Stats menu.
5.2.5 Autoreclose Inhibit Following Manual Close
The Inhib Time tI setting can be used to prevent autoreclose being initiated when the
CB is manually closed onto a fault. Autoreclose is disabled for the Inhib Time tI
following manual CB Closure.
5.2.6 Recloser lockout
If protection operates during the reclaim time, following the final reclose attempt, the
relay will lockout and the autoreclose function is disabled until the lockout condition
resets.
The lockout condition is reset by a manual closing after the "Inhib Time tI".
Autoreclose lockout can also be caused by a CB FLT input. This CB FLT information
can be issued from the CB springs are not charged/Low gas pressure.
Note, lockout can also be caused by :
• CB no open after tBf delay (CB Fail)
• CB Operating Time over the threshold set.
5.2.7 Setting group change lockout
Change of setting groups is only assumed by the MiCOM P124 relays if no protection
functions (except thermal overload function) or automation functions is running.
During the whole autorecloser cycles, if any setting group change order is received,
this order is stored in memory, and will be executed after the last timer of the
autorecloser cycle.
5.3 Setting Guidelines
5.3.1 Number Of Shots
There are no clear-cut rules for defining the number of shots for a particular
application. Generally medium voltage systems utilise only two or three shot
autoreclose schemes. However, in certain countries, for specific applications, four
shots is not uncommon. Four shots have the advantage that the final dead time can
be set sufficiently long to allow any thunderstorms to pass before reclosing for the
final time, this arrangement will prevent unnecessary lockout for consecutive
transient faults.
Typically, the first trip, and sometimes the second, will result from short time
protection since 80% of faults are transient, the subsequent trips will be time delayed,
all with increasing dead times to clear non-permanent faults.
In order to determine the required number of shots the following factors must be
taken into account.
An important consideration is the ability of the circuit breaker to perform several trip-
close operations in quick succession and the effect of these operations on the
maintenance period.
If statistical information on a particular system shows a moderate percentage of non-
permanent faults which could be burned out, two or more shots are justified. In
addition to this, if fused ‘tees’ are used and the fault level is low, the fusing time may
not discriminate with the main IDMT relay and it would then be useful to have several
shots. This would warm up the fuse to such an extent that it would eventually blow
before the main protection operated.
5.3.2 Dead Timer Setting
The factors which influence the choice of dead timer setting are as follows.
5.3.2.1 Load
Due to the great diversity of load which may exist on a system it may prove very
difficult to arrive at an optimum dead time. However, it is possible to address each
type of load individually and thereby arrive at a typical dead time. The most common
types of load are addressed below.
Synchronous motors are only capable of tolerating extremely short interruptions of
supply without loss of synchronism. In practice it is desirable to disconnect the motor
from the supply in the event of a fault; the dead time should be sufficient to allow the
motor no-volt device to operate. Typically, a minimum dead time of 0.2-0.3 seconds
has been suggested to allow this device to operate. Induction motors, on the other
hand, can withstand supply interruptions, up to a maximum of 0.5 seconds and re-
accelerate successfully. In general dead times of 3-10 seconds are normally
satisfactory, but there may be special cases for which additional time is required to
permit the resetting of manual controls and safety devices.
Loss of supply to lighting circuits, such as street lighting may be important for safety
reasons as intervals of 10 seconds or more may be dangerous for traffic. The main
considerations for domestic customers are those of inconvenience.
An important measurement criteria for many power utilities is the number of minutes
lost per year to customers which will be reduced on feeders using autoreclose and will
also be affected by the dead time settings used.
5.3.2.2 Circuit Breaker
For high speed autoreclose the minimum dead time of the power system will depend
on the minimum time delays imposed by the circuit breaker during a tripping and
reclosing operation.
Since a circuit breaker is a mechanical device, it will have an inherent contact
separation time. This operating time for a modern circuit breaker is usually within the
range of 50-100ms, but could be longer with older designs.
After tripping, time must be allowed for the mechanism to reset before applying a
closing pulse. This resetting time will vary depending on the circuit breaker, but is
typically 0.1 seconds.
Once the circuit breaker has reset, the breaker can begin to close. The time interval
between the energisation of the closing mechanism and the making of the contacts is
termed the closing time. Owing to the time constant of a solenoid closing mechanism
and the inertia of the plunger, a solenoid closing mechanism may take 0.3s. A spring
operated breaker, on the other hand, can close in less than 0.2 seconds.
Where high speed reclosing is required, for the majority of medium voltage
applications, the circuit breaker mechanism itself dictates the minimum dead time.
However, the fault de-ionising time may also have to be considered.
High speed autoreclose may be required to maintain stability on a network with two
or more power sources. For high speed autoreclose the system disturbance time
should be minimised by using fast protection, <50 ms, such as distance or feeder
differential protection and fast circuit breakers < 100 ms. Fast fault clearance can
reduce the required fault arc de-ionising time.
For stability between two sources a dead time of <300 ms may typically be required.
The minimum system dead time only considering the CB is the mechanism reset time
plus the CB closing time. Thus, a solenoid mechanism will not be suitable for high
speed autoreclose as the closing time is generally too long.
5.3.2.3 Fault De-ionising Time
For high speed autoreclose the fault de-ionising time may be the most important
factor when considering the dead time. This is the time required for ionised air to
disperse around the fault position so that the insulation level of the air is restored.
This can be approximated from:
De-ionising time = (10.5 + ((system voltage in kV)/34.5)) / frequency
For 66 kV = 0.25 s (50Hz)
For 132 kV = 0.29 s (50 Hz)
5.3.2.4 Protection Reset
It is essential that the protection fully resets during the dead time, so that correct time
discrimination will be maintained after reclosure on to a fault. For high speed
autoreclose instantaneous reset of protection is required.
Typical 11/33kV dead time settings in the UK are as follows;
1st dead time = 5 - 10 seconds
2nd dead time = 30 seconds
3rd dead time = 60 - 100 seconds
4th dead time (uncommon in the UK, however used in South Africa) = 60 - 100
seconds
5.3.3 Reclaim Timer Setting
A number of factors influence the choice of the reclaim timer, such as;
• Supply continuity - Large reclaim times can result in unnecessary lockout for
transient faults.
• Fault incidence/Past experience - Small reclaim times may be required where
there is a high incidence of lightning strikes to prevent unnecessary lockout for
transient faults.
• Spring charging time - For high speed autoreclose the reclaim time may be set
longer than the spring charging time to ensure there is sufficient energy in the
circuit breaker to perform a trip-close-trip cycle. For delayed autoreclose there is
no need as the dead time can be extended by an extra CB healthy check window
time if there is insufficient energy in the CB. If there is insufficient energy after the
check window time the relay will lockout.
• Switchgear Maintenance - Excessive operation resulting from short reclaim times

can mean shorter maintenance periods. A minimum reclaim time of >5s may be
needed to allow the CB time to recover after a trip and close before it can
perform another trip-close-trip cycle. This time will depend on the duty (rating) of
the CB.
The reclaim time must be long enough to allow any time delayed protection initiating
autoreclose to operate. Failure to do so would result in premature resetting of the
autoreclose scheme and re-enabling of instantaneous protection.
If this condition arose, a permanent fault would effectively look like a number of
transient faults, resulting in continuous autoreclosing unless additional measures were
taken to overcome this such as excessive fault frequency lockout protection.
It is possible to have short reclaim times by blocking the reclaim time from the
protection start signals. If short reclaim times are to be used then the switchgear
rating may dictate the minimum reclaim time. The advantage of a short reclaim time
is that there are less lockouts of the CB, however, there will be more CB operations
and so maintenance periods would be reduced.
Sensitive earth fault protection is applied to detect high resistance earth faults and
usually has a long time delay, typically 10-15s. This longer time may have to be
taken into consideration, if autoreclosing from SEF protection, when deciding on a
reclaim time, if the reclaim time is not blocked by an SEF protection start signal.
Sensitive earth faults, for example, a broken overhead conductor in contact with dry
ground or a wood fence, is rarely transient and may be a danger to the public.
It is therefore common practice to block autoreclose by operation of sensitive earth
fault protection and lockout the circuit breaker.
Where motor-wound spring closed circuit breakers are used, the reclaim time must
be at least as long as the spring winding time for high speed autoreclose to ensure
that the breaker can perform a trip-close-trip cycle.
A typical 11/33kV reclaim time is 3-10 seconds, this prevents unnecessary lockout
during thunderstorms. However, times up to 60-180 seconds may be used.
BLANK PAGE
Technical guide P124/EN T07/B44
MiCOM P124
CHAPTER 7
Commissioning and
Maintenance Guide
Commissioning and Maintenance CHAPTER 7
CONTENT
1. REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING 3
2. COMMISSIONING TEST ENVIRONMENT 4

2.1 Important notes 4
2.1.1 Injection test sets 4
2.1.2 Additional commissioning test equipment 4
2.1.3 Communication 4
2.2 Commissioning test sheets 5
3. PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS 6

3.1 Allocation of terminals 6
3.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 6
3.3 Visual inspection 6
3.4 Earthing 6
3.5 Current transformers (CT's) 6
3.5.1 Use of a Core CT for earth faults. 6
3.5.1.1 Cable shields and core CT 7
3.5.1.2 Induced current flow through electric cables 7
3.5.1.3 Core CT polarity 8
3.6 Auxiliary supply (Dual-powered model only) 8
3.7 Logic inputs (Dual-powered model only) 9
3.8 Logic outputs (Dual-powered model only) 9
3.9 Logic outputs (Self-powered version ) 10
3.10 RS 485 rear communication (Dual-powered model only) 10
4. COMMISSIONING 11
4.1 Settings 11
4.2 Measurements 11
4.2.1 MiCOM P124 Self-powered 11
4.2.2 MiCOM P124 Dual-powered 11
4.3 Phase overcurrent (I> and I>>) 12
4.3.1 Test wiring diagram 12
4.3.2 MiCOM settings 13
4.3.3 I> threshold with DMT tI> 13
4.3.4 I> threshold with IDMT tI> 14
4.3.5 I>> threshold 16
4.4 Final checks 17
CHAPTER 7 Commissioning and Maintenance
5. MAINTENANCE 18
5.1 Equipment failure 18
5.1.1 Minor fault (Version Dual-powered only) 18
5.1.2 Major fault 19
5.2 Method of repair 20
5.2.1 Replacing the active part 20
5.2.2 Replacing the complete relay 20
5.2.3 Changing the battery (MiCOM P124 Dual-powered only) 21
5.3 Problem solving 21
5.3.1 Password lost or not accepted 21
5.3.2 Communication (version Dual-powered only) 21
5.3.2.1 Values measured locally and remotely 21
5.3.2.2 MiCOM relay no longer responds 22
5.3.2.3 A remote command is not taken in account 22
1. REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING

The MiCOM P124 relays are fully numerical in their design, implementing all
protection and non-protection functions in software. The MiCOM relays employ a
high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm.
As a result of this, the commissioning test do not need to be as extensive as with non-
numerical relays (static or electromechanical).
To commission MiCOM relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is
functioning correctly and the application-specific software setting have been applied
to the MiCOM relay. It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if
the settings have been verified by one of the following method :
− Extracting the settings applied to the relay using the setting software MiCOM S1
(preferred method)
− Via the front panel user interface.
Reminder : It is not possible to download a new setting software as long as the
programming mode is active.
NOTA : Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the
APPENDIX 2 of the Technical Guide for completion as required.
WARNING : BEFORE COMMISSIONING THE RELAY, THE SAFETY SECTION OF THE
MANUAL MUST BE READ.
2. COMMISSIONING TEST ENVIRONMENT

2.1 Important notes
All the commissioning tests of the MiCOM P124 relay are carried out by injecting
currents to the secondary of the earth and/or phases CTs using appropriate injection
test sets provided for this purpose.
2.1.1 Injection test sets
For reasons of convenience (weight, spatial requirement, transportation), a single-
phased injection test set is more suitable for commissioning and is able to perform all
commissioning tests regarding MiCOM P124 relay.
Thus, the following descriptions indicate how to conduct the commissioning tests with
a single-phase injection test set.
Single-phase injection test set
1 current (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms).
The output power necessary to power the relay is: 2.5 VA
2.1.2 Additional commissioning test equipment
• 1 multimeter (precision 1%),
• 1 connecting terminal to measure the currents exceeding 10 A (precision 2%),
• Test plugs and wires to carry out injections to the CT's secondary (dimension
according to the currents injected).
• Battery box MiCOM E1 for the self-powered model (see note) if the injected
current is lower than the minimum current specified to power the relay.
• Type K1.3 or equivalent striker.
NOTE : the battery box can also be used for the dual-powered model,
when it is not powered by an external auxiliary voltage.
2.1.3 Communication
For all commissioning tests, the records can be made by using the RS 485
communication on the rear connector of the MiCOM P124 (dual-powered only)
relays or using the RS232 front port (both self and dual-powered models).
According to each RS 485 communication protocol (MODBUS, Courier,
IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3), use the dedicated Schneider Electric software MiCOM
S1.
2.2 Commissioning test sheets

Commissioning test sheets are available in the APPENDIX 2 of the Technical Guide.
The presentation of the Commissioning test sheets follows the description of the tests
of this chapter.
The contents of these Commissioning test sheets enable you to log :
• The name of the relay, station and circuit
• The characteristics of the MiCOM P124 relay
• The various settings
• The results of the protection and automation checks
• The result of the test records after commissioning.
3. PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS

3.1 Allocation of terminals
It is necessary to consult the appropriate wiring diagram provided in the APPENDIX 1
of the Technical Guide whilst observing the various polarities and ground/earth
connection.
3.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Before any handling of the module (active part of the relay), please refer to the
recommendations in User guide of this Technical Guide.
3.3 Visual inspection
Carefully examine the relay to see if there has been any possible deterioration
following installation.
Check if the external wiring corresponds to the appropriate relay diagram or the
assembly diagram. The reference number of the relay diagram is indicated on a label
situated under the upper flap of the front panel.
When the relay is withdraw from its case, use a continuity tester to check if the current
short-circuits (phases and earth CT's) between the terminals indicated on the wiring
diagram are closed.
3.4 Earthing
Check if the earth connection of the case situated above the rear terminal block is
used to connect the relay to a local earth bar. With several relays present, make sure
that the copper earth bar is properly installed for solidly connecting the earthing
terminals of each case.
3.5 Current transformers (CT's)
NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT
! TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE

LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.
3.5.1 Use of a Core CT for earth faults.
If a core CT is used to detect earth faults, prior to any test, the user must check the
following points :
1. MV or HV cable screens and core CT,
2. No current flow through the MV or HV cables,
3. Orientation of the core CT (P1-S1, P2-S2).
3.5.1.1 Cable shields and core CT

When mounting a core CT around electric cables, check the connection to the earth
of the cable shields. It is vital that the earth cable of the shield moves in the opposite
direction through the core CT. This cancel the currents carried by the cable shields
through the core CT.
Electrical cables directed

to the busbar Screen shields
P1 S1
P2 S2
Other ends
of electrical cables
FIGURE 1: SCREEN SHIELDS AND CT CORE
3.5.1.2 Induced current flow through electric cables

When an electric line is earthed at its two ends for logging purposes, induced current
may circulate if a second line is in parallel. This current can be read on the
MiCOM P124 and produce false readings.
Busbar 1 Busbar 2
Circuit Breaker 1 Electrical line Circuit breaker 2
P124
with CT core
Earthing 1 Earthing 2
FIGURE 2: LOGGING OF AN ELECTRICAL LINE.

3.5.1.3 Core CT polarity

It is necessary to check the polarity of the core CT by following the figure below :
Momentarily connect the battery + to P1 and – to P2. The centre zero ammeter
connected with + to S1 and – to S2 will deflect in the positive direction if the wiring is
correct.
CT phase may be tested using the same method.
P1 S1 _
+ mA
+
_
P2 S2
FIGURE 3: CORE CT ORIENTATION TEST

NOTA : De-magnetise the CT after polarity test. Inject an ac current
starting from zero and increase to slowly exceed the CT nominal
value and then decrease slowly to zero.
3.6 Auxiliary supply (Dual-powered model only)
Check the value of the auxiliary supply voltage (terminals 33 and 34). The value
measured shall be between 0.8 and 1.2 time the nominal auxiliary supply voltage
indicated on the MiCOM P124.
Uaux range Uaux nominal zone Maximum peak

(Volts) (Volts) value (Volts)
24 – 60 Vdc 19 – 72 Vcc 80
48 – 150 Vdc 38 –180 Vcc 201
130 – 250 Vdc/ 100-250Vca 104 – 300 Vdc/ 80-300 Vca 336.
3.7 Logic inputs (Dual-powered model only)

This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs are functioning correctly. The MiCOM
P124 dual-powered relays have 5 opto-isolated inputs.
Energise the opto inputs one by one, and check in the OP. PARAMETERS menu and
Input status sub-menu the status of each input. « 1 » indicates that the input is
energised, « 0 » indicates that the input is not energised.
Input OP. PARAMETERS/Inputs Status. cell value 54321

Opto input 1
00001
9-11 Terminals
Opto input 2
00010
13-15 Terminals
Opto input 3
00100
17-19 Terminals
Opto input 4
01000
21-23 Terminals
Opto input 5
10000
25-27 Terminals
3.8 Logic outputs (Dual-powered model only)

This test checks that all outputs operate correctly.
The MiCOM P124 dual-powered relays have 7 outputs :
One watchdog relay (RL0) which output is a change-over contact (35-36 normally
closed, 36-37 normally open).
The other relays, RL1 to RL6, are programmable, change-over, types.
Each contact is a dry contact and can therefore be powered by an independent
source.
Energise the output relays in turn and check in the OP PARAMETERS menu and Relay
status sub-menu the status of the output relays. « 1 » indicates that the relay is
energised, « 0 » indicates that the relay is not energised.
Output OP. PARAMETERS/Relay Status. cell value : 654321

RL 1 000001
RL 2 000010
RL 3 000100
RL 4 001000
RL 5 010000
RL 6 100000
WARNING: THE TRIP OUTPUT RELAY CAN BE PROGRAMMED FOR FAIL-SAFE

OPERATION
3.9 Logic outputs (Self-powered version )

This test checks that all outputs operate correctly.
The MiCOM P124 self-powered relays have 2 outputs :
One watchdog relay (RL0) which output is a change-over contact (35-36 normally
closed, 36-37 normally open).
Another relay (RL1) is used to trip the circuit breaker coil. Its output contact is a
change-over type.
Each contact is a dry contact and can therefore be powered by an independent
source.
Energise the RL1 trip relay and check its status in the OP. PARAMETERS menu and
Relay status sub-menu. « 1 » indicates that the relay is energised, « 0 » indicates that
the relay is not energised.
Output OP. PARAMETERS/Relay status. cell value : 1

RL 1 0
3.10 RS 485 rear communication (Dual-powered model only)

This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote
location and will vary depending on the communication protocol being adopted
(refer to label under the upper flap).
It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the
relay to the remote location, just the relay's rear communication port and any
protocol converter necessary.
Connect a laptop PC to the RS485 rear port (via a KITZ for Courier communication)
and check the communication with the appropriate command.
If you encounter any problems, please refer to the « Maintenance » chapter.
4. COMMISSIONING
The various operations for commissioning the MiCOM relays described in this
chapter are not extensive : it is only necessary to verify that the application-specific
software settings applied to the relay are correct.
Using a PC support software MiCOM S1 connected to the RS 485 rear port (dual-
powered model only) or to the RS 232 front port is not compulsory. The various
indications associated to each commissioning module are described for the operator
interface on the P124 front panels.
The commissioning is following the points below :
1. Logging of the settings
2. Validation of the measurements
3. Validation of the thresholds and associated timers.
4.1 Settings
Carry forward the settings on the commissioning test sheets.
4.2 Measurements
The MiCOM P124 relays measure phase and earth currents as a True RMS value up
to the 10th harmonics. The value(s) indicated take account of the phase and/or earth
CT ratio.
WARNING : THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS HAVE 1 OR 5 AMP CURRENT
INPUTS.CHECK THAT THE INJECTED CURRENT IS COMPATIBLE WITH
THE SELECTED RANGE.
To measure the earth channel, the current will be injected via a phase channel in
order to power the relay through that phase channel. This way, by injecting the earth
current through terminals 48 and 47, the earth self-power transformer of the relay is
avoided and the burden on the test equipment lowered.
4.2.1 MiCOM P124 Self-powered
⇒ Note the select phase and earth CTs ratio.
⇒ Inject on each current input (according to the external connection diagram
given in Appendix 1) a current higher than the minimum specified current
level (0,2 In) and check on the LCD display the corresponding current value.
⇒ Carry forward the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Applied values
and relay values displayed).
4.2.2 MiCOM P124 Dual-powered
⇒ Note the select phase and earth CTs ratio.
⇒ Energise the MiCOM P124 relay.
⇒ Inject on each current input (according to the external connection diagram
given in Appendix 1) a current higher than the minimum specified current
level (0,2 In) and check on the LCD display the corresponding current value.
⇒ Carry forward the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Applied values
and relay values displayed).
4.3 Phase overcurrent (I> and I>>)

Assign the various thresholds to the trip contact and therefore to the striker output
(see User Guide, AUTOMAT.CTRL/Trip command menu)
4.3.1 Test wiring diagram
This test wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct tests relating to the I> and I>>
thresholds.
The diagram describes current injection onto the phase current inputs (terminals 49-
50, 51-52, 53-54).
INJECTION
TEST SET
33 Dual-powered
AUXILIARY +Uaux Model only
-Uaux
SUPPLY 34
* 30
31
+ RS 485 communication port
32
-
MiCOM
P124
49
A 1 ou 5
A 50
51
CURRENT 1 ou 5 A
52
53
1 ou 5 A
N 54
37
35 Watchdog
36 Case earth
29
6 -
TIMER Stop 4
2 RL1 Trip output
+
39
Striker output
_41
Striker
FIGURE 4: I> AND I>> TESTS WIRING

4.3.2 MiCOM settings

Protection Menu
Ie> YES
Ie> 1 In
tIe> DMT or IDMT or RI
tIe> (if DMT) 20 s
Type of curve (if IDMT) IEC VI or IEEE VI
TMS value (if IDMT) 1
K value (if RI) 1
Ie>> YES
Ie>> 12 In
tIe>> 10 s
AUTOMAT.CTRL/Trip command Menu
TRIP tIe> YES

TRIP tIe>> YES
4.3.3 I> threshold with DMT tI>

Values to be recorded :
1. I> threshold for each phase
2. Time delay tI> for each phase.
I> threshold check :
1. If the time delay tI> is short, gradually increase the injection current up to the
value of the I> threshold.
2. If the time delay tI> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no
tripping. Then inject 1,1 x I threshold and check the trip.
3. Gradually decreases the injected current and record the value of the drop outI
> threshold.
Checks :
1. Alarm message on the LCD display.
2. Alarm LED flashes (Dual-powered model only)
3. Trip LED on (Dual-powered model only)
4. The magnetic "Trip" flag's state changes.
5. I> threshold LED on (if programmed and for the version dual-powered only).
6. The state of the magnetic flag assigned to that I> threshold changes (if it has
been set and only for the dual-powered).
7. I> threshold output closes (if programmed and for the version dual-powered
only).
8. The trip contact (RL1) operates on expiry of the time delay.
9. The striker output operates on expiry of the time delay.
tI> time delay check :
1. Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI> by pre-
setting the current above the I> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).
2. Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI> by pre-
setting the current above the I> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
4.3.4 I> threshold with IDMT tI>
1. I> threshold for each phase
2. I>time delay for each phase.
I> threshold check :
Inject a current equal to 2 x I threshold onto one of the phase current inputs. Repeat
the operation for various current values (n x I threshold with n ranging from 4 to 10,
for example). Check that the values measured correspond to those indicated in the
table below (for TMS = 1).
IEC curves
Type of curve Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1

IEC 2 x I threshold 10 x I threshold
Nominal Min - Max Nominal Min - Max
STI 1,78 1,62 – 1,98 0,5 0,45 – 0,55
SI 10,1 9,1 – 11,1 3 2,7 – 3,3
VI 13,5 12,2 – 14,9 1,5 1,35 – 1,65
EI 26,7 24 – 29,5 0,8 0,72 – 0,88
LTI 120 108 – 132 13,3 12 – 14,6.
IEEE/ANSI curves

IEEE/ANSI 2 x I threshold 10 x I threshold
STI 0,25 0,22 – 0,28 0,08 0,07 – 0,09
MI 3,8 3,4 – 4,2 1,2 1,08 – 1,32
I 2,2 1,9 – 2,4 0,3 0,27 – 0,33
VI 7,2 6,5 – 8 0,7 0,63 – 0,77
EI 9,5 8,5 – 10,5 0,4 0,36 – 0,44
RI electromechanical curve
Type of curve Tripping time (in seconds) for K =1

Electromechanical 2 x I threshold 10 x I threshold
RI 4,5 4–5 3,2 2,8 – 3,6
Rectifier curve

Rectifier 2 x I threshold 10 x I threshold
RC 966 917 - 1014 0.402 0.382 - 0.422
Laborelec curve
Type of curve Tripping time (in seconds)

Primary zero sequence Primary zero sequence
1A 40A
Laborelec 1 4 3.80 - 4.20 0.5 0.48 - 0.52
Laborelec 2 4.5 4.22 - 4.73 1 0.96 - 1.04
Laborelec 3 5 4.75 - 5.25 1.5 1.44 - 1.56
For other injected current values, compare the values found with the theoretical
values calculated according to the formulae of the curves. Equations of IEC,
IEEE/ANSI, RI, RC and Laborelec curves are given in Chapter "Technical data and
curves characteristics" of the present Technical Guide.
Checks :
1. Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD.
2. Alarm LED flashes (version dual-powered only).
3. Trip LED on (version dual-powered only).
4. The magnetic iaTriplc flag™s state changes.
5. I> threshold LED on (if programmed and for the version dual-powered only).
6. The state of the magnetic flag assigned to that I> threshold changes (if it has
7. I> threshold output closes (if programmed and for the version dual-powered
only).
4.3.5 I>> threshold
1. l>> threshold for each phase
2. tl>> time delay for each phase
I>> threshold check :
1. If tI>> time delay is short, gradually raise the injection current up to the value
of I>> threshold.
2. If tI>> time delay is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check there is no trip.
Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip output is close.
3. Gradually lower the injected current and note the value of the drop out I>>
threshold.
Checks :
1. Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD.
2. Alarm LED flashes (version dual-powered only).
3. Trip LED on (version dual-powered only).
4. The magnetic "Trip" flag's state changes.
5. I>> threshold LED on (if programmed and for the version dual-powered only).
6. The state of the magnetic flag assigned to that I>> threshold changes (if it has
7. I>> threshold output closes (if programmed and for the version dual-powered
only).
tI>> time delay check :

1. Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by
pre-setting the current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).
2. Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by
pre-setting the current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
4.4 Final checks
The tests are complete, and before leaving the relay :
For both models, make sure that all alarms and magnetic flags have been
reset.
For MiCOM P124 dual-powered models, verify :
• that all the counters in the RECORDS menu, CB Monitoring. Sub-menu are reset.
• that the counters in the MEASUREMENTS menu are reset. .
5. MAINTENANCE
5.1 Equipment failure
MiCOM P124 relays are full digital and permanent self-diagnosing. Any failure of
software or hardware elements is instantly detected. As soon as an internal fault is
detected, depending on its type (minor or major), an alarm message is displayed as
a priority on the front panel LCD before the fault LED is illuminated (fixed or flashing)
and the watchdog relay is closed (if the fault is a major one).
An equipment failure (major or minor) cannot be acknowledged on the front panel
(using the dedicated tactile button keypad). Only the disappearance of the cause will
acknowledge the fault and hence reset the fault LED.
NOTE : any failure detected by the P124 self-powered relay is always a
major failure.
5.1.1 Minor fault (Version Dual-powered only)
In case of minor fault the P124 is fully operational. The RL0 watchdog relay is
energised (35-36 contact open, 36-37 contact closed).
For the MiCOM P124 dual-powered relays a minor fault is :
1. A communication failure. If the communication is in fault, protection and
automation modules are not affected :
Message :
« COMM.ERROR » : Communication fault
Cause :
Hardware or software failure of the communication module
Action :
Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair.
Alternative : If communication is not used, disable communication in the
COMMUNICATION menu (Communication ? = No).
2. Failure of the battery-backed memory or of the battery itself :
Message :
« RAM ERROR » (failure of the battery-backed memory)
Cause :
Hardware or software failure
Action :
Check that the battery is correctly positioned and restart the protection software by
disconnecting the power supply, if the software fault still remain after restart,
withdraw the active part and return the module to the factory for repair.
Message :
« BATTERY FAIL » (battery in fault)
Cause :
Hardware failure
Action :
Check that the battery is correctly positioned and restart the protection software by
disconnecting the power supply. If the message fault still remains after restart, change
the battery. If the fault still remains after restart, withdraw the active part and return
the module to the factory for repair.
NOTE : it is possible to mask the message "Battery fail" in the
Configuration/Alarms/Alarm Battery menu
3. Clock for event stamping in fault
Message :
« CLOCK ERROR »
Cause :
Action :
Restart the software by disconnecting the power supply, if the fault still remains after
restart, withdraw the active part and return the module to the factory for repair.
5.1.2 Major fault
Major fault for MiCOM P124 relays are dedicated software and hardware failures.
As soon as this type of failure is detected, the watchdog (WD) is de-energised (35-36
contact closed, 36-37 contact open) and all operations are stopped (protection,
automation, communication for Dual-powered model).
1. Hardware and software faults of the memory components
Messages :
« EEPROM ERROR DATA » or « EEPROM ERROR CALIBR. » (Data zone or Calibration
zone in fault)
« CT ERROR » (Analogue channel in fault)
Cause :
Action :
Restart the protection software by disconnecting the power supply, if the software fault
still remains after restart, withdraw the active part and return the module to the
factory for repair.
2. Loss of auxiliary supply (P124 Dual-powered only)
If the trip output relay RL1 is programmed in fail-safe operation and the auxiliary
power supply lost, the MiCOM P124 relay is not able to perform the trip of the CB via
RL1.
In this case only the HMI is operational if the current load is over the minimum
required (0.2 In on at least one phase).
All the protection and automation functions are inhibited.
Messages :
« AUX SUPPLY LOST »
Cause :
RL1 configured with fail-safe operation and the auxiliary power supply is lost.
Action :
Supply the P124 with an auxiliary power supply or configure the trip output relay RL1
in the Configuration/RL1 output relay/Fail-safe relay menu on NO.
5.2 Method of repair
5.2.1 Replacing the active part
The case and the rear terminals blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of
the MiCOM P124 relay should replacement or repair become necessary without
disconnect the scheme wiring.
NOTE : The MiCOM P124 of relays have integral current transformer
shorting switches which will close when the active part is
removed from the case.
Remove the upper and lower flap without exerting excessive force. Remove the
external screws.
Under the upper flap, turn the extractor with a 3 mm screwdriver and extract the
active part of the relay by pulling from the upper and lower notches on the front
panel of the MiCOM relay.
The reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instruction in reverse,
ensuring that no modification has been done on the scheme wiring.
5.2.2 Replacing the complete relay
Before working at the rear of the relay, isolate all current supplies to the MiCOM
relay and ensure that the relay is no more powered.
To remove the complete relay (active part and case) the entire wiring must be
removed from the rear connector.
NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT
! TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE

LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.
Lift the top and bottom flaps and remove the screws which attach the active part to
the casing.
Live the top flap of the MiCOM relay, and flip the extractor using a 3mm screwdriver.
Pull the active part.
Remove the screws linking the casing to its environment.
Re-installation of the MiCOM relay and of its case will be done using the reverse
procedure.
5.2.3 Changing the battery (MiCOM P124 Dual-powered only)

Each MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay has a battery to maintain recording data
and the correct time when the auxiliary voltage fails. The data maintained include
event, fault and disturbance records and the thermal state at the time failure.
The battery is designed for a life of 10 years in standard atmospheric conditions.
To replace the battery follow the following instructions :
• Open the lower flap on the front of the relay
• Gently extract the battery from its socket. If necessary, use a small screwdriver.
• Ensure that metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease
and dust.
• The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into
the battery holder.
WARNING : ONLY USE A TYPE 1/2AA LITHIUM BATTERY WITH A NOMINAL
VOLTAGE OF 3.6 V.
• Ensure that the polarity markings on the battery agree with those adjacent to the
socket.
5.3 Problem solving
5.3.1 Password lost or not accepted
Problem :
Password lost or not accepted
Cause :
MiCOM P124 relays are supplied with the password set to AAAA.
This password can be changed by the user ( refer OP PARAMETERS menu).
Action :
There is an additional unique recovery password associated to the relay which can be
supplied by the factory or service agent, if given details of its serial number (under the
upper flap of the front panel). With this serial number, contact your Schneider Electric
local dealer or Schneider Electric After Sales Dept.
5.3.2 Communication (version Dual-powered only)
5.3.2.1 Values measured locally and remotely

Problem :
The measurements noted remotely and locally (via RS485 communication) differ.
Cause :
The values accessible on the front face via the Measurement menu are refreshed
every second. Those fed back via the communication and accessible by the
Schneider Electric Setting software generally have skeletal refreshing frequencies. If
the refreshing frequency of the supervision software differs from that of MiCOM P124
relays (1s), there may be a difference between indicated values.
Action :
Adjust the frequency for refreshing the measurements of the supervision software or
of the setting software to 1 second.
5.3.2.2 MiCOM relay no longer responds

Problem :
No response from MiCOM P124 relays when asked by the supervision software
without any communication fault message.
Cause :
Mainly, this type of problem is linked to an error in the MiCOM P124 communication
parameters.
Action :
Check MiCOM P124 communication parameters (data rate, parity, etc.) are in
accordance with the supervision settings.
Check MiCOM P124 network address.
Check that this address is not used by another device connected on the same LAN.
Check that the other devices on the same LAN answer to supervision requests.
5.3.2.3 A remote command is not taken in account

Problem :
The communication between the relay and the PC is correct, but the relay does not
accept any remote command or file downloading.
Cause :
Generally this is due to the fact that the relay is in programming situation. This means
that the password is active.
Action :
Check that the password is not active in the relay since the last 5 minutes.
MiCOM P124
CHAPTER 8
Communication Database
P124 Dual-Powered Relay
Communication Database CHAPTER 8
CONTENT
1. INTRODUCTION 5
1.1 Purpose of this document 5
1.2 Glossary 5
2. MODBUS PROTOCOL 6
2.1 Technical characteristics of the MODBUS connection 6
2.1.1 Parameters of the MODBUS connection 6
2.1.2 Synchronisation of exchanges messages 7
2.1.3 Message validity check 7
2.1.4 Address of the MiCOM relays 7
2.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays 7
2.3 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol 8
2.3.1 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM relay 8
2.3.2 Messages validity check 9
2.4 MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay database organisation 10
2.4.1 Description of the application mapping 10
2.4.2 Page 0h : Product information, remote signalling, measurements 12
2.4.3 Page 1h, MiCOM P124 : general remote parameters 15
2.4.4 Page 2h : setting Group 1 19
2.4.5 Page 3h : setting Group 2 22
2.4.6 Page 4h : remote controls 25
2.4.7 Pages 5h/6h 25
2.4.8 Page 7h 25
2.4.9 Page 8h : time synchronisation 25
2.4.10 Mapping access characteristics 26
2.4.11 Pages 9h to 21h : disturbance record data (25 pages). 27
2.4.12 Page 22h : disturbance record index frame 29
2.4.13 Page 35h (addresses 3500h to 354Ah) : event record data (9 words) 30
2.4.14 Page 36h 32
2.4.15 Page 37h : fault record value data 32
2.4.16 Page 3Eh : most older Fault record value data 34
2.4.17 Pages 38h to 3Ch 35
2.4.18 Pages 3Dh : number of disturbance records available 36
2.4.19 Description of the mapping format, MiCOM P124 Dual-powered 38
2.4.20 Disturbance record additional information 46
CHAPTER 8 Communication Database
2.4.21 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event 47

2.4.22 Request to retrieve a dedicated event 48
2.4.23 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records 48
3. K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE 49

3.1 K-BUS 49
3.1.1 K-Bus transmission layer 49
3.1.2 K-Bus connection 49
3.1.3 Auxiliary equipment 50
3.2 Relay courier database 50
3.2.1 Cell reference 51
3.2.2 List of events created by the relay 77
3.3 Setting changes 79
3.4 Systems integration data 79
3.4.1 Address of the relay 79
3.4.2 Measured values 79
3.4.3 Status word 80
3.4.4 Unit status word 80
3.4.5 Control status word 80
3.4.6 Measurement control 80
3.4.7 Change of remote measurements 81
3.5 Event extraction 81
3.5.1 Automatic event extraction 81
3.5.2 Event types 81
3.5.3 Event format 82
3.5.4 Manual record extraction 82
3.6 Disturbance record extraction 82
4. IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE 83
4.1 Physical connection and link layer 83
4.2 Initialisation 83
4.3 Time synchronisation 84
4.4 Spontaneous events 84
4.5 General interrogation 84
4.6 Cyclic measurements 84
4.7 Commands 84
4.8 Disturbance records 84
4.9 Blocking of monitor direction 85
4.10 List of events produced by the relay 85
5. DNP 3.0 CONFIGURATION/INTEROPERABILITY GUIDE 87

5.1 Introduction 87
5.2 DNP V3.00 device profile 87
5.3 Implementation table 90
5.4 Point List 93
5.4.1 Binary Input Points 93
5.4.2 Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks 96
5.4.3 Counters 97
5.4.4 Analog Inputs 98
BLANK PAGE
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose of this document
This document describes the characteristics of the different communication protocol of
MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay.
The available communication protocols of MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay are
as follows:
• MODBUS.
• K-BUS/Courier.
• IEC 60870-5-103.
• DNP3
1.2 Glossary
Ir, Is, It : currents measured on the concerned phases (r, s, t)
IE : residual current measured by earth input (= 3.I zero sequence)
pf : soft weight of a word of 16 bits
PF : heavy weight of a word of 16 bits.
2. MODBUS PROTOCOL
MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay can communicate by a RS 485 link behind the
unit following the MODBUS RTU protocol.
2.1 Technical characteristics of the MODBUS connection
2.1.1 Parameters of the MODBUS connection
The different parameters of the MODBUS connection are as follows :
• Isolated two-point RS485 connection (2kV 50Hz),
• MODBUS line protocol in RTU mode
• Communication speed can be configured by an operator dialog in the front panel
of the relay :
Baud rate
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
− Transmission mode of the configured characters by operator dialog
Mode
1 start / 8 bits / 1 stop : total 10 bits
1 start / 8 bits / even parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits
1 start / 8 bits / odd parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits
1 start / 7 bits / even parity / 1 stop : total 10 bits
1 start / 7 bits / odd parity / 1 stop : total 10 bits
1 start / 7 bits / 2 stop : total 10 bits.
2.1.2 Synchronisation of exchanges messages

All character received after a silence on the line with more or equal to a transmission
time of 3 characters is considered as a firm start.
2.1.3 Message validity check
The frame validity is working with a cyclical redundancy code CRC with 16 bits. The
generator polynomial is:
1 + x² + x15 + x16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 binary = A001h
2.1.4 Address of the MiCOM relays
The address of the MiCOM relay on a same MODBUS network is situated between 1
and 255. The address 0 is reserved for the broadcast messages
2.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays
The MODBUS functions implemented on the MiCOM relays are :
Function 1 or 2 : Reading of n bits
Function 3 or 4 : Reading of n words
Function 5 : Writing of 1 bit
Function 6 : Writing of 1 word
Function 7 : Fast reading of 8 bits
Function 8 : Reading of the diagnostics counter
Function 11 : Reading of the Event counter
Function 15: Writing of n bits
Function 16 : Writing of n words
2.3 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol

Master slave protocol, all exchange understands a master query and a slave response
Frame size received from MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay
Frame transmitted by the master ( query) :
Slave Function Information CRC1 6

number code
1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes
0 à FFh 1 à 10h
Slave number:
The slave number is situated between 1 and 255.
A frame transmitted with a slave number 0 is globally addressed to all pieces of
equipment (broadcast frame )
Function code:
Requested MODBUS function (1 to 16)
Information:
Contains the parameters of the selected function.
CRC16:
Value of the CRC16 calculated by the master.
Note: the MiCOM relay does not respond to globally broadcast frames sent out by
the master.
2.3.1 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM relay
Frame sent by the MiCOM relay ( response)
Slave Function Data CRC16

number code
1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes
1 à FFh 1 à 10h
Slave number :
Function code :
Processed MODBUS function (1 to 16) .
Data :
Contains reply data to master query .
CRC 16:
Value of the CRC 16 calculated by the slave.
2.3.2 Messages validity check

When MiCOM P124 relay receive a master query, it validates the frame :
• If the CRC is false, the frame is invalid. MiCOM P124 relay do not reply to the
query. The master must retransmit its query. Excepting a broadcast message, this
is the only case of non-reply by MiCOM P124 relay to a master query.
• If the CRC is good but the MiCOM relay can not process the query, it sends an
exception response.
Warning frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response)
Slave number Function code Warning code CRC16

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes
1 to FFh 81h or 83h or 8Ah or 8Bh pf ... PF
Slave number :
Function code :
The function code returned by the MiCOM relay in the warning frame is the code in
which the most significant bit (b7) is forced to 1.
Warning code :
On the 8 warning codes of the MODBUS protocol, the MiCOM relay manages two of
them :
• code 01 : function code unauthorised or unknown.
• code 03 : a value in the data field is unauthorised ( incorrect data ).
Control of pages being read
Control of pages being written
Control of addresses in pages
Length of request messages
CRC16:
Value of the CRC16 calculated by the slave.
2.4 MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay database organisation

2.4.1 Description of the application mapping
2.4.1.1 Settings
MiCOM P123 application mapping has 9 pages of parameters.
Page 0h: Product information, remote signalling, measurements
Page 1h: General remote parameters
Page 2h: Setting group 1 remote parameters
Page 3h: Setting group 2 remote parameters
Page 4h: Remote controls
Pages 5h/6h: Reserved pages
Pages 7h: Quick reading byte
Pages 8h: Time synchronisation
2.4.1.2 Disturbance records

Before uploading any disturbance record, a service request must be send to select the
record number to be uploaded.
The answer following this request contain the following information:
1. Numbers of samples (pre and post time)
2. Phase CT ratio
3. Earth CT ratio
4. Internal phase and earth ratios
5. Number of the last disturbance mapping page
6. Number of samples in this last disturbance mapping page
The mapping pages used for this service request are from 38h to 3Ch.
Pages 9h to 21h : Contain the disturbance data (25 pages)
A disturbance mapping page contains 250 words:
0900 à 09FAh : 250 disturbance data words
0A00 à 0AFAh : 250 disturbance data words
0B00 à 0BFAh : 250 disturbance data words
......
2100 à 21FAh : 250 disturbance data words
The disturbance data pages contain the sample of a single channel from a
record.
Page 22h : contains the index of the disturbance
Page 38h à 3Ch : Selection of the disturbance record and channel
Page 3Dh : A dedicated request allows to know the number of disturbance records
stored in SRAM.
2.4.1.3 Event records

To upload the event records two requests are allowed:
Page 35h: Request to upload an event record without acknowledge of this event.
Used addresses:
3500h : EVENT 1
.....
354Ah : EVENT 75
Page 36h: Request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored event record.
Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or
manual acknowledgement
The mode depends of the state of bit 12 of telecommand word (address 400 h).
If this bit is set, then the acknowledgement is manual else the acknowledgement is
automatic.
In automatic mode, the reading of the event acknowledges the event.
In manual mode, it is necessary to write a specific command to acknowledge the
oldest event
(set the bit 13 of control word 400 h )
2.4.1.4 Fault records

Page 37h: Page dedicated to upload fault record
Used addresses:
3700h : FAULT 1
3701h : FAULT 2
.....
3704h : FAULT 5
Page 3Eh: Request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored fault record.
Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or
manual acknowledgement
The mode depends of the state of bit 12 of telecommand word (address 400 h).
If this bit is set, then the acknowledgement is manual else the acknowledgement is
automatic.
In automatic mode, the reading of the fault acknowledges automatically the event.
In manual mode, it is necessary to write a specific command to acknowledge the
oldest fault.
(set the bit 14 of control word 400 h )
2.4.1.5 Characteristics
Page 0h can only be read through communication.
Pages 1h, 2h, 3h and 4h can be read and write.
Page 7h can be access in quick reading only.
Page 8h can be write.
They are describe more precisely in the following chapters.
2.4.2 Page 0h : Product information, remote signalling, measurements

Read access only
Values Fault
Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range Value
0000 Product Relay description 32-127 1 - F10
Information characters 1 and 2
0001 Relay description 32-127 1 - F10 P1
characters 3 and 4
0002 Relay description 32-127 1 - F10 24
characters 5 and 6
0003 Unit reference characters 32-127 1 - F10 AL
1 and 2
0004 Unit reference characters 32-127 1 - F10 ST
3 and 4
0005 Software version 10-xx 1 - F21
0006 Front communication 0-1 1 - F41
0007 Internal phase ratio - F1
0008 Internal earth ratio - F1
0009 to Reserved
000B
000C Active Group 1-2 1 - F1
n
000D Electromechani- Flag status 0 to FF 2 - F52
cal
000E Password active - F24
000F Relay status - F45
0010 Remote Logical inputs 0 to 31 1 - F12
signalling
0011 Logical data 0 to FFFF 2n - F20
0012 Internal Logic 0 to FFFF 2n - F22
0013 Output contacts 0 to 511 1 - F13
0014 Output information: I> 0 to FFFF 1 - F17
0015 Output information: I>> 0 to FFFF 1 - F17
0016 Output information: 0 to FFFF 1 - F17
I>>>
0017 Output information: IE> 0 to FFFF 1 - F16
0018 Output information: IE>> 0 to FFFF 1 - F16
IE>>>
001A I> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 - F17
001B I>> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 - F17
001C I>>> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 - F17
001D tI> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 - F17
001E tI>> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 - F17
Values Fault
range Value
001F tI>>> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 - F17
0020 Thermal state information 0 to 3 1 - F37
0021 Output information: I< 0 to FFFF 1 - F17
0022 Output information: I2> 0 to FFFF 1 - F16
broken conductor
/ CB failure
/ CB alarm
0024 tI< memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 - F17
0025 Memorised flag for non - F36
acknowledge alarms
0026 Number of disturbance 0 to 5 1 - F31
records available
0027 Tripping output (RL1) status 0 to 1 1 - F1
0028 CB supervision flag - F43
0029 Non acknowledge alarm - F44
memorised flag 2
002A to Reserved
002F
0030 Remote Phase A current RMS value 0 to 1 A/100 F18
measurements 600 000
0032 Phase B current RMS value 0 to 1 A/100 F18
600 000
0034 Phase C current RMS 0 to 1 A/100 F18
value 600 000
0036 Earth current RMS value 0 to 1 A/100 F18
120 000
0038-0039 Reserved
003A Thermal state % F1
003B Frequency 4500 to 1 1/100 F1
6500 Hz
003C Phase A current peak RMS 0 to 1 A/100 F18
value 600 000
003E Phase B current peak RMS 0 to 1 A/100 F18
value 600 000
0040 Phase C current peak RMS 0 to 1 A/100 F18
value 600 000
0042 Phase A current rolling 0 to 1 A/100 F18
RMS value 600 000
0044 Phase B current rolling 0 to 1 A/100 F18.
RMS value 600 000
0046 Phase C current rolling 0 to 1 A/100 F18
RMS value 600 000
Values Fault
range Value
0048 Io harmonique 0 to 1 A/100 F18
600 000
004A I2 1 A/100 F18
004C Positive phase sequence 1 A/100 F18
current value
(fundamental)
004E Ratio I2/I1 1 % F1
004F Trip number 0 to 65535 1 - F1
0050 Fourier Module Module IA - F1
0051 Module IB - F1
0052 Module IC - F1
0053 Module IE - F1
0054 Fourier Argument IA - F1
Argument
0055 Argument IB - F1
0056 Argument IC - F1
0057 Argument IE - F1
0058 Module I2 - F1
0059 Module I1 - F1
005A Recloser Cycle total number - F1
statistics
005B Cycle 1 number - F1
005C Cycle 2 number - F1
005D Cycle 3 number - F1
005E Cycle 4 number - F1
005F Definitive tripping - F1
number
0060 Closing order number - F1
0061 to Reserved.
006F
2.4.3 Page 1h, MiCOM P124 : general remote parameters

Read and write access
Values Fault
range Value
0100 Remote Address 1 to 255 1 - F1 1
parameters
0101 Reserved
0102 Password characters 1 32 -127 1 - F10 AA
and 2
0103 Password characters 3 32 -127 1 - F10 AA
and 4
0104 Frequency 50-60 10 Hz F1 50
0105 Phase A label L1-A-R VTA - F25 A
0106 Phase B label L2-B-S VTA - F25 B
0107 Phase C label L3-C-T VTA - F25 C
0108 Earth label N-G-E VTA - F25 N
0109 Fault display 1-4 1 - F26 1
010A User reference 32-127 1 F10 AL
(characters 1 and 2)
010B User reference 32-127 1 F10 ST
(characters 3 and 4)
010C Fault number to display 1-5 1 F31 5
010D Inputs operation 0-31 1 - F12 0
010E to Reserved
010F
0110 CB monitoring Operation number 1 - F1
measurements
0111 CB Operating time 1/100 s F1
0112 Switched square Amps An F18
phase A sum
phase B sum
phase C sum
0118 CB Closing time 1/100 s F1
0119 to Reserved
011E
011F Latch relay 0-31 1 - F14 0
0120 Ratio Primary phase CT value 1 to 1 - F1 1000
9999*
0121 Reserved
0122 Primary earth CT value 1 to 1 - F1 1000
9999
Values Fault
range Value
0123 to Reserved.
012F
0130 Communication Speed 0 to 7 1 - F4 6=

19200
bds
0131 Parity 0 to 2 1 - F5 0=
without
0132 Data bits 0 to 1 1 - F28 1 = 8 bits
0133 Stop bit 0 to 1 1 - F29 0=1
stop bit
0134 COM available 0 to 1 1 - F30 1=COM
available
0135 Format datation 0-1 1 - F54 0=private
0136 to Reserved
013F
0140 Configuration Setting group 1 to 2 1 - F1 1
0141 Alarm self-reset enable
0142 Active group change 0-1 1 - F55 1
0143 Battery alarm and RAM 0-1 1 - F1 0
alarm displayed
0144 RL1 fail-safe operation 0-1 1 - F1 0
0145 to Reserved
014F
0150 LEDs allocation Led 5 1 - F19 4
0151 Led 6 1 - F19 16
0152 Led 7 1 - F19 32
0153 Led 8 1 F19 64
0154 Led PF 5 1 F19' 0
0155 Led PF 6 1 F19' 0
0156 Led PF 7 1 F19' 0
0157 Led PF 8 1 F19' 0
0158 to Reserved
015A
015B Logic input Logic input 1 next VTA - - F15'
allocation
015C Logic input 2 next VTA - - F15'
015E Logic input 3 next VTA - - F15'
015F Logic input 4 next VTA - - F15'
0160 Logic input Logic input 1 VTA - F15 0
allocation
0161 Logic input 2 VTA - F15 0
Values Fault
range Value
0165 Output relay Broken conductor 0-31 1 - F14 0
allocation detection
0166 CB failure 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
0167 I< 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
0168 I2> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
0169 Thermal overload alarm 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
016A Thermal overload trip 0-31 1 - F14 0
016B CB close 0-31 1 - F14 0
016C tAUX1 0-31 1 - F14 0
016D tAUX2 0-31 1 - F14 0
016E CB alarms 0-31 1 - F14 0
016F Trip circuit 0-31 1 - F14 0
0170 Active group 0-31 1 - F14 0
0171 Trip 0 - 31 1 - F14 1
0172 tI> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
0173 tI>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
0174 tI>>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
0175 tIE > 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
0176 tIE >> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
0177 tIE >>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
0178 I> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
0179 I>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
017A I>>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
017B IE > 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
017C IE >> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
017D IE >>> 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
017E Recloser running 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
017F Recloser final trip 0 - 31 1 - F14 0
0180 Automation Trip 0 to 63 1 - F6 1
0181 Relay latching 0 to 63 1 - F8 0
0182 Blocking logic 1 0 to 63 1 - F8' 0
0183 Blocking logic 2 0 to 63 1 - F8' 0
0184 Broken conductor 0-1 1 - F24 0
detection
0185 tBC 0 to 14400 1 - F1 0
0186 Cold load start 0-1 1 - F24 0
0187 Cold load start thresholds 0 to 255 1 - F33 0
0188 Cold load start % 20 to 500 1 % F1 50
0189 Cold load start delay 1 to 36000 1 1/10 s F1 10
Values Fault
range Value
018A CB failure 0-1 1 F24 0
018B tBF 0 to 1000 1 1/100 s F1 10
018C Selective scheme logic 1 0 to 15 1 F40 0
018D tSEL1 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 0
018E Selective scheme logic 2 0 to 15 1 - F40 0
018F tSEL2 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 0
15000
0190 Disturbance Pre-time 1 to 30 1 - F1 1
0191 Post-time 1 to 30 1 - F1 1
0192 Disturbance starting 0-1 1 - F32 0
condition
0193 CB monitoring Operating time 0-1 1 - F24 0
0194 Operating time 5 to 100 5 1/100 s F1 5
threshold
0195 Operation number 0-1 1 - F24 0
0196 Operation number 0 - 50000 1 - F1 0
threshold
0197 CB switched Amps sum 0-1 1 - F24 0
0198 CB switched Amps sum 0 to 10 E 6 A n F3
threshold 4000
0199 Amps or square Amps 1-2 1 F1' 1
019A Closing time threshold 5 to 100 5 1/100 s F8' 0
019B Auxiliary timer 1 0 to 20000 1 1/100 s F1 0
019C Auxiliary timer 2 0 to 20000 1 1/100 s F1 0
019D Peak value 5 to 60 VTA mn F42 5
019E I2/I1 threshold 20 to 100 1 % F1 20
019F Tripping time 10 to 500 5 1/100 s F1 10
01A0 Closing time 10 to 500 5 1/100 s F1 10
01A1 Closing time threshold 0-1 1 F24 0
validation
01A2 Trip circuit supervision 0-1 1 F24 0
validation
01A3 t SUP* 10 to 5 1/100 s F1 10
1000
01A4 I<thershold for CB fail 2 to 100 1 1/100 F1 2
function
01A5 Instantaneous 0-1 1 - F24 0
I>blocking if CB fail
01A6 Instantaneous 0-1 1 - F24 0
le>blocking if CB fail
01A7 to Reserved.
1AF
2.4.4 Page 2h : setting Group 1

Access in reading and in writing
Address Group Description Values Step Unit Format Fault

range Value
0200 Setting group 1 I> 0-1 1 - F24 0
0201 I> threshold 10 to 400 1 In/100 F1 10
0202 I> time delay type 0 to 2 1 - F27 0
0203 I> IDMT Curve Type 0 to 10 1 - F3 1
0204 I> TMS value 25 to 25 1/1000 F1 25
1500
0205 I> K value (RI curve) 100 to 5 1/1000 F1 100
10000
0206 tI> value 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 4
18000
0207 I> Reset type 0–1 1 F27 0
0208 I> RTMS value 25 to 3200 25 1/1000 F1 25
0209 I> tRESET value 4 to 1 1/100 s F1 4
10000
020A to Reserved 0
020F
0210 I>> 0-1 1 - F24 0
0211 I>> value 50 to 5 In/100 F1 50
4000
0212 tI>> value 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 1
18000
0213 to Reserved 0
021F
0220 I>>> 0-1 1 - F24 0
0221 I>>> value 50 to 5 In/100 F1 50
4000
0222 tI>>> value 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 1
18000
0223 to Reserved 0
022F
0230 IE> 0-1 1 - F24 0
0231 IE > value sensitive version 10 to 1000 5 1/1000 I0n F1 10
IE > value normal version 10 to 400 1 1/100 I0n F1 10
IE > value very sensitive 2 to 1000 1 1/1000 I0n F1 2
version
0232 IE > time delay type 0 to 3 1 - F27 0
0233 IE > IDMT curve type 0 to 10 1 - F3 1
0234 IE > TMS value 25 to 25 1/1000 F1 25
1500

range Value
0235 IE > K value (RI curve) 100 to 5 1/1000 F1 100
10000
0236 TiE > value 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 4
18000
0237 IE > reset type 0–1 1 F27 0
0238 IE > RTMS value 25 to 25 1/1000 F1 25
3200
0239 IE > Treset value 4 to 1 1/100 s F1 4
10000
023A Laborelec curve 0 to 2 1 F3 0
023B to Reserved 0
023F
0240 IE >> 0-1 1 - F24 0
0241 IE >> value 10 to 5 1/1000 F1 10
8000 I0n
0242 t IE >> value 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 1
18000
0243 to Reserved 0
024F
0250 IE >>> 0-1 1 - F24 0
0251 IE >>> value 10 to 5 1/1000 F1 10
8000 I0n
0252 tIE >>>value 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 1
18000
0253 Ith> 0–1 1 F24 0
0254 Ith> value 10 to 320 5 1/100 F1 8
0255 Ith> k value 100 to 1 1/100 F1 105
150
0256 Ith> trip threshold 50 to 200 1 % F1 100
0257 Ith> alarm 0–1 1 F24 0
0258 Ith> alarm threshold 50 to 200 1 % F1 90
0259 Thermal overload time 1 to 200 1 mn F1 1
constant
025A I< 0-1 1 - F24 0
025B I< threshold 0 to 100 1 % In F1 20
025C I2> 0-1 1 - F24 0
025D I2> threshold 10 to 1 In/100 F1 10
4000
025E I2> time delay type 0 to 2 1 - F27 0
025F I2> IDMT type 0 to 9 1 - F3 1
0260 2> TMS value 25 to 25 1/1000 F1 25
1500

range Value
0261 I2> K value (RI) 100 to 5 1/1000 F1 100
10000
0262 tI2> value 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 4
15000
0263 I2> Reset type 0-1 1 F27 0
0264 I2> RTMS value 25 to 25 1/1000 F1 25
3200
0265 I2> tRESET value 4 to 1 1/100 s F1 4
10000
0266 to Reserved
026E
026F tI< value 0 to 18000 1 1/100 s F1 0
0270 Recloser valid 0-1 1 F24 0
0271 CB position active 0-1 1 F1 0
0272-0273 Supervision window 1 to 1 1/100 s F18 1
60000
0274 External blocking input 0-1 1 F24 0
0275-0276 Reserved
0277 Dead time 1 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 1
30000
0278 Dead time 2 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 1
30000
0279-027A Dead time 3 0 to 1 1/100 s F18 1
60000
027B- Dead time 4 0 to 1 1/100 s F18 1
027C 60000
027D-027 Reclaim time 2 to 1 1/100 s F18 2
60000
027F-0280 Inhibit time 2 to 1 1/100 s F18 2
60000
0281 Recloser cycles for phase 0 to 4 1 F1 0
faults
0282 Recloser cycles for earth 0 to 4 1 F1 0
faults
0283 t I> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111
0284 t I>> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111
0285 t I>>> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111
0286 t Ie> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111
0287 t Ie>> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111
0288 t Ie>>> cycles 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111
configuration
0289 t Aux1 cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111
028A t Aux2 cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111
2.4.5 Page 3h : setting Group 2

Access in reading and in writing
Values Fault
range Value
0300 Setting group 2 I> 0-1 1 - F24 0
0301 I> threshold 10 to 1 In/100 F1 10
2500
0302 I> time delay type 0 to 2 1 - F27 0
0303 I> IDMT Curve Type 0 to 10 1 - F3 1
0304 I> TMS value 25 to 25 1/1000 F1 25
1500
0305 I> K value (RI curve) 100 to 5 1/1000 F1 100
10000
0306 Ti> value 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 4
15000
0307 I> Reset type 0–1 1 F27 0
0308 I> RTMS value 0 to 25 1/1000 F1 25
15000
0309 I> Treset value 4 to 1 1/1000 F1 4
10000
030A to Reserved 0
030F
0310 I>> 0-1 1 - F24 0
0311 I>> value 50 to 5 In/100 F1 50
4000
0312 Ti>> value 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 1
15000
0313 to Reserved 0
031F
0320 I>>> 0-1 1 - F24 0
0321 I>>> value 50 to 5 In/100 F1 50
4000
0322 Ti>>> value 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 1
15000
0323 to Reserved 0
032F
0330 IE > 0-1 1 - F24 0
0331 IE > value sensitive version 10 to 1000 5 1/1000 I0n F1 10
IE > value normal version 10 to 400 1 1/100 I0n F1 10
IE > value very sensitive 2 to 1000 1 1/1000 I0n F1 2
version
0332 IE > time delay type 0 to 3 1 - F27 0
0333 IE > IDMT curve type 0 to 10 1 - F3 1
0334 IE > TMS value 25 to 25 1/1000 F1 25
1500
Values Fault
range Value
0335 IE> K value (RI) 100 to 5 1/1000 F1 100
10000
0336 TiE > value 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 4
18000
0337 IE > reset type 0–1 1 F27 0
0338 IE > RTMS value 25 to 25 1/1000 F1 25 25
3200
0339 IE > Treset value 4 to 1 1/100 s F1 4
10000
033A Laborelec curve 0 to 2 1 F3 0
033B to Reserved 0
033F
0340 IE >> 0-1 1 - F24 0
0341 IE >> value 10 to 5 1/1000 F1 10
8000 I0n
0342 tIE >> value 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 1
18000
0343 to Reserved 0
034F
0350 IE >>> 0-1 1 - F24 0
0351 IE >>> value 10 to 5 1/1000 F1 10
8000 I0n
0352 t E >>>value 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 1
18000
0353 Ith> 0-1 1 F24 0
0354 Ith> value 10 to 320 5 1/100 F1 8
0355 Ith> k value 100 to 1 1/100 F1 105
150
0356 Ith> trip threshold 50 to 200 1 % F1 100
0357 Ith> alarm 0–1 1 F24 0
0358 Ith> alarm threshold 50 to 200 1 % F1 90
0359 Thermal overload time 1 to 200 1 mn F1 1
constant
035A I< 0-1 1 - F24 0
035B I< threshold 0 to 100 1 % In F1 20
035C I2> 0-1 1 - F24 0
035D I2> threshold 10 to 1 In/100 F1 20
4000
035E I2> time delay type 0 to 2 1 - F27 0
035F I2> IDMT type 0 to 9 1 - F3 1
0360 I2> TMS value 25 to 25 1/1000 F1 25
1500
Values Fault
range Value
0361 I2> K value (RI) 100 to 5 1/1000 F1 100
10000
0362 tI2> value 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 4
15000
0363 I2> Reset type 0–1 1 F27 0
0364 I2> RTMS value 25 to 25 1/1000 F1 25
3200
0365 I2> tRESET value 4 to 1 1/100 s F1 4
10000
0366 to Reserved
036E
036F tI< value 0 to 18000 1 1/100 s F1 0
0370 Recloser valid 0-1 1 F24 0
0371 CB position active 0-1 1 F1 0
0372-0373 Supervision window 1 to 1 1/100 s F18 0
60000
0374 External blocking input 0-1 1 F24 0
0375-0376 Reserved
0377 Dead time 1 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 1
30000
0378 Dead time 2 0 to 1 1/100 s F1 1
3000
0379-037A Dead time 3 0 to 1 1/100 s F18 1
60000
037B- Dead time 4 0 to 1 1/100 s F18 1
037C 60000
037D-037E Reclaim time 2 to 1 1/100 s F18 2
60000
037F-0380 Inhibit time 2 to 1 1/100 s F18 2
60000
0381 Recloser cycles for phase 0 to 4 1 F1 0
faults
0382 Recloser cycles for earth 0 to 4 1 F1 0
faults
0383 t I> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111
0384 t I>> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111
0385 t I>>> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111
0386 t Ie> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111
0387 t Ie>> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111
0388 t Ie>>> cycles 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111
configuration
0389 t Aux1 cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111
038A t Aux2 cycles configuration 0 to 2222 1 F49 1111
2.4.6 Page 4h : remote controls

Access in writing

range Value
0400 Remote control Remote control word 1 0 to 31 1 - F9 0
0401 Reserved
0402 Remote control word 2 0 to 127 1 - F39 0
(single output command)
0403 Remote control word 3 0 to 1 1 - F46 0
2.4.7 Pages 5h/6h
These pages are reserved
2.4.8 Page 7h
Access in quick reading only (MODBUS 07 function)

range Value
0700 Quick reading Relay status description 1 - F23 0
byte
2.4.9 Page 8h : time synchronisation
Access in writing for n words (function 16). The time synchronisation format is based
on 8 bits (4 words).
Timer @page Nb bits Values range Unit

Year pF+pf 8 2 year
Month 8 1 1 - 12 month
Day 8 1 1 – 31 day
Hour 8 1 0 - 23 hour
Minute 8 1 0 – 59 minute
Millisecond pF+pf 8 2 0 – 59999 ms
2.4.10 Mapping access characteristics

• Description of accessible addresses in reading of words (function 03 and 04).
PAGE 00h PAGE 01h PAGE 02h
0000h to 0060h 0100h to 01AFh 0200h to 027F
PAGE 03h PAGE 05h
0300h to 037Fh 0500h to 052Ah
• Definition of accessible addresses in writing of 1 word (function 06).
0100h to 01AFh 0200h to 027Fh 0300h to 037Fh
PAGE 04h PAGE 05h
0400h to 0402h 0500h to 052Ah
• Definition of accessible addresses in writing of n words (function 16).
0100h to 01AFh 0200h to 027Fh 0300h to 037Fh
PAGE 05h PAGE 08h
0500h to 052Ah 0800h to 0803h
• Definition of accessible addresses in reading of bits (function 01 and 02).
Warning:
The bits number must not be higher than 16. Addresses are given in bit addresses.
PAGE 00h PAGE 01h
0100h to 0250h 1500h to 1830h
• Definition of accessible addresses in writing of 1 bit (function 05).
Warning:
The bits number must not be higher than 16.
PAGE 04h
4000h to 400Bh
• Definition of accessible addresses in writing of n bits (function 15).
Warning :
The bits number must not be higher than 16.
PAGE 01h PAGE 04h
1500h to 1830h 4000h to 400Bh.
2.4.11 Pages 9h to 21h : disturbance record data (25 pages).

Access in words writing (function 03)
Each disturbance mapping page contain 250 words.
Address Contents
0900h to 09FAh 250 disturbance data words
0A00h to 0AFAh 250 disturbance data words
0B00h to 0BFAh 250 disturbance data words
0C00h to 0CFAh 250 disturbance data words
0D00h to 0DFAh 250 disturbance data words
0E00h to 0DFAh 250 disturbance data words
0F00h to 0FFAh 250 disturbance data words
1A00h to 1AFAh 250 disturbance data words
1B00h to 1BFAh 250 disturbance data words
1C00h to 1CFAh 250 disturbance data words
1D00h to 1DFAh 250 disturbance data words
1E00h to 1EFAh 250 disturbance data words
1F00h to 1FFAh 250 disturbance data words
NB: The disturbance data pages contain values of one channel from
one given disturbance record.
2.4.11.1 Meaning of each value channel

• IA, IB, IC and IE channels:
The value is an signed 16 bits word equivalent to the ADC value
Calculation formula for phase current values
Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. word 10, 11,
12 or 13) * phase primary CT ratio/phase internal CT ratio (mapping address 0007)
*√2
Calculation formula for earth current values
The formula depends of nominal earth current :
0.1 to 40 Ion range
Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10
or 14) * earth primary CT ratio/ earth internal CT ratio (mapping address
0008=800) *√2
0.01 to 8 Ion range
0008=3277) *√2
0.002 to 1 Ion range
0008=32700) *√2
• Frequency channel:
Time between two samples in microseconds
• Logic channels:
Logic channel Contents

Bit 0 Trip relay (RL1)
Bit 1 Output relay 2 (RL2)
Bit 4 Watchdog relay (RL0)
Bit 7 to bit 9 Reserved
Bit 10 Logic input 1 (EL1)
Bit 15 Reserved.
2.4.12 Page 22h : disturbance record index frame

Access in word reading (function 03)
Address Contents
2200h Disturbance data index frame
Disturbance record index frame
Word Contents
n° 1 Disturbance record number
n° 2 Disturbance record finish date (second)
n° 3 Disturbance record finish date (second)
n° 4 Disturbance record finish date (millisecond)
n° 5 Disturbance record finish date (millisecond)
n° 6 Disturbance record starting condition :
1 : tripping (RL1)
2 : instantaneous
3 : remote command
4 : logic input
n° 7 Frequency at the post-time beginning

2.4.13 Page 35h (addresses 3500h to 354Ah) : event record data (9 words)
Word n° 1: Event meaning
Word n° 2: MODBUS associated value
Word n° 3: MODBUS address
Word n° 4: Reserved
Words n° 5 & 6: Event date (second) number of seconds since 01/01/94
Words n° 7 & 8: Event date (millisecond)
Word n° 9: Acknowledge
0=event non acknowledged
1= event acknowledged)
Code Meaning of the event Type MODBUS address

00 No event -
01 Remote closing F9 013h
02 Remote tripping F9 013h
03 Disturbance recording start F9
04 Trip output delatch F9 013h
05 Setting change Address
06 Remote thermal reset F9
07 Maintenance Mode F9 ↑↓ 0400h
08 Control relay in maintenance mode F39 ↑↓ 013h
09 I> F17 ↑↓ 014h
10 I>> F17 ↑↓ 015h
11 I>>> F17 ↑↓ 016h
12 IE > F16 ↑↓ 017h
13 IE >> F16 ↑↓ 018h
14 IE >>> F16 ↑↓ 019h
15 Thermal overload alarm F37 ↑↓ 020h
16 Thermal overload threshold F37 ↑↓ 020h
17 tI> F17 ↑↓ 014h
18 tI>> F17 ↑↓ 015h
19 tI>>> F17 ↑↓ 016h
20 TIE > F16 ↑↓ 017h
21 TIE >> F16 ↑↓ 018h
22 tIE >>> F16 ↑↓ 019h
23 tI< F16 ↑↓ 021h
24 Broken conductor F38 ↑↓ 023h
25 t Aux 1 F38 ↑↓ 023h
26 t Aux 2 F38 ↑↓ 023h

27 CB failure F20 ↑↓ 023h
28 Selective scheme logic 1 F20 ↑↓ 011h
29 Selective scheme logic 2 F20 ↑↓ 011h
30 Blocking logic 1 F20 ↑↓ 011h
31 Blocking logic 2 F20 ↑↓ 011h
32 Setting group change F20 011h
33 52a F20 ↑↓ 011h
34 52b F20 ↑↓ 011h
35 Acknowledgement of the output relay latched, F20 ↑↓ 011h
by logic input
36 External CB failure F20 ↑↓ 011h
37 Cold load start F20 ↑↓ 011h
38 Change of input logic state F12 ↑↓ 010h
39 Thermal overload trip F37 013h
40 tI> trip F13 013h
41 tI>> trip F13 013h
42 tI>>> trip F13 013h
43 tIE > trip F13 013h
44 tIE >> trip F13 013h
45 tIE >>> trip F13 013h
46 tI< trip F13 013h
47 Broken conductor trip F13 013h
48 tAUX 1 trip F13 013h
49 tAUX 2 trip F13 013h
50 Output relays command F39 ↑↓ 013h
51 Front panel single alarm acknowledge -
52 Front panel all alarms acknowledge -
53 Remote single alarm acknowledge -
54 Remote all alarms acknowledge -
55 Major material alarm F45 ↑↓ 00Fh
56 Minor material alarm F45 ↑↓ 00Fh
57 I2> F16 ↑↓ 022h
58 tI2> F16 ↑↓ 022h
59 Working time F43 ↑↓ 028h
60 Operation numbers F43 ↑↓ 028h
61 Sum of switched square amps F43 ↑↓ 028h
62 Trip circuit supervision F43 ↑↓ 028h
63 Closing time F43 ↑↓ 028h

64 Reclose successful F43 ↑↓ 028h
65 Recloser locked F43 ↑↓ 028h
66 Recloser settings error F43 ↑↓ 028h
67 I2> trip F13 ↑↓ 013h
NOTA: The double arrow ↑↓ means the event is generated on event

occurrence (↑) and on event disappearance (↓).
On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to « 1 ».
On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to
« 0 ».
2.4.14 Page 36h
Most older event data
Address Contents
3600h Most older event data
2.4.15 Page 37h : fault record value data
Address Contents
3700h Fault value record n°1
Word n° 1 : Fault number

Words n° 2 & 3 : Fault date (second) number of seconds since 01/01/94
Words n° 4 & 5 : Fault date (millisecond)
Word n° 6 : Fault date (season)
0= winter
1= summer
2= undefined
Word n° 7 : Active setting group during the fault (1 or 2)
Word n° 8 : Fault origin
0= none
1= phase A
2= phase B
3= phase C
4= phases A-B
5= phases A-C
6= phases B-C
7= phases A-B-C
8= earth
Word n° 9: Fault recording starting origin
Fault nature code meaning
Code Fault origin

00 Null event
01 Remote trip
02 Thermal overload trip
03 tI> trip
04 tI>> trip
05 tI>>> trip
06 tlE> trip
07 tlE> trip
08 tlE>> trip
09 tI< trip
10 Broken conductor trip
11 t Aux 1 trip
12 T Aux 2 trip
13 tI2> trip
Word n° 10: Fault value current (nominal value)

Word n° 11: Phase A current value (nominal value)
Word n° 12: Phase B current value (nominal value)
Word n° 13: Phase C current value (nominal value)
Word n° 14: Earth current value (nominal value)
Word n° 15: Acknowledge of fault 0 : fault non-acknowledged
1 : fault acknowledged
2.4.15.1 Calculation formula for phase current values

Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. word 10, 11,
12 or 13) * phase primary CT ratio/ phase internal CT ratio (mapping address 0007)
2.4.15.2 Calculation formula for earth current values

The formula depends of nominal earth current :
0.1 to 40 Ion range
0008=800)
0.01 to 8 Ion range
0008=3277)
0.002 to 1 Ion range
0008=32700)
2.4.16 Page 3Eh : most older Fault record value data
Address Contents
3E00h Most older Fault record
2.4.17 Pages 38h to 3Ch

Selection of the disturbance record and channel (11 words are uploaded for each
address reading)
Address Disturbance record number Format

3800h 1 IA
3801h 1 IB
3802h 1 IC
3803h 1 IE
3804h 1 Frequency
3805h 1 Logic input and outputs
3900h 2 IA
3901h 2 IB
3902h 2 IC
3903h 2 IE
3904h 2 Frequency
3905h 2 Logic input and outputs
3A00h 3 IA
3A01h 3 IB
3A02h 3 IC
3A03h 3 IE
3A04h 3 Frequency
3A05h 3 Logic input and outputs
3B00h 4 IA
3B01h 4 IB
3B02h 4 IC
3B03h 4 IE
3B04h 4 Frequency
3B05h 4 Logic input and outputs
3C00h 1 IA
3C01h 1 IB
3C02h 1 IC
3C03h 1 IE
3C04h 1 Frequency
3C05h 1 Logic input and outputs
Word n° 1 : Number of samples included in the mapping

Word n° 2 : Sample number in pre-time
Word n° 3 : Sample number in post-time
Word n° 4 : Phase primary CT ratio
Word n° 5 : Phase secondary CT ratio
Word n° 6 : Earth primary CT ratio
Word n° 7 : Earth secondary CT ratio
Word n° 8 : Phase internal CT ratio
Word n° 9 : Earth internal CT ratio
Word n° 10 : Mapping last page number
Word n° 11 : Number of words in the mapping last page
2.4.17.1 Calculation formula for phase current values

Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. adress 3800h,
3801h or 3802h) * phase primary CT ratio * (1 / internal phase ratio) * √2
2.4.17.2 Calculation formula for earth current values

Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. adress 3803h) *
earth primary CT ratio * (1 / internal earth ratio) * √2
2.4.18 Pages 3Dh : number of disturbance records available
Address Contents
3D00h Number of disturbance records available
Word n° 1 : Number of disturbance records available

Word n° 2: Oldest disturbance record number (n)
Words n° 3 & 4 : Oldest disturbance record date (second)
Words n° 5 & 6 : Oldest disturbance record date (millisecond)
Word n° 7 : Disturbance record starting origin
1= trip relay (RL1)
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logic input
Word n° 8 : Acknowledge
Word n° 9 : Disturbance record previous number (n+1)
Words n° 10 & 11: Previous disturbance record date (second)
Words n° 12 & 13: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond)

1= trip relay (RL1)
3= remote command
4= logic input
1= trip relay (RL1)
3= remote command
4= logic input
1= trip relay (RL1)
3= remote command
4= logic input
1= trip relay (RL1)
3= remote command
4= logic input
2.4.19 Description of the mapping format, MiCOM P124 Dual-powered
CODE DESCRIPTION
F1 Unsigned integer – numerical data : 1 - 65535
F2 Signed integer – numerical data : -32768 - 32767
F3 Unsigned integer – curves type
0 : STI (IEC)
1 : SI (IEC)
2 : VI (IEC)
3 : EI (IEC)
4 : LTI (IEC)
5: STI (C02)
6: MI (ANSI)
7 : LTI (CO8)
8 : VI (ANSI)
9 : EI (ANSI)
10 : RC Rectifier curve
F3' Unsigned integer – Laborelec curve type
0 : curve 1
1 : curve 2
2 : curve 3
F4 Unsigned integer : MODBUS speed
0 : 300
1 : 600
2 : 1200
3 : 2400
4 : 4800
5 : 9600
6 : 19200
7 : 38400
F5 Unsigned integer : parity
0 : without
1 : even
2 : odd
F6 Unsigned integer : Tripping configuration
bit 0 : tI>
bit 1 : tI>>
bit 2 : tI>>>
bit 3 : tlE>
bit 4 : tlE >>
bit 5 : tlE >>>
bit 6 : I<
bit 7 : tIth>
bit 8 : Broken conductor detection
bit 9 : t Aux 1
bit 10 : t Aux 2
bit 11 : tI2>
bits 12 to 15 : reserved
F7 Reserved
CODE DESCRIPTION
F8 Unsigned integer : Latching configuration
bit 0 : I> latching
bit 1 : I>>
bit 2 : I>>>
bit 3 : lE>
bit 4 : lE>>
bit 5 : lE>>>
bit 6 : I<
bit 7 : tIth>
bit 9 : t Aux 1
bit 10 : t Aux 2
bit 11 : tI2>
F8' Unsigned integer : Blocking logic configuration
bit 0 : I> blocking
bit 1 : I>>
bit 2 : I>>>
bit 3 : lE>
bit 4 : lE>>
bit 5 : lE>>>
bit 6 : reserved
bit 7 : tIth>
bit 9 : t Aux 1
bit 10 : t Aux 2
bit 11 : tI2>
F9 Unsigned integer : Remote control 1
bit 0 : Tripping contact delatched
bit 1 : 1st alarm acknowledge
bit 2 : All alarms acknowledge
bit 3 : Remote tripping
bit 4 : Remote closing
bit 5 : Setting group change
bit 6 : Thermal state reset
bit 7 : Peak and rolling value reset
bit 8 : Disturbance record remote start
bit 9 : Maintenance mode
bit 10 : Recloser counter reset
bit 11 : Recloser reset
bit 12 : Local maintenance acknowledge
bit 13 : Oldest event acknowledge
bit 14 : Oldest fault acknowledge
bit 15 : Hardware Sram alarm acknowledge
F10 2 characters ASCII
32 –127 = ASCII character1
32 – 127 = ASCII character 2
F11 Unsigned integer : triggered output type
0 : stricker output
1 : trip output relay, RL1
2 : stricker + trip output relay RL1 outputs
CODE DESCRIPTION
F12 Unsigned integer : Logic input status
it 0 : logic input number 1
bit 1 : logic input number 2
F13 Unsigned integer : logic outputs status
bit 0 : watchdog RL0
bit 1 : logic output RL1 (tripping)
bit 2 : stricker output
bit 3 : V1 flag command
bit 4 : V1 flag reset
F14 Unsigned integer : logic outputs configuration
bit 0 : selection logic output number RL2
F15 Unsigned integer : logical input allocation
bit 0 : delatch allocation
bit 1 : allocation 52 a
bit 2 : allocation 52 b
bit 3 : allocation external CB failure
bit 4 : allocation external input 1
bit 5 : allocation external input 2
bit 6 : allocation logic blocking 1
bit 7 : allocation logic blocking 2
bit 8 : allocation disturbance start
bit 9 : allocation cold load start
bit 10 : allocation selective scheme logic 1
bit 11 allocation selective scheme logic 2
bit 12 : allocation change of setting group
bit 13 : allocation recloser locked
bit 14 : allocation thermal state reset
bit 15 : allocation trip circuit supervision
F15' Unsigned integer : logical input allocation (next)
bit 0 : start CB fail timer
F16 Unsigned integer : threshold earth information status
bit 0 : reserved
bit 1 : reserved
bit 2 : reserved
bit 3 : reserved
bit 4 : reserved
bit 5 : Instantaneous information IE> or IE>> or IE>>>
bit 6 : Tripping information tIE> or tIE>> or tIE>>>
CODE DESCRIPTION
F17 Unsigned integer : threshold phase information status
bit 0 : reserved
bit 1 : Instantaneous IA
bit 2 : Instantaneous IB
bit 3 : Instantaneous IC
bit 4 : reserved
bit 5 : Instantaneous information I> or I>> or I>>>
bit 6 : Tripping information tI> or tI>> or tI>>>
F18 Long integer
F19 Unsigned integer : LEDs allocation
bit 0 : I>
bit 1 : tI>
bit 2 : I>>
bit 3 : tI>>
bit 4 : I>>>
bit 5 : tI>>>
bit 6 : IE>
bit 7 : tIE>
bit 8 : IE>>
bit 9 : tIE>>
bit 10 : IE>>>
bit 11 : tIE>>>
bit 12 : Thermal overload trip
bit 13 : tI2>
bit 14 : Broken conductor trip
bit 15 : CB failure
bit 16 : Logic input 1
bit 21 : Recloser running
bit 22 : Recloser locked
bit 23 : t Aux1
bit 24 : t Aux2
CODE DESCRIPTION
F20 Unsigned integer : logic input data status
bit 0 : Selective scheme logic 1
bit 1 : Selective scheme logic 2
bit 2 : Relay delatch
bit 3 : CB position (52 a)
bit 4 : CB position (52 b)
bit 5 : External CB failure
bit 6 : External 1
bit 7 : External 2
bit 8 : Blocking logic 1
bit 9 : Blocking logic 2
bit 10 : Disturbance record start
bit 11 : Cold load start
bit 12 : Setting group change
bit 13 : Recloser locked
bit 14 : Thermal state reset
bit 15 : Trip circuit supervision
F21 Unsigned integer : software version
10 : Version 1.A
11 : Version 1.B
20 : Version 2.A
F22 Unsigned integer : internal logic data
bit 0 : Blocking
bit 1 : reserved
F23 Unsigned integer : relay status
bit 0 : Relay status (major alarm)
bit 1 : Minor material alarm
bit 2 : Presence of non-acknowledged event
bit 3 : Synchronisation state
bit 4 : Presence of non-acknowledged disturbance record
bit 5 : Presence of non-acknowledged fault record
bit 6 : reserved
bit 7 : reserved
F24 0 : Out of service
1 : Healthy
F25 2 ASCII characters
F26 1 : IA measurement display (True RMS)
2 : IB measurement display (True RMS)
3 : IC measurement display (True RMS)
4 : IN measurement display (True RMS)
F27 0 : DMT time delay
1 : IDMT time delay
2 : RI time delay
F27' 0 : DMT time delay
1 : IDMT time delay
2 : RI time delay
3 : Laborelec curve
F28 0 : 7 data bits
1 : 8 data bits
CODE DESCRIPTION
F29 0 : 1 stop bit
1 : 2 stop bits.
F30 0 : Communication non-available
1 : Communication available
F31 Unsigned integer : Number of available event records
0 : None
1 : 1 event record available
2 : 2 event records available
F32 Unsigned integer :
0 : Disturbance record start condition on INSTANTANEOUS
1 : Disturbance record start condition on TRIPPING
F33 Cold load start thresholds
bit 0 : tI>
bit 1 : tI>>
bit 2 : tI>>>
bit 3 : tIE>
bit 4 : tIE>>
bit 5 : tIE>>>
bit 7 : tI2>
bit 8 to 15 : reserved
F34 Reserved
F35 0 : No disturbance record uploaded
1 : Disturbance record upload running
F36 Memorised flags of non acknowledged alarms :
bit 0 : IE>
bit 1 : tIE>
bit 2 : IE>>
bit 3 : tIE>>
bit 4 : IE>>>
bit 5 : tIE>>>
bit 6 : Thermal overload alarm
bit 8 : Broken conductor
bit 9 : CB failure
bit 10 : reserved
bit 11 : I2>
bit 12 : tI2>
bit 13 : t Aux 1
bit 14 : t Aux 2
bit 15 : reserved
F37 Unsigned integer : Thermal overload information
bit 0 : Thermal overload alarm
CODE DESCRIPTION
F38 Unsigned integer :
bit 0 : reserved
bit 1 : CB failure
bit 2 : Pole A opening
bit 3 : Pole B opening
bit 4 : Pole C opening
bit 5 : Broken conductor
bit 6 : t Aux 1
bit 7 : t Aux 2
bit 8 : Broken conductor time delay
bit 9 : CB failure time delay
bit 10 : Cold load pick up time delay
bit 11 : CB alarms or bits 0,1,2,4 of F43
F39 Unsigned integer : output relay remote word in maintenance mode
bit 0 : RL1 (trip)
bit 1 : RL2
bit 2 : RL3
bit 3 : RL0 (watchdog)
bit 4 : RL4
bit 5 : RL5
bit 6 : RL6
F40 Unsigned integer : selective scheme logic configuration
bit 0 : tI>>
bit 1 : tI>>>
bit 2 : tlE>>
bit 3 : tlE>>
F41 0 : Front and rear MODBUS communication
1 : Front MODBUS and rear Courier communication
F42 5, 10, 15, 30 or 60 minutes
F43 bit 0 : CB operating time overreach
bit 1 : CB operation number overreach
bit 2 : Square Amps sum overreach
bit 3 : Trip circuit self-test
bit 4 : CB closing time overreach
bits 5 to 10 : Reserved
F44 bit 0 : CB, operating time overreach, memorised alarm
bit 1 : CB operation number overreach, memorised alarm
bit 2 : Square Amps sum overreach, memorised alarm
bit 3 : Trip circuit self-test, memorised alarm
bit 4 : CB closing time overreach, memorised alarm
F45 Unsigned integer : relay status
bit 0 : Watchdog
bit 1 : Communicatio n failure
bit 2 : EEPROM data failure
bit 3 : Analogue failure
bit 4 : Datation failure
bit 5 : EEPROM calibration failure
bit 6 : SRAM failure
bit 7 : reserved
CODE DESCRIPTION
F46 bit 0 : Io harmonic calculation
bit 1 : trip number reset
F49 bit 0 : cycle 1 configuration (trip followed by reclosing cycle)
bit 1 : cycle 1 configuration (no trip in cycle 1)
bit 2 to bit 3 : reserved
bit 4 : cycle 2 configuration (trip followed by reclosing cycle)
F50 Unsigned integer : CTs and model configuration
"A" : model standard, CT 1A
"B" : model standard, CT 5A
"C" : model sensitive, CT 1A
"D" : model sensitive, CT 5A
F51 Unsigned integer : option configuration
0 : 1 electromagnetic flag
1 : 5 electromagnetic flags
2 : 5 flags + autorecloser
F52 Unsigned integer : electromechanical flags status (P124D)
bit 0 : V2 flag
bit 2 : V3 flag
bit 4 : V4 flag
bit 6 : V5 flag
F53 Unsigned integer : internal data 2
bit 0 : CB fail by external input
F54 Unsigned integer : datation format
0 : private format
1 : IEC format
F55 0 : setting group change either on edge of digital input, or on
remote command, or of the relay front
1 : setting group change on level of digital input
2.4.20 Disturbance record additional information
2.4.20.1 MODBUS request definition used for disturbance record

To upload a disturbance record, the following requests must be done in the exact
given order :
1. (optional) : Send a request to know the number of disturbance records available
in SRAM.
2. (compulsory) : Send a request with the record number and the channel number.
3. (compulsory) : Send one or several requests to upload the disturbance record
data. It depends of the number of samples.
4. (compulsory) : Send a request to upload the index frame.
2.4.20.2 Request to know the number of disturbance records in SRAM
Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h 3Dh 00 00 24h xx xx
This request may be answered an error message with the error code :
EVT_NOK(OF) : No record available
NOTA : If there is less than 5 records available, the answer will contains
zero in the non-used words.
2.4.20.3 Service requests

This request must be send before uploading the disturbance record channel samples.
It allows to know the record number and the channel number to upload. It allows
also to know the number of samples in the channel.

xx 03h Refer to 00 0Bh xx xx
mapping
This request may be answered an error message with two different error codes :
CODE_DEF_RAM(02) : SRAM failure
CODE_EVT_NOK(03) : no disturbance record available in SRAM
2.4.20.4 Disturbance record upload request

xx 03h Refer to 01 to 7Dh xx xx
mapping
This request may be answered an error message with two different error codes :
CODE_DEP_DATA(04) : the required disturbance data number is
greater than the memorised number.
CODE_SERV_NOK(05) : the service request for disturbance record and
channel number has not been send.
2.4.20.5 Index frame upload request

xx 03h 22h 00 00 07h xx xx
This request may be answered an error message with an error code :

CODE_SERV_NOK(05) : the service request for disturbance record and
channel number has not been send.
Two ways can be followed to retrieve an event record :
− Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event.
− Send a request to retrieve a dedicated event.
2.4.21 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event

xx 03h 36h 00 00 09h xx xx
This event request may be answered an error message with the error code :
EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) : An event is being written into the saved RAM.
NOTA : On event retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the event
record acknowledgement :
a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval.
b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event
retrieval.
a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval :
The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be
set to 0. On event retrieval, this event record is acknowledged.
b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval :
set to 1. On event retrieval, this event record is not acknowledged.
To acknowledge this event, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit
13 of this frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.
2.4.22 Request to retrieve a dedicated event

xx 03h Refer to 00 09h xx xx
mapping
This event request may be answered an error message with the error code :
EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) : An event is being written into the saved RAM.
NOTA : This event retrieval does not acknowledge this event.
2.4.23 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records
Two ways can be followed to retrieve a fault record :
− Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record.
− Send a request to retrieve a dedicated fault record.
2.4.23.1 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record

xx 03h 3Eh 00 00 0Fh xx xx
NOTA : On fault retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the fault

record acknowledgement:
a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval.
b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on event
retrieval.
a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval :
set to 0. On fault retrieval, this fault record is acknowledged.
b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval :
set to 1. On fault retrieval, this fault record is not acknowledged.
To acknowledge this fault, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 14
of this frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.
2.4.23.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record

xx 03h Refer to 00 0Fh xx xx
mapping
NOTA : This fault value retrieval does not acknowledge this fault record.
3. K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE

The serial communications are transmitted on K-Bus, a multi-drop network proposin
an instantaneous interface with IEC 870 - 5 - FT1.2 standards. The language and th
communication protocol used are Courier. This concept permits especially to the
generic programmes of the principal units to access to a high number of different
relay types without need to change permanently the principal unit program for each
relay type. The relays forms a distributed database in which the principal workstation
proceeds to a selective call of the slave relays in order to know all necessary
information.
Courier has a concept for the functions with a selective call system which allows not a
slave periphery to communicate directly with the central unit when one shall informs
another about a particular event. The slave workstation has to wait that the principal
workstation asks for the information. With Courier each information is given into a
box with a code of the length and the database type. In knowing the database format
the reception periphery can read them.
3.1 K-BUS
K-Bus is a communication system developed for connecting the slave peripheries in
remoting on the central unit, permitting them to execute all remote monitoring and
remote control functions using the appropriated communication language. K-Bus is
not able to permit a direct communication between the slave peripheries. Only a
communication between the central unit and the slave peripheries can be established.
The principal characteristics of the K-Bus are his profitability, his high security level,
his installation facility and his user friendliness.
3.1.1 K-Bus transmission layer
The communication port is supported on the reception levels and the voltage
transmission RS485 with galvanic isolation assured by a transformer. A selective call
protocol is used. No relay unit is allowed to transmit before having received a
validation message without any error detection. The transmission is synchronous on a
pair of isolated waves. The data are coded FM0 with a clock signal for eliminate all
CC-component, allows the signal to cross the transformers.
With the exception of the central units, each network node is passive. No defective
unit from the system can interfere with the communications established with the other
units. The message format is HDLC. The data transmission speed is 64 kbits/s.
3.1.2 K-Bus connection
The connection on the K-Bus port is realised by screwed terminals of 4 mm of MIDOS
standards or by FASTON-connectors. A cabled pair is sufficient to realise the
connection, knowing that the polarity is not important. It is recommended to use an
external screen earth linked at the end of the principal workstation only. The screen
has to be fixed with a M4 screw following the wiring scheme (cf. Appendice 1 of the
Technical Guide). The functioning of the K-BUS network is guaranteed for 32 units
connected on 1000 meters of cables. Thanks to the data code method, the polarity of
the Bus cable connection is not important.
NOTE : The K-Bus network has to finish with a 150 ohms resistance on
each end of the Bus. The principal workstation can be placed
anywhere on the network. This command point has to be unique
3.1.3 Auxiliary equipment

For communication with the relay it is necessary to have at least one converter case
K-Bus/IEC870-5 of the type KITZ and a computer suitable software, an
interconnection cable RS232 for connecting the KITZ to the computer and a software
conform to the specification of the Courier protocol.
3.2 Relay courier database
The Courier database is two dimensional structure with each cell in the database
being referenced by a row and column address. Both the column and the row can
take a range from 0 to 255. Addresses in the database are specified as hexadecimal
values, eg 0A02 is column 0A (10 decimal) row 02. Associated settings/data will be
part of the same column, row zero of the column contains a text string to identify the
contents of the column.
3.2.1 Cell reference
Values
Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step
(* : default)
00 00 SYSTEM DATA
01 Language Ver>: Indexed String 0 Lang1 (French) Setting 0/3/1
1 Lang2 (English) *
2 Lang3 (German)
3 Lang4 (Spanish)
02 Password ASCII Password(4 bytes) AAAA Setting 32/127/1
03 Fnlinks: NON IMPLEMENTE
04 Description ASCII Text (6 bytes) “ P124-D ”* Setting 32/127/1

05 Plant Reference ASCII Text (4 bytes) “ Pref ” Setting 32/127/1
06 Model Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) “ Model Number ” Data
07 Firmware Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) “ Firmware Number ” Data
08 Serial Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) “ Serial Number ” Data
09 Frequency Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) XXXX Hz Setting 50/60/10
0A Communication Level Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1 Data
0B Address Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* Setting 1/255/1
0C Plant Status Word: NON IMPLEMENTE
0D Control Status Word: NON IMPLEMENTE
0E Setting Group Unsigned Integer Data

0F Load shed Stage: NON IMPLEMENTE
10 Circuit Breaker Control A1+, A2: NON IMPLEMENTE
11 Software Reference ASCII Text (16 characters) Data

12-1F Unused, reserved
20 Logic Input Status Binary flag (5 bits) 0: log input 1 Data

1: log input 2
2: log input 3
3: log input 4
4: log input 5
Values
(* : default)
21 Relay Output Status Binary flag (7 bits) 0: relay 1 (trip) Data
1: watchdog relay
2: relay 2
3: relay 3
4: relay 4
5 : relay 5
6 : relay 6
22 Alarm Binary flag (16 bits) 0: reserved Data
1: Comm err
2: Eeprom err data
3: Ct error
4: Eeprom err calib
5: Clock error
6: Bbram error
7 to 15: reserved
23 Pseudo Logic Input Status group 1 Binary flag (16 bits) 0: I> Data
1: I>>
2: I>>>
3: I0>
4: I0>>
5: I0>>>
6: t I>
7: t I>>
8: t I>>>
9: t I0>
10: t I0>>
11: t I0>>>
12: Thermal Alarm
13: Therm. Overload
14: t I<
15: reserved
Values
(* : default)
24 Pseudo Logic Input Status group 2 Binary flag (16 bits) 0: Broken Conductor Data
1: t Aux 1
2: t Aux 2
3: Breaker Fail.
4: Iinv >
5: t Iinv>
6: Open operating time
7: Trip operation Nb
8: SA 2 n
9: SW Trip Circuit
10: Close operating time
11: Successful
autoreclose
12: Locked autorecloser
13: Autorecloser conf. fail
14: reserved
15: reserved
01 00 USER CONTROL
01 Remote control 1 Binary flag (15 bits) 0: Unlock trip cont.* Setting 0/65535/1
1: Ack first alarm
2 : Ack all alarms
3 : TRIP
4 : CLOSE
5 : Setting Change
6 : Th. State Reset
7 : RMS over&max Reset
8 : Dist. Rec. Trig
9 : Maintenance Start
10 : Recloser timer Reset
11 : Recloser Reset
12 : Manual Ack mode
13 : Ack. older event
14 : Ack. older default
15 : SRAM def . ack.
Values
(* : default)
02 Remote control 2 Binary flag (10 bits) 0 : Reserved Setting 0/1023/1
1 : Reserved
2 : Reserved
3 : Relay : Special
Tripping
4 : Watchdog Relay
5 : Relay 1
6 : Relay 2
7 : Relay 3
8 : Relay 4
9 : Relay 5
03 Remote control 3 Binary flag (2 bits) 0 : Reset I0 Harmonic Setting 0/3/1
1 : Unlock TRIP Relay
02 00 VIEW RECORDS
01 Record number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 5 Setting 1/5/1
02 Occur date Unsigned Integer (2 bytes)
03 Active set group Unsigned Integer (2 bytes)
04 Phase in fault ASCII Text
05 Fault Id ASCII Text
06 Magnitude Courier floating point
number
07 Ia magnitude Courier floating point
number
08 Ib magnitude Courier floating point
number
09 Ic magnitude Courier floating point
number
0A In magnitude Courier floating point
number
Values
(* : default)
03 00 MEASUREMENTS
01 IA RMS Courier floating point Data
number
02 IB RMS Courier floating point Data
number
03 IC RMS Courier floating point Data
number
04 I0 RMS Courier floating point Data
number
05 Idirect Courier floating point Data
number
06 IINV Courier floating point Data
number
07 Ratio Idir / Iinv Courier floating point Data
number
08 THERMAL STATE (Rst) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data
(%)
09 FREQUENCY Courier floating point Data
number
0A Rst MAX & MOY RMS
0B MAX RMS IA Courier floating point Data
number
0C MAX RMS IB Courier floating point Data
number
0D MAX RMS IC Courier floating point Data
number
0E IA RMS AVERAGE Courier floating point Data
number
0F IB RMS AVERAGE Courier floating point Data
number
10 IC RMS AVERAGE Courier floating point Data
number
Values
(* : default)
11 IN – fn (I0 Harmonic) (Rst) Courier floating point Data
number
12 Trip Number (Rst) Courier floating point Data
number
04 00 RECLOSER STATISTICS (Rst)
01 TOTAL CYCLE NUMBER Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data
02 CYCLE 1 NUMBER Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data
06 DEFINITIVE TRIP NUMBER Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data
07 RECLOSE ORDER NUMBER Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data
05 00 PROCESS: dans versions >
06 00 SW MONITORING
01 Rst SAn Ix
02 SA2 IA Courier floating point Data
number
03 SA2 IB Courier floating point Data
number
04 SA2 IC Courier floating point Data
number
05 SW operation nb Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data
06 SW operation time Courier floating point 0.0 s Data
number
07 SW Closing time Courier floating point Data
number
Values
(* : default)
08 00 TIME:
01 Date/Time IEC870 Time & Date Data
0E 00 CT RATIOS
01 Phase CT Primary Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1000 * Setting 1/9999/1
03 Neutral CT Primary Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1000 * Setting 1/9999/1
0F 00 SETTING GROUPS
01 Select setting group Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* Setting 1/2
02 Group 1 visible Indexed String 0 : YES * Setting 0 (YES) / 1 (NO)
1 : NO
03 Group 2 visible Indexed String 0 : YES Setting 0 (YES) / 1 (NO)
1 : NO *
Protection Group n° 1
20 00 PHASE OVERCURRENT
01 Stage 1 Overcurrent (Sub Heading)
02 Max I> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
03 Threshold I> Courier floating point 0.1 In * 2002=1 Setting 0.1/4.0/0.1
number
04 Temporisation Type Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 2002=1 Setting 0/2/1
1 1 : inverse time
2 2: RI curve
05 Curve type Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 2004=1 Setting 0/9/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
06 TMS Courier floating point 0.025 * 2004=1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025
number
Values
(* : default)
07 K Courier floating point 0.1 * 2004=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
08 Tempo I> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2004=0 Setting 0/180.0/0.01
number
09 Tempo reset type Indexed String 0 : definite time 2004=1 and Setting 0/1
1 : inverse time 2005 >= 5
and 2005
<= 9
0A RTMS Courier floating point 0.025 * 2009 = 1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025
number
0B T RESET Courier floating point 0.04 * 2009 = 0 Setting 0.04/100/0.01
number
0C-0F Reserved
11 Max I>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
12 Threshold I>> Courier floating point 0.50 In * 2011=1 Setting 0.5/40.0/0.05
number
13 Tempo I>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2011=1 Setting 0/180.0/0.01
number
14-1F Reserved
21 Max I>>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
22 Threshold I>>> Courier floating point 0.50 In * 2021=1 Setting 0.5/40.0/0.05
number
23 Tempo I>>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2021=1 Setting 0/180.0/0.01
number
21 00 EARTH FAULT
02 Max I0> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
03 Threshold I0> Courier floating point 0.01 I0n* 2102=1 Setting 0.01/1.0/0.005
number
Values
(* : default)
04 Tempo Type Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 2102=1 Setting 0/2/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
05 Curve Type Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 2104=1 Setting 1/10/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
number
number
08 Tempo I0> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2104=0 Setting 0/180.0/0.01
number
09 Tempo reset Type Indexed String 0 : definite time 2104=1 and Setting 0/1
and 2105
<= 9
number
0B T RESET Courier floating point 0.04 * 2109 = 0 Setting 0.04/100/0.01
number
0C-0F Reserved
11 Max I0>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
12 Threshold I0>> Courier floating point 0.01 I0n* 2111=1 Setting 0.01/8.0/0.005
number
Values
(* : default)
13 Tempo I0>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2111=1 Setting 0/180.0/0.01
number
14-1F Reserved
21 Max I0>>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
22 Threshold I0>>> Courier floating point 0.01 I0n * 2121=1 Setting 0.01/8.0/0.005
number
23 Tempo I0>>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2121=1 Setting 0/180.0/0.01
number
22 00 THERMAL OVERLOAD
01 Ith> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 Threshold Ith> Courier floating point 0.20 Ith* 2201=1 Setting 0.01/3.2/0.01
number
03 K Ith> Courier floating point 1.05 * 2201=1 Setting 1.0/1.50/0.01 In
number
04 θ TRIP Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 100 % * 2201=1 Setting 50 / 200/ 1 %
05 θ ALARM ? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled 2201=1 Setting 0/1/1
06 θ ALARM Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 90 % * 2205 =1 Setting 50 / 200/ 1 %
07 Thermal constant Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* 2201=1 Setting 1/ 200 / 1 mn
23 00 MIN I<
01 I< Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 Threshold I< Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 20 %In * 2301=1 Setting 2 / 100 / 1 %In
24 00 NEGATIVE CURRENT
01 Iinv> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 Threshold Iinv> Courier floating point 0.1 In * 2401 = 1 Setting 0.1/40.0/0.01 In
number
03 Temporisation Type Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 2401 = 1 Setting 0/2/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
Values
(* : default)
04 Curve type Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 2401 = 1 Setting 0/9/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
number
06 K (RI) Courier floating point 0.1 * 2403=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
07 Tempo Iinv> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2403=0 Setting 0/180.0/0.01
number
08 Reset tempo type Indexed String 0 : definite time 2403=1 and Setting 0/1/1
and 2404
<= 9
09 RTMS Courier floating point 0.025 * 2408 = 1 Setting 0.025/3.2/0.025
number
0A T RESET Courier floating point 0.04 * 2408 = 0 Setting 0.04/100/0.01
number
25 00 AUTORECLOSER
01 Autorecloser Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 State circuit breaker Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled 2501 = 1 Setting 0/1/1
03 Control window Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2502 = 1 Setting 0.01 / 600.00 / 0.01 s
number
04 External blocking Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled 2501 = 1 Setting 0/1/1
07 Temporisation cycle 1 Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2501 = 1 Setting 0.01 / 300.00 / 0.01 s
number
Values
(* : default)
number
number
0A Temporisation cycle 4 Courier floating point 0.01 s * 2501 = 1 Setting 0.01 / 600.00 / 0.01 s
number
0B Reclaim TIME Courier floating point 0.02 s * 2501 = 1 Setting 0.02 / 600.00 / 0.01 s
number
0C Inhibition time Courier floating point 0.02 s * 2501 = 1 Setting 0.02 / 600.00 / 0.01 s
number
0D Number of short circuit cycle Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* 2501 = 1 Setting 0/4/1
0E Number of earth fault cycle Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* 2501 = 1 Setting 0/4/1
0F Cycles tI> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 2501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4 bit
group
10 Cycles tI>> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 2501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4 bit
group
11 Cycles tI>>> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 2501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4 bit
group
12 Cycles tI0> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 2501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4 bit
group
13 Cycles tI0>> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 2501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4 bit
group
14 Cycles tI0>>> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 2501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4 bit
group
15 Cycles tAux1> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 2501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4 bit
group
group
Values
(* : default)
Protection Group n° 2
40 00 PHASE OVERCURRENT
02 Max I> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
03 Threshold I> Courier floating point 0.1 In * 4002=1 Setting 0.1/4.0/0.01
number
04 Tempo Type Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 4002=1 Setting 0/2/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
number
number
08 Tempo I> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4004=0 Setting 0/180.0/0.01
number
09 Reset tempo type Indexed String 0 : definite time 4004=1 and Setting 0/1
and 4005
<= 9
number
0B T RESET Courier floating point 0.04 * 4009 = 0 Setting 0.04/100.0/0.01
number
Values
(* : default)
0C-0F Reserved
11 Max I>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
12 Threshold I>> Courier floating point 0.50 In * 4011=1 Setting 0.5/40.0/0.05
number
13 Tempo I>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4011=1 Setting 0/180.0/0.01
number
14-1F Reserved
21 Max I>>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
22 Threshold I>>> Courier floating point 0.50 In * 4021=1 Setting 0.5/40.0/0.05
number
23 Tempo I>>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4021=1 Setting 0/180.0/0.01
number
41 00 EARTH FAULT
02 Max I0> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
03 Threshold I0> Courier floating point 0.01 I0n* 4102=1 Setting 0.01/1.0/0.005
number
04 Temporisation Type Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 4102=1 Setting 0/2/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
05 Curve type Indexed String 0 STI (CEI) * 4104=1 Setting 0/9/1
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
Values
(* : default)
number
number
08 Tempo I0> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4104=0 Setting 0/180.0/0.01
number
09 Tempo reset Type Indexed String 0 : definite time 4104=1 and Setting 0/1
and 4105
<= 9
number
0B T RESET Courier floating point 0.04 * 4109 = 0 Setting 0.04/100.0/0.01
number
0C-0F Reserved
11 Max I0>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
12 Threshold I0>> Courier floating point 0.01 I0n* 4111=1 Setting 0.01/8.0/0.005
number
13 Tempo I0>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4111=1 Setting 0/180.0/0.01
number
14-1F Reserved
21 Max I0>>> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
22 Threshold I0>>> Courier floating point 0.01 I0n * 4121=1 Setting 0.01/8.0/0.005
number
23 Tempo I0>>> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4121=1 Setting 0/180.0/0.01
number
42 00 THERMAL OVERLOAD
01 Ith> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
Values
(* : default)
02 Threshold Ith> Courier floating point 0.20 Ith* 4201=1 Setting 0.01/3.2/0.01
number
03 K Ith> Courier floating point 1.05 * 4201=1 Setting 1.0/1.50/0.01 In
number
04 θ TRIP Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 100 % * 4201=1 Setting 50 / 200/ 1 %
05 θ ALARM ? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled 4201=1 Setting 0/1/1
06 θ ALARM Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 90 % * 4205 =1 Setting 50 / 200/ 1 %
07 Thermal constant Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* 4201=1 Setting 1/ 200 / 1 mn
43 00 MIN I<
01 I< Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 Threshold I< Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 20 %In * 4301=1 Setting 2 / 100 / 1 %In
44 00 NEGATIVE CURRENT
01 Iinv> Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 Threshold Iinv> Courier floating point 0.1 In * 4401 = 1 Setting 0.1/40.0/0.1 In
number
03 Temporisation type Indexed String 0 0: definite time * 4401 = 1 Setting 0/2/1
1 1: inverse time
2 2: RI curve
1 SI (CEI)
2 VI (CEI)
3 EI (CEI)
4 LTI (CEI)
5 STI (CO2)
6 MI (ANSI)
7 LTI (CO8)
8 VI (ANSI)
9 EI (ANSI)
number
06 K (RI) Courier floating point 0.1 * 4403=2 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.005
number
Values
(* : default)
07 Tempo Iinv> Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4403=0 Setting 0/180.0/0.01
number
08 Temporisation reset type Courier floating point 0 : definite time 4403=1 and Setting 0/1/1
number 1 : inverse time 4404 >= 5
and 4404
<= 9
09 RTMS Courier floating point 0.025 * 4408=1 Setting 0.025/3.2/0.025
number
0A T RESET Courier floating point 0.04 * 4408=0 Setting 0.04/100.0/0.01
number
45 00 AUTORECLOSER
01 Autorecloser Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 State circuit breaker Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled 4501 = 1 Setting 0/1/1
03 Control window Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4502 = 1 Setting 0.01 / 600.00 / 0.01 s
number
04 External blocking Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled 4501 = 1 Setting 0/1/1
number
number
number
0A Temporisation cycle 4 Courier floating point 0.01 s * 4501 = 1 Setting 0.01 / 600.00 / 0.01 s
number
0B Reclaim TIME Courier floating point 0.02 s * 4501 = 1 Setting 0.02 / 600.00 / 0.01 s
number
0C Inhibition time Courier floating point 0.02 s * 4501 = 1 Setting 0.02 / 600.00 / 0.01 s
number
0D Number of short circuit cycle Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* 4501 = 1 Setting 0/4/1
0E Number of earth fault cycle Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* 4501 = 1 Setting 0/4/1
Values
(* : default)
0F Cycles tI> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4 bit
group
10 Cycles tI>> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4 bit
group
11 Cycles tI>>> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4 bit
group
12 Cycles tI0> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4 bit
group
13 Cycles tI0>> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4 bit
group
14 Cycles tI0>>> configuration Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting 0/2/1 on each 4 bit
group
group
group
60 00 AUTOMATISM
01 Trip Configuration Binary (16 bits) 1* Setting 0/65535/1
02 Latched Configuration Binary (16 bits) 0* Setting 0/65535/1
03 Blocking 1 Configuration Binary (16 bits) 0* Setting 0/65535/1
04 Blocking 2 Configuration Binary (16 bits) 0* Setting 0/65535/1
05 Broken conductor detection Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
06 Tempo tBC Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* 6005 = 1 Setting 0/144.0/0.01 s
07 Threshold mod iinv/idirect in % Courier floating point 20 % * 6005 = 1 Setting 20/100/1 %
number
08 Cold load start Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
09 Threshold of cold load start Binary (8 bits) 0* 6008 = 1 Setting 0/255/1
0A % of cold load start Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 50 % * 6008 = 1 Setting 20/500/1
0B Cold load start Tempo Courier floating point 1.0 s * 6008 = 1 Setting 0.1/3600.0/0.1 s
number
Values
(* : default)
0C Breaker failure Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
0D I< Threshold for Breaker failure Courier floating point 20 % * 600C = 1 Setting 2/100/1 %
number
0E Tempo tBF Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0.1 s * 600C = 1 Setting 0/10.0/0.01 s
0F Phase instant blocking Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled 600C = 1 Setting 0/1/1
10 Earth instant blocking Binary (1 bit) Disabled * / Enabled 600C = 1 Setting 0/1/1
11 logic selectivity 1 Binary (4 bits) Setting 0/15/1
12 Tempo sélectivity1 Courier floating point 6011 = 1 Setting 0/150.0/0.01 s
number
13 logic selectivity 2 Binary (4 bits) Setting 0/15/1
14 Tempo sélectivity 2 Courier floating point 6013 = 1 Setting 0/150.0/0.01 s
number
61 00 AFFECTATION DES TS
01 Logical input allocation 1 Indexed String 0 0: nothing * Setting 0/16/1
1 1: delatch
2 2: 52 a
3 3: 52 b
4 4: external CB failure
5 5: External input 1
7 7 : Logic blocking 1
9 9 : Disturbance start
10 10 : Cold load start
11 11 : Log Selectivity 1
13 13 : Change of group
14 14 : Recloser locked
15 15 : Thermal reset
16 16 : Trip circuit
supervision
1 1: delatch
2 2: 52 a
Values
(* : default)
3 3: 52 b
supervision
1 1: delatch
2 2: 52 a
3 3: 52 b
supervision
Values
(* : default)
1 1: delatch
2 2: 52 a
3 3: 52 b
supervision
1 1: delatch
2 2: 52 a
3 3: 52 b
supervision
Values
(* : default)
06 Timer aux 1 Setting 0/200.0/0.01
07 Timer aux 2 Setting 0/200.0/0.01
62 00 CT ALLOCATION
01 GENERAL TRIP Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
02 I> Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
03 tI> Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
04 I>> Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
05 t I>> Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
06 I>>> Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
07 t I>>> Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
08 I0> Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
09 t I0> Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
0A I0>> Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
0B t I0>> Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
0C I0>>> Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
0D t I0>>> Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
0E t I< Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
0F t Iinv> Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
10 Thermal alarm Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
11 Thermal trip Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
12 Breaker alarm Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
13 Trip circuit alarm Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
14 Broken conductor Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
15 Breaker failure Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
16 Reclosing Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
17 TAux 1 Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
Values
(* : default)
18 TAux 2 Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
19 Autoreclose in progress Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
1A Definitive trip Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
63 00 LEDs CONFIGURATION
01 Led 5 Binary (16 bits) 4* Setting 0/65535/1
02 Led 6 Binary (16 bits) 16 * Setting 0/65535/1
05 Led PF5 Binary (9 bits) 0* Setting 0/511/1
69 00 SW SUPERVISION
01 Trip circuit supervision ? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
02 Trip circuit time ? Courier floating point 0.1 s * 6901 = 1 Setting 0.1/10.0/0.05 s
number
03 SW Operating time? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
04 SW Operating time Courier floating point 0.05 s* 6903 = 1 Setting 0.05/1.0/0.01 s
number
05 SW Operating number? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
06 SW Closing time ? Courier floating point 0.05 s* 6905 = 1 Setting 0.05/1.0/0.01 s
number
07 SW Closing time Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
08 SW Operating number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0* 6907 = 1 Setting 0/50000/1
09 SA2n? Binary (1 bit) 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
0A Sa2n Courier floating point 0 exp+06 A² * 6909 = 1 Setting 0/4000/1 (*exp+06)
number
Values
(* : default)
0B n Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1* Setting 1/2/1
0C TRIP t Courier floating point 0.1 s* Setting 0.1/5.0/0.05 s
number
0D CLOSE t Courier floating point 0.1 s* Setting 0.1/5.0/0.05 s
number
70 00 RECORDER CONTROL (VERSION P122 et >)

01 Start/Trigger recorder Indexed String 0 Stopped Setting 1/2/1
1 Trigerred
2 Running *
20 Recorder Source Indexed String 0 Samples * Data
21 Pretemps Courier floating point 0.1 secondes Setting 0.1/3.0/0.1
number
22 Postemps Courier floating point 0.1 secondes Setting 0.1/3.0/0.1
number
80 00 DISTURBANCE REC
01 Record Number Unsigned integer (1 byte) 0* Setting 0/5/1 (selon contexte)
02 Trigger Time IEC870 Time & Date dd/mm/yy hh:mm Data
03 Available Channel Bit Mask Binary Flag 11111 Data
Indexed String 0 “ Ia ”
1 “ Ib ”
2 “ Ic ”
3 “ I0 ”
4 “ Inputs/Outputs ”
04 Channel Types Binary Flag 0: digital, 1: 01111 Data
analogue
05 Channel Offsets Repeated group of Courier Upload Offsets Data
numbers
06 Scaling Factors Repeated group of Courier Upload Scal. Factors Data
numbers
Values
(* : default)
07-0F NON IMPLEMENTE - réservé
10 Record Length Integer (2 bytes) Data

11 Trigger position Integer (2 bytes) Data
12 Time Base Courier floating point Data
number
13 NON IMPLEMENTED - reserved
14 Upload Timer Repeated group of Integers Data

15-1F NON IMPLEMENTED - reserved
20 Upload Channel 0 Repeated group of Integers Data

24 Upload Channel Inputs/Outputs Repeated group of Data
Integer/Bin. flags
90 00 AUTOMAT. FLT
01 Record number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Setting
(automatic
)
02 Occur fault date Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data
03 Active set group Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1 Data
04 Phase in fault ASCII Text (10 bytes) “ PHASE A ” Data
05 Fault Id ASCII Text (18 bytes) “ I >> ” Data
06 Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data
number
07 Ia Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data
number
08 Ib Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data
number
09 Ic Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data
Values
(* : default)
number
0A In Magnitude Courier floating point 12.34 A Data
number
BF 00 COMM SYSTEM DATA

01 Dist Record Cntrl Ref Menu Cell (2) 0x7000 Data
02 Dist Record Extract Ref Menu Cell (2) 0x8000 Data
03 Setting Transfert
04 Reset Demand Timers NON IMPLEMENTED
05 Reset Event Report NON IMPLEMENTED

3.2.2 List of events created by the relay
Cell
Code Cell text
reference
00 UNKNOWN EVENT -
01 TC CLOSE 0
02 TC TRIP 0
03 DIST TRIG 0
04 UNLOCK TRIP 0
05 SET. CHANGE 0
06 RESET THERM 0
07 SET MAINT MODE 0
08 SET RELAY MAINT MODE 0021
09 I> 0023
10 I>> 0023
11 I>>> 0023
12 IE> 0023
13 IE>> 0023
14 IE>>> 0023
15 TH. ALARM 0023
16 TH OVERLOAD 0023
17 tI> 0023
18 tI>> 0023
19 tI>>> 0023
20 tlE> 0023
21 tlE>> 0023
22 tlE>>> 0023
23 tI< 0023
24 BROKEN CONDUCTOR 0024
25 t Aux1 0024
26 t Aux2 0024
27 BREAKER FAILURE 0024
28 Logic Sel. 1 0020
29 Logic Sel. 2 0020
30 Blocking Logic 1 0020
31 Blocking Logic 2 0020
32 Setting group change 0020
33 52 a 0020
Cell
Code Cell text
reference
34 52 b 0020
35 ACK RELAY LATCHED ( by Input) 0020
36 External failure from the CB 0020
37 COLD LOAD PICKUP 0020
38 TS Change 0020
39 TRIP : TH OVERLOAD 0
40 TRIP : tI> 0
41 TRIP : tI>> 0
42 TRIP : tI>>> 0
43 TRIP : tlE> 0
44 TRIP : tlE>> 0
45 TRIP : tlE>>> 0
46 TRIP : tI< 0
47 TRIP : BROKEN CONDUCTOR 0
48 TRIP : t Aux 1 0
49 TRIP : t Aux 2 0
50 Output relays change 0021
51 ACK 1 ALARM (FRONT) 0
52 ACK ALARMS (FRONT) 0
53 ACK 1 ALARM (COM) 0
54 ACK ALARMS (COM) 0
55 Major material alarm 0022
56 Minor material alarm 0022
57 I2 > 0024
58 t2> 0024
59 OPEN OPERATING TIME 0024
60 TRIP OPERATION Nb 0024
61 SA2N 0024
62 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION 0024
63 CLOSE OPERATING TIME 0024
64 SUCCESS AUTORECLOSE 0024
65 LOCKED AUTORECLOSER 0024
66 AUTORECLOSER CONF. FAIL 0024
67 TRIP : t I2 > 0
NOTA : When the cell reference is different of zero this means that the
event is generated on event occurrence and another is generated
on event disappearance.
When the cell reference is equal to zero, only the event on edging edge is generated.
Twelve bits are available in the string of characters to describe the contain of the
Courier cell:
On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to « 1 ».
On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to
« 0 ».
3.3 Setting changes
This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change:
Enter Setting Mode - checks that the cell is settable and returns the limits
Preload Setting - Places a new value to the cell, this value is echoed to ensure that
setting corruption has not taken place, the validity of the setting is not checked by this
action.
Execute Setting - Confirms the setting change, if the change is valid then a positive
response will be returned, if the setting change fails then an error response will be
returned.
Abort Setting - This command can be used to abandon the setting change.
This is the most secure method and is ideally suited to on-line editors as the setting
limits are taken from the relay before the setting change is made. However this
method can be slow if many settings are being changed as three commands are
required for each change.
3.4 Systems integration data
3.4.1 Address of the relay
The relays can have any address between 1 and 254 included. The address 255
corresponds to the global address to which all relays and all the other slave
peripheries are responding. The Courier protocol specifies that no response can be
resent from a slave periphery to a global message. This permits to avoid that all
peripheries respond at the same time creating by this way user conflict on the Bus.
Each relay possess an address settled on 255 in order to guarantee that in case of his
connection to the operating network, his address cannot create any conflict with the
address of another periphery already in exploitation. In order to permit to a new
periphery to get entirely operational, his address has to be settled. The address can
be modified manually in capturing the password, than in following the method of the
setting change through the user interface on the front plate of the relay.
The same, if the network functioning on a computer takes in charge the auto-
addressing, the relay address can be settled on 0 to active the characteristic of auto-
addressing of the computer software. The relay receives then the next valid address
on the Bus.
If the address is 255 or not known, she can be modified in sending a new address,
with a global message, to a periphery possessing a particular serial number. This
method is used for those peripheries which are not having any user interface for
reading or changing the address in process.
3.4.2 Measured values
Each measured value can be periodically extracted by a selective call of MiCOM
P124 relay.
3.4.3 Status word

Each response of a slave periphery contains an octet of status. This octet is resent by
the relay at the beginning of each message for signalling important data. The
principal workstation can be design for responding automatically to these important
data.
The contained indications are the following :
Bit 0 - 1 = Recording of disturbance available for retrieval
Bit 1 - 1 = Change of the Unit status word
Bit 2 - 1 = Change of the control status word
Bit 3 - 1 = Relay busy, no response possible in time
Bit 4 - 1 = Relay out of service
Bit 5 - 1 = Recording of events available for retrieval
Bit 6 - 1 = Switched alarm indicator
Bit 7 - 1 = Switched tripping indicator
3.4.4 Unit status word
The unit status word is located in the menu 000C.
Each bits pair of the Unit status word serves to indicate the status (position) of the unit
elements checked through the relay.
This functionality is not supported on MiCOM P124 relay.
3.4.5 Control status word
The Control status word is located in the cell of the menu 000D.
It is used for transmitting the control information of the slave periphery to the central
unit. Nevertheless, the relays described in this manual are protection relays, which
are not using this control characteristic.
3.4.6 Measurement control
The control functions through the MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay can be
executed on a serial link. These functions are supported in particular on the changes
of the individual relay settings, on the changes of the setting groups, on the remote
control of the circuit breaker, as well as on the functions and the locking of the
selected output relays.
The remote control is limited in the control functions selected in the table of the relays
menu. The CRC and the controls of the message length are used on each received
message. No response is given for messages received with an error detection. The
principal unit can be re-initialised in order to resent an order as often as wanted if he
is not receiving any response or if he receives a response with an error detection.
NOTE: The control commands are generally materialised by the change
of the cell value. They dispose the same inherent security. No
response is allowed for the global orders to avoid any user
conflict of the Bus. For this type of order, a double start is used
for the verification of the message by the relay.
The relay transmits then a confirmation indicating that the
control order or the change of setting has been accepted.
If this is not the case, the relay is sending an error message.
3.4.7 Change of remote measurements

The relay is only responding to the orders of a setting change through the serial port
if the SD0 link = 1 is selected. The selection of the SD0 link = 1 is blocking all the
changes of remote setting with the exception of the SC logical links and the password
capture. When the SD0 link = 0 is selected, the remote setting are protected by the
password.
For changing the remote links, the password has to be first remote captured and the
SD and SD0 function links have to be settled on 1.
3.5 Event extraction
Events can be extracted either automatically or manually . For automatic extraction all
events are extracted in sequential order using the standard Courier mechanism, this
includes fault. The manual approach allows the user to select events, faults at
random from the stored records.
3.5.1 Automatic event extraction
This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as it
is produced via the rear port.
When new event information is created the Event bit is set within the Status byte, this
indicates to the Master device that event information is available. The oldest,
unextracted event can be extracted from the relay using the Send Event command.
The relay will respond with the event data, which will be either a Courier Type 0 or
Type 3 event. The Type 3 event is used for fault records.
Once an event has been extracted from the relay the Accept Event can be used to
confirm that the event has been successfully extracted. If all events have been
extracted then the event bit will reset, if there are more events still to be extracted the
next event can be accessed using the Send Event command as before.
3.5.2 Event types
Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances:
• Change of state of output contact
• Change of state of opto input
• Protection element operation
• Alarm condition
• Setting Change
• Fault Record (Type 3 Courier Event)
3.5.3 Event format

The Send Event command results in the following fields being returned by the relay:
• Cell Reference
• Timestamp
• Cell Text
• Cell Value
The table of the events created by the relay (3.2.2) indicates how the contents of the
above fields are interpreted. Fault records will return a Courier Type 3 event which
contains the above fields together with two additional fields:
• Event extraction column
• Event number
These events contain additional information which is extracted from the relay using
the referenced extraction column. Row 01 of the extraction column contains a setting
which allows the fault record to be selected. This setting should be set to the event
number value returned within the record, the extended data can be extracted from
the relay by uploading the text and data from the column.
3.5.4 Manual record extraction
Column 02 of the database can be used for manual viewing fault records. The
contents of this column will depend of the nature of the record selected. It is possible
to select directly a fault record.
Fault Record Selection (Row 01) - This cell can be used to directly select a fault record
using a value between 0 and 4 to select one of up to five stored fault records (0 will
be the most recent fault and 4 will be the oldest). The column will then contain the
details of the fault record selected (row 02 to 0A)
It should be noted that if this column is used to extract event information from the
relay the number associated with a particular record will change when a new fault
occurs.
3.6 Disturbance record extraction
The stored disturbance records within the relay are accessible via the Courier
interface.
Select Record Number (Row 01) - This cell can be used to select the record to be
extracted. Record 0 will be the oldest unextracted record, older records will be
assigned positive values, and negative values will be used for more recent records. To
facilitate automatic extraction via the rear port the Disturbance bit of the Status byte is
set by the relay whenever there are unextracted disturbance records.
Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of the
record can be read from cell 02. The disturbance record itself can be extracted using
the block transfer mechanism from cell B00B.
As has been stated the rear Courier port can be used to automatically extract
disturbance records as they occur. This operates using the standard Courier
mechanism defined in Chapter 8 of the Courier User Guide.
4. IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE
The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave
device. This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol. The relay
conforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not supported.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
• Initialisation (Reset)
• Time Synchronisation
• Event Record Extraction
• General Interrogation
• Cyclic Measurements
• General Commands
4.1 Physical connection and link layer
Connection is available for IEC60870-5-103 through the rear RS485 port. It is
possible to select both the relay address and baud rate using the front panel
interface. Following a change, a reset command is required to re-establish
communications.
The parameters of the communication are the following :
• Even Parity
• 8 Data bits
• 1 stop bit
• Data rate 9600 or 19200 bauds
4.2 Initialisation
Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have
been changed a reset command is required to initialise the communications. The
relay will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the
difference being that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relay's
transmit buffer.
The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,
the Cause Of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command. The following information will be
contained in the data section of this ASDU:
Manufacturer Name: Schneider Electric
The Software Identification Section will contain the first four characters of the relay
model number to identify the type of relay, eg P124.
In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it
will also produce a power up event.
4.3 Time synchronisation

The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as
specified in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronisation message is sent as a
send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. Whether the time
synchronisation message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply)
message, a time synchronisation message will be returned as Class 1 data.
4.4 Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be passed using the standard function
type/information numbers to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. Private codes are
not used, thus any events that cannot be passed using the standardised messages will
not be sent.
Events are categorised using the following information:
• Common Address
• Function Type
• Information number
Section 4.10 contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay. The
common address is used to differentiate in circumstances where the relay produces
more events of a certain type than can be passed using the standardised messages.
For example if the relay produces starts and trips for three stages of overcurrent only
two stages can be passed using the standardised messages.
Using the different common address for two of the overcurrent stages allows each
stage to be indicated. The table in 4.10 of the present chapter shows the common
address as an offset value. The common address offset will be added to the station
address in order to pass these events.
4.5 General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers,
information numbers and common address offsets that will be returned during the GI
cycle are indicated in 4.10.
4.6 Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be
read from the relay using a Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 is not used).
It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a
proportion of either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value. The
selection of either 1.2 or 2.4 for a particular value is indicated in 4.10.
4.7 Commands
A list of the supported commands is contained in 4.10. The relay will respond to
other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative
acknowledgement of a command.
4.8 Disturbance records
The disturbance records stored by the relay cannot be extracted using the mechanism
defined in the IEC60870-5-103 standard. The relay maintains compatibility with the
VDEW control system by transmitting an ASDU 23 with no disturbance records at the
start of every GI cycle.
4.9 Blocking of monitor direction

The relay does not support a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction.
4.10 List of events produced by the relay
Two kinds of ASDU can be generated for the events : ASDU 1 (time-tagged message)
or ASDU2 (Time-tagged message with relative time)
The list of events is the following with the associated values : INFORMATION
NUMBER, TYPE OF ASDU ,CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION and COMMON ADDRESS OF
ASDU
Status indication in monitor direction :
− Auto-recloser active : INF <16>; TYP <1>;COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↓↑
− LED reset : INF <19>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− Characteristic 1 : INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↓↑
− Characteristic 2 : INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↓↑
− Logic input 1 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↓↑
− Logic input 5 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS+1> ↓↑
Supervision indications in monitor direction :
− Trip circuit supervision : INF <36>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↓↑
Fault indications in monitor direction :
− Start/pick-up N : INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↓↑
− General TRIP : INF <68>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>
− TRIP L1 : INF <69>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>
− TRIP L2 : INF <70>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− TRIP L3 : INF <71>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− General start : INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↓↑
− Breaker failure : INF <85>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− TRIP I> : INF <90>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− TRIP I>> : INF <91>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− TRIP I>>> : INF <90>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS+1>
− TRIP IN> : INF <92>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− TRIP IN>>: INF <93>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− TRIP IN>>> : INF <92>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS+1>
− Auto-reclosure indications in monitor direction
− CB 'on' by AR : INF <128>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
− CB 'on' by long time AR : INF <129>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>
− AR blocked : INF <130>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> ↓↑
NOTA : The italics events are only valid for the MiCOM P124.
The double arrow ↓↑ means the event is generated on event
occurrence and another is generated on event disappearance.
• List of data contained in General Interrogation
Status indication in monitor direction :

− Auto-recloser active : INF <16>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>
− Characteristic 1 : INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>
− Characteristic 2 : INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>
− Auxiliary input 1 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>
− Auxiliary input 5 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS+1>
Supervision indications in monitor direction :
− Trip circuit supervision : INF <36>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>
Fault indications in monitor direction :
− Start/pick-up N : INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT <9>,<ADDRESS>
− General start : INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>
Auto-reclosure indications in monitor direction
− AR blocked : INF <130>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>
• Cyclic measurements
The selection of either 1.2 or 2.4 for a particular value is the following :
For the current value Ia, Ib and Ic the rate is equal to 2.4
For the frequency the rate is equal to 1.2
The other fields of ASDU 9 are not updated.
• List of the supported commands
⇒ Autorecloser ON/OFF only on MiCOM P123 : INF<16>, TYP<20>, COT
<20>
⇒ LED reset . This command corresponds to the acknowledgment of all
alarms by the front plate on MiCOM P12x products : INF<19>, TYP<20>,
COT <20>
⇒ Charcateristic 1 : INF<23>, TYP<20>, COT <20>
⇒ Characteristic 2 : INF<23>, TYP<20>, COT <20>
5. DNP 3.0 CONFIGURATION/INTEROPERABILITY GUIDE

5.1 Introduction
The purpose of this document is to describe the specific implementation of the Distributed
Network Protocol (DNP) 3.0 within P12x.
P12x uses the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library Version 2.18.
This document, in conjunction with the DNP 3.0 Basic 4 Document Set, and the DNP Subset
Definitions Document, provides complete information on how to communicate with P12x via
the DNP 3.0 protocol.
This implementation of DNP 3.0 is fully compliant with DNP 3.0 Subset Definition Level 2,
contains many Subset Level 3 features, and contains some functionality even beyond Subset
Level 3.
5.2 DNP V3.00 device profile

The following table provides a irDevice Profile DocumentlK in the standard format
defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. While it is referred to in the
DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions as a isDocument,l. it is only a component of a total
interoperability guide. This table, in combination with the following should provide a
complete interoperability/configuration guide for P12x :
• the Implementation Table provided in Section 0 (beginning on page 66),
• the Point List Tables provided in Section 5.4 (beginning on page 69),
DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
(Also see the Implementation Table in Section 0, beginning on page 66.)
Vendor Name: Schneider Electric
Device Name: SERIAL 20 Platform using the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source
Code Library, Version 2.18.
Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:
For Requests: Level 2 7 Master
For Responses: Level 2 Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported
(the complete list is described in the attached table):
For static (non-change-event) object requests, request qualifier codes 00 and 01 (start-stop),
07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index) are supported in addition to request
qualifier code 06 (no range – or all points).
Static object requests received with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with
qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests received with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded
with qualifiers 17 or 28.
For change-event object requests, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
16-bit and 32-bit Analog Change Events with Time may be requested.
The read function code for Object 50 (Time and Date), variation 1, is supported.
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: 2048
Received 292 Received: 2048
DNP V3.00
Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:

! None
" Fixed at 2 " None
! Configurable ! Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
" Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:

Never
Always
" When reporting Event Data
" When sending multi-fragment responses
Sometimes
Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm: None " Fixed at 100 ms Variable Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment: " None Fixed at ____ Variable Configurable
Application Confirm: None " Fixed at 1s Variable Configurable
Complete Appl. Response: " None Fixed at ____ Variable Configurable
Others:
Binary input change scanning period: 5ms
Analog input change scanning period: 1s
Sends/Executes Control Operations:

WRITE Binary Outputs " Never Always Sometimes Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE Never " Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE Never " Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK Never " Always Sometimes Configurable
Count > 1 " Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Pulse On Never " Always Sometimes Configurable
Pulse Off " Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch On " Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch Off " Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Queue " Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Clear Queue " Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no
specific variation requested: specific variation requested:
Never Never
" Only time-tagged " Binary Input Change With Time
Configurable Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable (attach explanation)
DNP V3.00
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
" Never " Never
Configurable When Device Restarts
Only certain objects When Status Flags Change
Sometimes (attach explanation)
ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED No other options are permitted.
Function codes supported
Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:

No Counters Reported No Counters Reported
Configurable Configurable (attach explanation)
" Default Object: 20 " 16 Bits
Default Variation: 5 " 32 Bits
Point-by-point list attached Other Value: _____
" Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:

" Yes
No
5.3 Implementation table

The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported
by the P12x in both request messages and in response messages.
For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or
08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with
qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event
objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
In the table below text shaded as Subset Level 3 indicates Subset Level 3 functionality
(beyond Subset Level 2), and text shaded as beyond Subset Level 3 indicates
functionality beyond Subset Level 3.
REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will
OBJECT
(Library will parse) respond with)
Object Variation Function Codes Qualifier Function Qualifier
Description
Number Number (dec) Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex)
1 0 Binary Input (Variation 0 is 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
used to request default 06 (no range, or all)
variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
1 1 Binary Input 1 (read) 22 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 1) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
2 0 Binary Input Change (Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
0 is used to request default 07, 08 (limited qty)
variation)
2 1 Binary Input Change without 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
(default – Time 07, 08 (limited qty)
see note 1
for P120 -
P121)
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
(default – 07, 08 (limited qty)
see note 1)
10 0 Binary Output Status (Variation 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
0 is used to request default 06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
10 2 Binary Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –see
see note 1) 07, 08 (limited qty) note 2)
17, 28 (index)
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3 (select) 00, 01 (start-stop) 0 129 (response) echo of request
4 (operate) 7, 08 (limited qty)
5 (direct op) 17, 28 (index)
6 (dir. op, noack)
20 0 Binary Counter (Variation 0 is 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
used to request default 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all)
variation) 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) stop)
8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index –
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index) see note 2)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) stop)
8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index –
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index) see note 2)
10 (frz. cl. noack)

OBJECT
Description
20 5 32-Bit Binary Counter without 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Flag 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index–see
8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty) note 2)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
20 6 16-Bit Binary Counter without 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Flag 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index–see
8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty) note 2)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
21 0 Frozen Counter (Variation 0 is 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)

17, 28 (index)
21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index–see
07, 08 (limited qty) note 2)
17, 28 (index)
21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
21 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Flag 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index–see
17, 28 (index)
21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
30 0 Analog Input (Variation 0 is 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)

17, 28 (index)
30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index–see
note 1) 07, 08 (limited qty) note 2)
17, 28 (index)
30 3 32-Bit Analog Input without 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
30 4 16-Bit Analog Input without 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
32 0 Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)

(Variation 0 is used to request 07, 08 (limited qty)
default variation)
32 1 32-Bit Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
without Time 07, 08 (limited qty)
32 2 16-Bit Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
(default – see without Time 07, 08 (limited qty)
note 1)
32 3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Time 07, 08 (limited qty)

OBJECT
Description
32 4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Time 07, 08 (limited qty)
50 0 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index – see
17, 28 (index)
50 1 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
default – see 2 (write) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index – see
note 1) 07, 08 (limited qty) note 2)
17, 28 (index)
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)

(qty = 1)
60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
60 1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17,28

07, 08 (limited qty)


80 1 Internal Indications 2 (write) 00 (start-stop)

(index must =7)
No Object (function code only) –See Note 3 13 (cold restart)
No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart)
No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.)
NOTE 1: A Default variation refers to the variation responded when

variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.
NOTE 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are
only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28,
respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers
00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or
01. (For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always
responded.)
NOTE 3: For P12x, a cold restart is implemented as a warm restart – the
executable is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
5.4 Point List

The tables in the following sections identify all the individual data points provided by
this implementation of DNP 3.0. P12x uses the database protection.
5.4.1 Binary Input Points
Every Binary Input Status points are included in class 0 polls, because they are
included in one of classes 1, 2 or 3.
Binary Input Points

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change
with Time)
Point Change Event Class
Name/Description init val.
Index (1, 2, 3 or none)
0 Output relay 1 (trip) 0 1
1 Output r elay 2 0 2
4 Output relay 0 ( watch dog) 0 2
9 Opto isolator 1 0 2
14 Phase overcurrent stage 1 start 0 1
15 Phase overcurrent stage 1 trip 0 1
20 Earth overcurrent stage 1 start 0 1
21 Earth overcurrent stage 1 trip 0 1
26 tI< 0 1
27 thermal start 0 1
28 thermal trip 0 1
29 taux1 0 1
Binary Input Points

with Time)
30 taux2 0 1
31 broken conductor 0 1
32 cb failure 0 1
33 I2> start 0 1
34 tI2> trip 0 1
35 number of cb operation 0 1
36 Cb operation time alarm 0 1
37 sa2n 0 1
38 trip circuit alarm 0 1
39 cb close time alarm 0 1
40 Recloser locked 0 1
41 Recloser success 0 1
42 Recloser running 0 1
43 Logic selectivity 1 0 1
44 Logic selectivity 2 0 1
45 Blocking logic 1 0 1
46 Blocking logic 2 0 1
47 52a 0 1
48 52b 0 1
49 CB external failure 0 1
50 Cold load pick up 0 1
51 Unlatch by logic input 0 1
52 Unlatch RL1 by remote command 0 1
53 Close remote command 0 1
54 Trip remote command 0 1
55 Reset thermal state by communication 0 1
56 Maintenance mode 0 1
57 Major hardware alarm 0 1
58 Minor hardware alarm 0 1
59 Phase overcurrent stage 1 trip alarm (latched) 0 3
62 Earth overcurrent stage 1 trip alarm (latched) 0 3

Binary Input Points

with Time)
65 tI< alarm (latched) 0 3
66 thermal start alarm (latched) 0 3
67 thermal trip alarm (latched) 0 3
68 taux1 alarm (latched) 0 3
69 taux2 alarm (latched) 0 3
70 broken conductor alarm (latched) 0 3
71 cb failure alarm (latched) 0 3
72 tI2> alarm (latched) 0 3
73 Cb operation time alarm(latched) 0 3
74 number of cb operation (latched) 0 3
75 sa2n alarm (latched) 0 3
76 trip circuit alarm(latched) 0 3
77 cb close time alarm ( latched) 0 3
78 Conflict recloser 0 3
5.4.2 Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks
The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the
Control Relay Output Blocks (Object 12).
Binary Output Status points are not included in class 0 polls.
Binary Output Status Points

Object Number: 10
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
Control Relay Output Blocks
Object Number: 12
Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate),
5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)
Supported Control Relay
Point Initial Status
Name/Description Output Block
Index Value
Fields
0 Unlatch of the relays 0 Pulse On
1 First alarm acknowledge 0 Pulse On
2 All alarm acknowledge 0 Pulse On
3 Trip c ommand 0 Pulse O n
4 Close command 0 Pulse On
5 Change of setting group 0 Pulse On
6 Thermal state reset 0 Pulse On
7 Peak and average value reset 0 Pulse On
8 RAM hardware alarm acknowledge 0 Pulse On
9 Reclose counter reset 0 Pulse On

5.4.3 Counters
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters
(Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the
frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
Binary Counters and Frozen Counters are not included in class 0 polls.
P120 and P121 do not support binary Counters and Frozen Counters.
Binary Counters
Change Event Object Number: not supported
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze and clear), 10 (freeze and clear, noack)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported
Frozen Counters
Change Event Object Number: not supported
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 9 (32-Bit Frozen Binary without Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported
Point
Name/Description Data type
Index
0 Max I a R ms D1
1 Max I b R ms D1
2 Max I c R ms D1
3 Average I a R ms D1
4 Average I b R ms D1
5 Average I c R ms D1
6 CB operations D2
7 Σ Amps (n) Ia D3
8 Σ Amps (n) Ib D3
9 Σ Amps (n) Ic D3
10 total number of reclosing shots D2
11 cycle 1 number D2
15 definitive trip number D2
16 close command number D2

5.4.4 Analog Inputs

The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit
and 32-bit variations of Analog Inputs, Analog Output Control Blocks, and Analog
Output Statuses are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog
input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive
representation is 32767. For each point, the ihScaling and Unitsli column indicates
the value of a transmitted 32767. This also implies the value of a transmitted –
32767. The entry in the column does not imply a valid value for the point.
Always indicating the representation of 32767 in the tables below is a consistent
method for representing scale, applicable to all scaling possibilities.
The ihDefault Deadband,ln and the ihDefault Change Event Assigned Classl columns
are used to represent the absolute amount by which the point must change before an
analog change event will be generated, and once generated in which class poll (1, 2,
3) will the change event be reported. Only the default values for these columns are
documented here because the values may change in operation due to either local
(user-interface) or remote (through DNP) control.
Every Analog Inputs points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in
one of classes 1, 2 or 3.
Analog Inputs
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Analog Change Event w/o Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: The scan rate for analog input change events is fixed at 1s
Scaling and Units Initial Change Event
Point Initial Change Event
Name/Description (representation of Valid Range Class (1, 2, 3 or
Index Value Dead-band
32767 – see above) none)
0 active group 1 32767 1à2 1 1
1 module IA 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.1 In 2
2 module IB 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.1 In 2
3 module IC 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.1 In 2
4 module IN 0 40 I0n 0 to 40 I0n 0.02 In 2
5 rms IA 0A 327.67A 0 to 10% 2

40000000 A/100
6 rms IB 0A 327.67A 0 to 10% 2

40000000 A/100
7 rms IC 0A 327.67A 0 to 10% 2

40000000 A/100
8 rms IN 0A 327.67A 0 to 10% 2

40000000 A/100
9 thermal state 0% 32767% 0 to 65535 10 2
10 frequency 0 327,67 Hz 45Hz to 1Hz 2

65 Hz and 99.99Hz ==
ERROR
11 module I2 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.1 In 2
12 module I1 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.1 In 2
13 trip time 0 327.67s 0 to 10.00s 10 ms 2
14 close time 0 327.67s 0 to 10.00s 10 ms 2

Technical Guide P124/EN TA1/B44
MiCOM P124
APPENDIX 1
Connection diagrams
A
P2 P1
Alternative : 3 phase CTs + core balanced CT connection A 3 phase CTs connection
B S2 S1
P2 P1 C B
A Phase rotation C
S2 S1
B 49
C 37
S2 S1
49 1 A ou 5A
RL0 35
1 A ou 5A 50 36
Watchdog
MICOM P124
50
44
Technical Guide
42 Trip output
51 51 RL1 for CB coil
1 A ou 5A
40
1 A ou 5A
52
39
52
Connection Diagrams
+ Trip output
53 41 for striker
1 A ou 5A
-
54
53
1 A ou 5A
56 54
1 A ou 5 A
55
- 48
1 A ou 5 A
56
47
-
55
48
1 A ou 5 A
47
-
Alternative : 2 phase CTs + core balanced CT connection

P2 P1
Case earth
A connection
B S2 S1 Module terminal block
C viewed from rear P124
S2 S1
49
1 A ou 5A 29 30 Selt-powered model
50
31 32
51 33 34
1 A ou 5A 35 36
SCHEME REPRESENTING MiCOM RELAY OFF

52
37 38
39 40
53
41 42
Typical application diagram
1 A ou 5A
54
43 44
Notes :
45 46
MiCOM P124 Self-powered model
56 (1) (a) CT shorting links mode before (b) and (c) disconnect
47 48
1 A ou 5 A
55 49 50 (b) Short terminals break before (c)
- 48
51 52 (c) Long terminals
47
53 54 (d) Pins terminals (p c b type)
55 56
(2) CT connections are typical only
APPENDIX 1
Page 1/6
P124/EN TA1/B44
P124/EN TA1/B44 Technical Guide
APPENDIX 1 Connection Diagrams
Page 2/6 MiCOM P124
MiCOM P124 self-powered model

Rear connections
In case of Self-powered model, only one 28 connection points Midos connector is
used following the diagram below :
NC 29 30 NC
NC 31 32 NC
NC 33 34 NC
RL0 (WD) normally closed contact 35 36 Common RL0 (Watchdog)
RL0 (WD) normally open contact 37 38 NC
Striker output + 39 40 Common RL1 (trip)
Striker output - 41 42 RL1 (trip) normally closed contact
Reserved, do not use 43 44 RL1 (trip) normally open contact
Reserve, do not use 45 46 Reserve, do not use

Earth current input (1) Common earth current input
for 3CTs connection 47 48 for 3CTs connectionCommun
Phase A (1) 49 50 Phase A
Phase B (1) 51 52 Common Phase B
Phase C (1) 53 54 Common Phase C

(2) 55 56 (2)
Rear view, connector 1 :

NC : no connected
(1) the current inputs are 1 or 5A and defined on ordering code
(2) inputs used when it is necessary to power the MiCOM P124 relay via the earth
current input.
A
P2 P1
Alternative : 3 phase CTs + core balanced CT connection. A 3 phase CTs connection
B S2 S1
P2 P1
A C C
B 49
B S2 S1 Phase rotation
C 37
S2 S1
49
1A or 5A
50 RL0 35 Watchdog
1A or 5A 36
50
MICOM P124
44
51 Trip output
51
42
contact for CB coil
Technical Guide
RL1
1A or 5A 40
1A or 5A 6
52 Programmeble
52 4
RL2 output
2
12
Connection Diagrams
Programmeble
53 53 10
RL3 output
1A or 5A 8
54
1A or 5A 22
Programmeble
54 20
RL4 output
18
56 28
Programmeble
1A or 5A 26 output
56 RL5
55 24
- 48 5
Programmeble
1A or 5A 55 3 output
RL6 1
47 48
1A or 5A
-
47 39 + Trip output
- for striker
9+ P124 41 -
Programmable input L1 11-
13+ Dual-powered
Programmable input L2 15- Case earth
17+
model 29 connection
Programmable input L3 19-
21+ * 30
Alternative : 3 phase CTs + core balanced CT connection. Programmable input L4 +
23- 31 RS 485
25+ - communication port
P2 P1
A Programmable input L5 32
S2 S1
27-
B
C 33 34
S2 S1
49
+ -
1A or 5A Auxiliary (*) terminating resistor for the last
50 Module terminal block supply relay to be connected between
viewed from rear 30-32
51
1 2 29 30
1A or 5A
SHEME REPRESENTING MiCOM RELAY OFF

52 3 4 31 32
5 6 33 34
53
7 8 35 36
9 37 38
Typical application diagram
1A or 5A 10
54 11 39 40
12
13 14 41 42
56
15 16 43 44
MiCOM P124 Dual-powered model
1A or 5A
55 17 18 45 46 Notes :
- 48 19 20 47 48 (1) (a) CTs shorting links mode
1A or 5A before (b) and (c) disconnect
21 22 49 50
47 (b) Short terminals break before (c)
23 24 51 52
(c) Long terminals
25 26 53 54 (d) Pins terminals (p c b type)
27 28 55 56
(2) CT connections are typical only
APPENDIX 1
Page 3/6
P124/EN TA1/B44
Page 4/6 MiCOM P124
MiCOM Dual-powered model

Rear connections
In case of dual-powered model, two 28 connection points Midos connectors (total 56
connection points) are used following the diagram below :
0V (to be linked to the earth case) 29 30 RS485 terminating resistor for the last relay
RS485+ 31 32 RS485 -
Auxiliary supply + 33 34 Auxiliary suppl -
RL0 (WD) normally closed contact 35 36 Common RL0 (Watchdog)
RL0 (WD) normally open contact 37 38 NC
Striker output + 39 40 Common RL1 (trip)
Striker output - 41 42 RL1 (trip) normally closed contact
Reserved, do not use 43 44 RL1 (trip) normally open contact
Reseved, do not use 45 46 Reseved, do not use

47 48
for 3CTs connection For 3CTs connection
Phase A (1) 49 50 Common Phase A
Phase B (1) 51 52 Common Phase B
Phase C (1) 53 54 Common Phase C
Earth current input(1) 55 56 Common earth current input

(2) (2)
NC : no connected
(1) the current inputs are 1 or 5A and defined on ordering code
(2) inputs used when it is necessary to power the MiCOM P124 relay via the earth
current input.
Connection Diagrams APPENDIX 1
MICOM P124 Page 5/6
MiCOM P124 Dual-powered model

Real connections (continued)
Common RL6 1 2 Common RL2
RL6 normally closed contact 3 4 RL2 normally closed contact
RL6 normally open contact 5 6 RL6 normally open contact
NC 7 8 Common RL3
Logic input EL1+ 9 10 RL3 normally closedcontact
Logic input EL1 - 11 12 RL3 normally open contact
Logic input EL2+ 13 14 NCR
Logic input EL2 - 15 16 NC
Logic input EL3+ 17 18 Common RL4
Logic input EL3 - 19 20 RL4 normally closedcontact
Logic input EL4+ 21 22 RL4 normally open contact
Logic input EL4 - 23 24 Common RL5
Logic input EL5+ 25 26 RL5 normally closedcontact
Logic input EL5 - 27 28 RL5 normally open contact

NC : no connected
Page 6/6 MiCOM P124
BLANK PAGE
MiCOM P124
APPENDIX 2
Commissioning Test and Record
Sheets
Commissioning test and APPENDIX 2
record sheets
CONTENT
1. COMMISSIONING TEST SHEETS 3

1.1 Relay identification 3
1.2 Commissioning test record 3
2. COMMISSIONING SETTING RECORD SHEETS 7

2.1 MiCOM P124 Self-powered model 7
2.1.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu 7
2.1.2 CONFIGURATION / CT Ratio Menu 7
2.2 MiCOM P124 Dual-powered model 11
2.2.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu 11
2.2.3 COMMUNICATION Menu 13
2.2.4 PROTECTION G1 Menu 14
2.2.5 PROTECTION G2 Menu 19
2.2.6 AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu 23
APPENDIX 2 Commissioning test and
record sheets
BLANK PAGE
record sheets
1. COMMISSIONING TEST SHEETS
1.1 Relay identification
Commissioning date : ________________________________________________
Engineer : ________________________________________________
Substation : ________________________________________________
Circuit : ________________________________________________
Rated frequency : ________________________________________________
Model ! P124 Self-powered

model
! P124
model
Dual-powered
Serial number : __________________________________________________

Rated current In : __________________________________________________
Auxiliary voltage Uaux
(Dual-powered model only): __________________________________________________
Communication protocol
(Dual-powered model only): __________________________________________________
Language : __________________________________________________
1.2 Commissioning test record

(put a cross after each checked stage)
Serial number check ? !

All current transformer shorting switches closed ? !
Wiring checked against diagram (if available) ? !
Case earth installed ? !
Test block connections checked (if installed) ? !
Insulation tested ? !
record sheets
Auxiliary supply control (Dual-powered model only)
Auxiliary voltage to relay !

Auxiliary voltage value ___________ Vdc/Vac
Watchdog contacts
With auxiliary supply off Terminals 35 – 36 – 37 !

With auxiliary supply on Terminals 35 – 36 – 37 !
NOTE : for the Self-powered model the watchdog test is done with the
battery box MiCOM E1.
record sheets
Measurements
Applied value Relay value
Phase CT input
Phase A current _____________A ______________A
Phase B current _____________A ______________A
Phase C current _____________A ______________A
Earth CT input
Earth current _____________A ______________A
Phase protection test
Theoretical value Relay value

I> threshold _____________A
I> threshold ______________A
I> drop threshold ______________A
Time delay
Time delay at 2 x I> _____________ms ______________ms
Time delay at 10 x I> _____________ms ______________ms
I>> threshold _____________A
I>> threshold ______________A
I>> drop threshold ______________A
Time delay
Time delay at 2 x I>> _____________A ______________A
Time delay at 10 x I>> _____________A ______________A
record sheets
Earth protection test
Theoretical value Relay value

Ie> threshold _______________A
Ie> threshold ______________A
Ie> drop threshold ______________A
Time delay
Time delay at 2 x Ie> ______________ms ______________ms
Time delay at 10 x Ie> ______________ms ______________ms
Ie>> threshold ______________A
Ie>> threshold ______________A
Ie>> drop threshold ______________A
Time delay
Time delay at 2 x Ie>> ______________ms ______________ms
Time delay at 10 x Ie>> ______________ms ______________ms
Commissioning Engineer Date

____________________________________________ ______________
record sheets
2. COMMISSIONING SETTING RECORD SHEETS
2.1 MiCOM P124 Self-powered model
2.1.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu
Password : ________________________________________
Reference : ________________________________________
Software version : ________________________________________
Frequency: ! 50 Hz ! 60 Hz
2.1.2 CONFIGURATION / CT Ratio Menu
Line CT primary Primary phase CT ratio

E/Gnd CT primary Primary earth CT ratio
record sheets
2.1.3.1 Phase Overcurrent [50/51]
2.1.3.1.A [50/51] I>
I> ? ! YES ! NO
I> In
Delay Type ! IDMT ! DMT ! RI

2.1.3.1.A.A [51] I> DMT
tI> ms
2.1.3.1.A.B [51] I> IDMT
Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI
! IEC VI ! IEC EI
! IEC LTI ! CO2
! IEEE MI ! CO8
! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI
Tms
2.1.3.1.A.C [51] I> DMT reset time
t Reset ms
2.1.3.1.A.D [51] I> IDMT reset time
Rtms
2.1.3.1.A.E [51] I> RI
K
t Reset ms
2.1.3.1.B [51] I>>
I>> ? ! YES ! NO
I>> In
tI>> ms
2.1.3.1.C [51] I>>>
I>>> ? ! YES ! NO
I>>> In
tI>>> ms
record sheets
2.1.3.2 Earth Overcurrent [50N/51N]
2.1.3.2.A [50N/51N] E/Gnd
le> ? ! YES ! NO
le> len

2.1.3.2.A.A [51N] Ie > DMT
tle> ms
2.1.3.2.A.B [51N] Ie > IDMT
Idmt ! IEC SI ! IEC STI
! IEC VI ! IEC EI
! IEC LTI ! CO2
! IEEE MI ! CO8
! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI
Tms
2.1.3.2.A.C [51N] Ie> DMT reset time
t Reset ms
2.1.3.2.A.D [51N] Ie> IDMT reset time
Rtms ms
2.1.3.2.A.E [51N] Ie> RI
K
t Reset ms
2.1.3.2.B [51N] Ie>>
le>> ? ! YES ! NO
Ie>> Ien
tIe>> ms
2.1.3.2.C [51N] Ie>>>
Ie>>> ? ! YES ! NO
Ie>>> Ien
tIe>>> ms
record sheets
2.1.3.3 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD
Therm OL ? ! YES ! NO
Iθ > In
Te ms
k
θ Trip %
θ Alarm ? ! YES ! NO
θ Alarm %
2.1.4.1 TRIP Command allocation
Trip tI> ! YES ! NO

Trip tI>> ! YES ! NO
Trip tI>>> ! YES ! NO
Trip tIe> ! YES ! NO
Trip tIe>> ! YES ! NO
Trip tIe>>> ! YES ! NO
Trip Thermal θ ! YES ! NO
2.1.5 RECORDS Menu
2.1.5.1 TIME PEAK VALUE
Time Window mn
record sheets
2.2 MiCOM P124 Dual-powered model
2.2.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu
Password : ________________________________________
Reference : ________________________________________
Software version : ________________________________________
Frequency: ! 50 Hz ! 60 Hz
2.2.2.1 Display
Phase A Text ! A ! L1 ! R
Phase B Text ! B ! L2 ! S
Phase C Text ! C ! L3 ! T
E/Gnd Text ! N ! E ! G
2.2.2.2 CT Ratio
Line CT primary Primary phase CT ratio

E/Gnd CT primary Primary earth CT ratio
2.2.2.3 Configuration of the trip output relay RL1 operation
Fail-safe operation ! YES ! NO

record sheets
2.2.2.4 LEDs 5 to 8 configuration
Functions LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8

I> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Therm Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Brkn. Cond ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI2> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Input 1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
T Aux 1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
T Aux 2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Recloser Run ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Recloser Blocked ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
record sheets
2.2.2.5 Group selection configuration
Setting group ! Group 1 ! Group 2

Change group input
configuration ! on edge ! on level
2.2.2.6 Alarm operation
Instantaneous alarm :
self-reset operation ! YES ! NO
Display of alarm battery
message in case of battery
or backed RAM memory ! YES ! NO
failure
2.2.2.7 Configuration of the input mode operation
EL 5 4 3 2 1
Inputs
! ! ! ! !
2.2.2.8 Format of the Modbus date
Format of the date ! IEC ! PRIVATE
2.2.3 COMMUNICATION Menu
2.2.3.1 COMMUNICATION Menu (MODBUS)
Communication ? ! YES ! NO
Baud Rate
! 300 bds ! 600 bds
! 1 200 bds ! 2 400 bds
! 4 800 bds ! 9 600 bds
! 19 200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Parity ! Odd ! Even ! None
Data bits ! 7 ! 8
Stop bits ! 1 ! 2
Relay Address
2.2.3.2 COMMUNICATION Menu (Courier)
Relay Address
record sheets
2.2.3.3 COMMUNICATION Menu (IEC 60870-5-103)
! 300 bds ! 600 bds
Baud Rate
! 1 200 bds ! 2 400 bds
! 4 800 bds ! 9 600 bds
! 19 200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Relay Address
2.2.3.4 COMMUNICATION Menu (DNP3)
! 300 bds ! 600 bds
Baud Rate
! 1 200 bds ! 2 400 bds
! 4 800 bds ! 9 600 bds
! 19 200 bds ! 38 400 bds

Relay Address
2.2.4 PROTECTION G1 Menu
2.2.4.1.A [50/51] I>
l> ? ! YES ! NO
l> ln

2.2.4.1.A.A [51] I> DMT
tl> ms
2.2.4.1.A.B [51] I> IDMT
Idmt ! IEC SI ! IEC STI ! IEC RC
! IEC VI ! IEC EI
! IEC LTI ! CO2
! IEEE MI ! CO8
! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI
Tms
record sheets
t Reset ms
Rtms
2.2.4.1.A.E [51] I> RI
K
t Reset ms
2.2.4.1.B [51] I>>
I>> ? ! YES ! NO
I>> In
tI>> ms
2.2.4.1.C [51] I>>>
I>>> ? ! YES ! NO
I>>> In
tI>>> ms
2.2.4.2.A [50N/51N] E/Gnd
le> ? ! YES ! NO
le> len
Delay Type ! IDMT ! DMT ! RI ! LABOR.

2.2.4.2.A.A [51N] Ie > DMT
tle> ms
2.2.4.2.A.B [51N] Ie > IDMT
Idmt ! IEC SI ! IEC STI ! IEC RC
! IEC VI ! IEC EI
! IEC LTI ! CO2
! IEEE MI ! CO8
! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI
Tms
record sheets
2.2.4.2.A.C [51N] Ie> LABOR.
Delay type LABOR.
Idmt ! 1 ! 2 ! 3
2.2.4.2.A.D [51N] Ie> DMT reset time
t Reset ms
2.2.4.2.A.E [51N] Ie> IDMT reset time
Rtms
2.2.4.2.A.F [51N] Ie> RI
K
t Reset ms
2.2.4.2.B [51N] Ie>>
Ie>> ? ! YES ! NO
Ie>> Ien
tIe>> ms
2.2.4.2.C [51N] Ie >>>
Ie>>> ? ! YES ! NO
Ie>>> Ien
tIe>>> ms
[49] Therm OL ? ! YES ! NO

Iθ > In
Te ms
k
θ Trip %
[49] θ Alarm ? ! YES ! NO

θ Alarm %
2.2.4.4 [37] UNDERCURRENT I<
I< ? ! YES ! NO
I< %
tI< ms
record sheets
2.2.4.5 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>
I2> ? ! YES ! NO
I2> In
2.2.4.5.A [46] I2> DMT
tI2> ms
2.2.4.5.B [46] I2> IDMT
Idmt ! IEC SI ! IEC STI
! IEC VI ! IEC EI
! IEC LTI ! CO2
! IEEE MI ! CO8
! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI
Tms
2.2.4.5.C [46] I2> DMT reset time
t Reset ms
2.2.4.5.D [46] I2> IDMT reset time
Rtms
2.2.4.5.E [46] I2> RI
K
t Reset ms
record sheets
2.2.4.6 [79] AUTORECLOSER (OPTION)
[79] Autoreclose ? ! YES ! NO

Ext CB Fail ? ! YES ! NO
Ext CB Fail Time ms
Ext Block ? ! YES ! NO

Dead Time tD1 ms
Dead Time tD2 ms
Dead Time tD3 ms
Dead Time tD4 ms
Reclaim Time tR ms
Inhib Time tI ms
Phase Cycles
E/Gnd Cycles
Cycles tI>
Cycles tI>>
Cycles tI>>>
Cycles tIe>
Cycles tIe>>
Cycles tIe>>>
Cycles tAux1
Cycles tAux2
record sheets
2.2.5 PROTECTION G2 Menu
2.2.5.1.A [50/51] I>
I> ? ! YES ! NO
I> In

2.2.5.1.A.A [51] I> DMT
tI> ms
2.2.5.1.A.B [51] I> IDMT
Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI ! IEC RC
! IEC VI ! IEC EI
! IEC LTI ! CO2
! IEEE MI ! CO8
! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI
Tms
t Reset ms
Rtms
2.2.5.1.A.E [51] I> RI
K
t Reset ms
2.2.5.1.B [51] I>>
I>> ? ! YES ! NO
I>> In
tI>> ms
2.2.5.1.C [51] I>>>
I>>> ? ! YES ! NO
I>>> In
tI>>> ms
record sheets
2.2.5.2.A [50N/51N] E/Gnd
Ie> ? ! YES ! NO
Ie> Ien
Delay Type ! IDMT ! DMT ! RI ! LABOR.

2.2.5.2.A.A [51N] Ie > DMT
tIe> ms
2.2.5.2.A.B [51N] Ie > IDMT
Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI ! IEC RC
! IEC VI ! IEC EI
! IEC LTI ! CO2
! IEEE MI ! CO8
! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI
Tms
2.2.5.2.A.C [51N] Ie> LABOR.
Delay type LABOR.
Idmt ! 1 ! 2 ! 3
2.2.5.2.A.D [51N] Ie> DMT reset time
t Reset ms
2.2.5.2.A.E [51N] Ie> IDMT reset time
Rtms
2.2.5.2.A.F [51N] Ie> RI
K
t Reset ms
2.2.5.2.B [51N] Ie>>
Ie>> ? ! YES ! NO
Ie>> len
tIe>> ms
record sheets
2.2.5.2.C [51N] Ie >>>
Ie>>> ? ! YES ! NO
Ie>>> len
tIe>>> ms
[49] Therm OL ? ! YES ! NO

Iθ > In
Te mn
k
θ Trip %
[49] θ Alarm ? ! YES ! NO

θ Alarm %
2.2.5.4 [37] UNDERCURRENT I<
I< ? ! YES ! NO
I< %
tI< ms
2.2.5.5 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>
I2> ? ! YES ! NO
I2> In
2.2.5.5.A [46] I2> DMT
tI2> ms
2.2.5.5.B [46] I2> IDMT
Idmt
! IEC SI ! IEC STI
! IEC VI ! IEC EI
! IEC LTI ! CO2
! IEEE MI ! CO8
! IEEE VI ! IEEE EI
Tms
record sheets
2.2.5.5.C [46] I2> DMT reset time
t Reset ms
2.2.5.5.D [46] I2> IDMT reset time
Rtms
2.2.5.5.E [46] I2> RI
K
t Reset ms
2.2.5.6 [79] AUTORECLOSER (OPTION)
[79] Autoreclose ? ! YES ! NO

Ext CB Fail ? ! YES ! NO
Ext CB Fail Time ms
Ext Block ? ! YES ! NO

Dead Time tD1 ms
Dead Time tD2 ms
Dead Time tD3 ms
Dead Time tD4 ms
Reclaim Time tR ms
Inhib Time tI ms
Phase Cycles
E/Gnd Cycles
Cycles tI>
Cycles tI>>
Cycles tI>>>
Cycles tIe>
Cycles tIe>>
Cycles tIe>>>
Cycles tAux1
Cycles tAux2
record sheets
2.2.6 AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu
2.2.6.1 TRIP Command allocation (RL1)
Trip tI> ! YES ! NO

Trip tI>> ! YES ! NO
Trip tI>>> ! YES ! NO
Trip tIe> ! YES ! NO
Trip tIe>> ! YES ! NO
Trip tIe>>> ! YES ! NO
Trip tI< ! YES ! NO
Trip t I2> ! YES ! NO
Trip Thermal θ ! YES ! NO

Trip Brkn Cond ! YES ! NO
Trip tAux1 ! YES ! NO
Trip tAux2 ! YES ! NO
2.2.6.2 Latch function allocation to RL1
Latch tI> ! YES ! NO

Latch tI>> ! YES ! NO
Latch tI>>> ! YES ! NO
Latch tIe> ! YES ! NO
Latch tIe>> ! YES ! NO
Latch tIe>>> ! YES ! NO
Latch tI< ! YES ! NO
Latch tI2> ! YES ! NO
Latch Thermal θ ! YES ! NO

Latch Brkn . Cond ! YES ! NO
Latch tAux1 ! YES ! NO
Latch tAux2 ! YES ! NO
record sheets
2.2.6.3 Blocking Logic 1 function allocation
Block 1 tI> ! YES ! NO

Block 1 tI>> ! YES ! NO
Block 1 tI>>> ! YES ! NO
Block 1 tIe> ! YES ! NO
Block 1 tIe>> ! YES ! NO
Block 1 tIe>>> ! YES ! NO
Block 1 tI2> ! YES ! NO
Block 1 Thermal θ ! YES ! NO
Block 1 Brkn. Cond ! YES ! NO
Block 1 tAux1 ! YES ! NO
2.2.6.4 Blocking Logic 2 function allocation
Block 2 tI> ! YES ! NO

Block 2 tI>> ! YES ! NO
Block 2 tI>>> ! YES ! NO
Block 2 tIe> ! YES ! NO
Block 2 tIe>> ! YES ! NO
Block 2 tIe>>> ! YES ! NO
Block 2 tI2> ! YES ! NO
Block 2 Thermal θ ! YES ! NO
Block 2 Brkn. Cond ! YES ! NO
2.2.6.5 Selective Scheme Logic1 function allocation
Logic Select 1 ! YES ! NO

Sel1 tI>> ! YES ! NO
Sel1 tI>>> ! YES ! NO
Sel1 tIe>> ! YES ! NO
Sel1 tIe>>> ! YES ! NO
t Sel1 ms
record sheets
2.2.6.6 Selective Scheme Logic2 function allocation
Logic Select 2 ! YES ! NO

Sel2 tI>> ! YES ! NO
Sel2 tI>>> ! YES ! NO
Sel2 tIe>> ! YES ! NO
Sel2 tIe>>> ! YES ! NO
t Sel2 ms
record sheets
2.2.6.7 OUTPUT RELAYS allocation
2.2.6.7.A OUTPUT RELAYS allocation (RL2 to RL4)
Functions RL 2 RL 3 RL 4
Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI< ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI2> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Therm Alarm ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Therm Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Alarm ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
52 Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Brkn Cond ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Close ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
79 Run ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
79 Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Active Group ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
record sheets
2.2.6.7.B OUTPUT RELAYS allocation (RL5 and RL6)
Functions RL 5 RL 6
Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
I>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Ie>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tIe>>> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI< ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tI2> ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Therm Alarm ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Therm Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Alarm ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
52 Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Brkn Cond ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Fail ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
CB Close ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux1 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
tAux2 ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
79 Run ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
79 Trip ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
Active Group ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO
record sheets
2.2.6.8 Configuration of the latch of the output relays RL2 to RL6
Output 2 ! YES ! NO
Output 3 ! YES ! NO
Output 4 ! YES ! NO
Output 5 ! YES ! NO
Output 6 ! YES ! NO
record sheets
2.2.6.9 LOGIC INPUT allocation
2.2.6.9.A Inputs
Input 1 ! None ! Unlatch ! 52a

! 52b ! CB FLT ! Aux 1
! Aux 2 ! Blk Log (1) ! Blk Log (2)
! Strt Dist ! Cold L PU ! Log Sel 1
! Log Sel 2 ! Change Set ! θ Reset
! Block - 79 ! Trip Circ ! Start tBf





record sheets
2.2.6.9.B t AUX
Aux 1 : Time tAux 1 ms

Aux 2 : Time tAux 2 ms
2.2.6.10 BROKEN CONDUCTOR
Brkn Cond ! YES ! NO

tBC ms
RATIO I2/I1 %
2.2.6.11 Cold Load Pick up
Cold Load PU ? ! YES ! NO

tI> ? ! YES ! NO
tI>> ? ! YES ! NO
tI>>> ? ! YES ! NO
tIe> ? ! YES ! NO
tIe>> ? ! YES ! NO
tIe>>> ? ! YES ! NO
t2> ? ! YES ! NO
T Therm ? ! YES ! NO
Level %
tCL ms
2.2.6.12 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE
CB Fail ? ! YES ! NO
I< % In
tBF ms
Block I> ? ! YES ! NO

Block Ie> ? ! YES ! NO
record sheets
2.2.6.13 CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION
CT Supervision ! YES ! NO
t SUP s
CB Open S'vision ! YES ! NO

CB Open Time ms
CB Close S'vision ! YES ! NO

CB Close Time ms
CB Open Alarm? ! YES ! NO

CB Open NB
Σ Amps(n)? ! YES ! NO
n
t Open Pulse ms
t Close Pulse ms
2.2.7 RECORDS Menu
2.2.7.1 DISTURBANCE RECORD
Pre-time ms
Post-time ms
Disturb Rec Trig ! SUR INST. ! ON TRIP
2.2.7.2 TIME PEAK VALUE
Time Window mn
record sheets
BLANK PAGE
© 2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P124/EN T/E44 11/2010

P124 en T E44 PDF

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

P124 en T E44 PDF

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

MiCOM P124

Self & Dual Powered Overcurrent Relays

MiCOM P124 Page 1/2

SELF & DUAL POWERED OVERCURRENT RELAYS

Handling, installation and case dimensions Chapter 2

User Guide P124 Self-powered Relay Chapter 3-1

Menu Content MiCOM P124 Self-powered Chapter 3-2

User Guide P124 Dual-powered Relay Chapter 4-1

Menu Content MiCOM P124 Dual-powered Chapter 4-2

Technical data & curves characteristics Chapter 5

Applications Guide Chapter 6

Commissioning and Maintenance Guide Chapter 7

Communication Database Chapter 8

Connection Diagrams APPENDIX 1

Commissioning test and record sheets APPENDIX 2

Page 2/2 MiCOM P124

Safety Section Page 1/8

STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 3

3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 4

5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 7

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 8

Page 2/8 Safety Section

Safety Section Page 3/8

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY

• Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Page 4/8 Safety Section

3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth)

*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Safety Section Page 5/8

Page 6/8 Safety Section

UL and CSA/CUL Listed or Recognized equipment

Safety Section Page 7/8

External test blocks and test plugs

5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Page 8/8 Safety Section

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

6.2 Protective Class

IEC 60255-27: 2005 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment

6.3 Installation Category

IEC 60255-27: 2005 Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III):

2. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 3

3. INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS 4

2. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

3. INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS

NOTES : (1) Functions not available in case of loss of auxiliary power

2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 4

2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

168 158 ±0.5

Front panel (Holes sizes)

155 25.1 139.8

Warning 177 155.2

MiCOM E1 Battery case sizes :

1. DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS 3

3.5.5 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu 20

1. DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS

FIGURE 1: STRIKER SUPPLIED FROM P124

This tripping output is completely independent from any auxiliary supply.

FIGURE 2: TRIP OF THE CB COIL VIA A CHANGEOVER CONTACT

2.2 Front panel LED and magnetic flag

Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor (Earth)